Home

SQL*Plus or reference - Oracle Documentation

1. 1 SELECT amp GROUP_COL 2 MAX amp BER_COL MAXIMUM 3 FRO amp TABLE 4 GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL SQL gt 2 2 MAX amp BER_COL MAXIMUM SQL gt APPEND 2 MAX amp BER_COL MAXIMUM SQL gt C amp amp amp 2 MAX amp amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM SQL gt I 3i IN amp amp NUMBER_COL MINIMUM 4i SUM amp amp NUMBER_COL TOTAL 5i AVG amp amp NUMBER_COL AVERAGE 6i SQL gt 1 1 SELECT amp GROUP_COL SQL gt C amp amp amp 1 SELECT amp amp GROUP_COL SQL gt 7 7 GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL SQL gt C amp amp amp 7 GROUP BY amp amp GROUP_COL SQL gt SAVE STATS2 created file STATS2 Finally run the command file STATS2 and respond to the prompts for values as follows SQL gt START STATS2 Enter value Enter value for group_col JOB Enter value for number_col SAL for table E SQL Plus displays the following output JOB MAXIMUM MINIMUM TOTAL AVERAGE ANALYST 3000 3000 6000 3000 CLERK 1300 800 4150 1037 5 Manipulating Commands 3 25 Writing Interactive Commands MANAGER 2975 2450 8275 2758 33333 PRESIDENT 5000 5000 5000 5000 SALESMAN 1600 1250 5600 1400 Note that you were prompted for the values of NUMBER_COL and GROUP_COL only once If you were to run STATS2 again during the current session you would be prompted for
2. SQL gt GET SALES 1 COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN 2 COLUMN SAL HEADING SALARY FORMAT 99 999 3 COLUMN COMM HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 99 990 4 SELECT EMPNO ENAME SAL COMM 5 FROM EMP 6 WHERE JOB SALESMAN SQL gt CHANGE SALESMAN amp 1 6 WHERE JOB amp 1 SQL gt 1 1 COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN SQL gt CHANGE SALESMAN amp 1 1 COLUMN ENAME HEADING amp 1 SQL gt SAVE ONEJOB Created file ONEJOB Manipulating Commands 3 27 Writing Interactive Commands Now run the command with the parameter CLERK SQL gt START ONEJOB CLERK SQL Plus lists the line of the SQL command that contains the parameter before and after replacing the parameter with its value and then displays the output old 3 WHERE JOB amp 1 new 3 WHERE JOB CLERK EMPNO CLERK SALARY COMMISSION 7369 SMITH 800 7876 ADAMS 1 100 7900 JAMES 950 7934 MILLER 1 300 You can use any number of parameters in a command file Within a command file you can refer to each parameter any number of times and can include the parameters in any order Note You cannot use parameters when you run a command with RUN or slash You must store the command in a command file and run it with START or Before continuing return the
3. SQL gt SAVE PROMPT1 Created file PROMPT1 The TTITLE command sets the top title for your report For more information about the TTitile command see Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions in Chapter 4 Finally run the command file responding to the prompt for the title as shown SQL gt START PROMPT1 Enter a title up to 30 characters long Title Department Report as of 1 1 99 SQL Plus displays the following output Department Report as of 1 1 99 DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON Before continuing turn the TTITLE command you entered in the command file off as shown below SQL gt TTITLE OFF Manipulating Commands 3 29 Writing Interactive Commands Customizing Prompts for Substitution Variable If you want to customize the prompt for a substitution variable value use PROMPT and ACCEPT in conjunction with the substitution variable as shown in the following example Example 3 16 Using PROMPT and ACCEPT in Conjunction with Substitution Variables As you have seen in Example 3 15 SQL Plus automatically generates a prompt for a value when you use a substitution variable You can replace this prompt by including PROMPT and ACCEPT in the command file with the query that references the substitution variable To create such a file enter the commands shown
4. EMPLOYEE REPORT PAGE 1 DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE SALARY 10 CLARK 2 450 KING 5 000 ILLER 1 300 RREERERER REES olt O O AR sum 8 750 20 SMITH 800 ADAMS 1 100 FORD 3 000 SCOTT 3 000 JONES 2 975 se kE O a sum 10 875 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL ACME WIDGET EMPLOYEE REPORT PAGE 2 4 36 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Storing and Printing Query Results DEPARTMENT PLOYE SALARY 30 ALLE 1 600 BLAKE 2 850 ARTIN 1 250 JAMES 900 TURNER 1 500 WARD 1 250 ge ee ae ee e Aii sum 9 400 WIRE RERR eee mere sum 29 025 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Formatting Query Results 4 37 Creating Web Reports Creating Web Reports SQL Plus allows you to generate either a complete standalone web page or HTML output which can be embedded in a web page You can use SOQLPLUS MARKUP HTML ON or SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON to produce standalone web pages SQL Plus generates complete HTML pages automatically encapsulated with lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt tags The content is written to a HTML table by default though you can optionally direct output to the HTML lt PRE gt tag so that it displays in a web browser exactly as it appears in SQL Plus See the SQLPLUS MARKUP command in the Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command section of Chapter 7 and the SET MARKUP command in the SET section of Cha
5. To add an ORDER BY clause to the query enter SQL gt LIST 2 2 FROM EMP SQL gt INPUT ORDER BY ENAME Command Reference 8 73 INPUT LIST 2 ensures that line 2 is the current line INPUT adds a new line containing the ORDER BY clause after the current line The SQL buffer now contains the following lines 1 SELECT ENAME DEPTNO SAL COMM 2 FROM EMP 3 ORDER BY ENAME To add a two line WHERE clause enter SQL gt LIST 2 2 FROM EMP SQL gt INPUT 3 WHERE JOB SALESMAN 4 AND COM 500 5 INPUT prompts you for new lines until you enter an empty line The SQL buffer now contains the following lines ELECT ENAME DEPTNO SAL COMM ROM EMP ERE JOB SALESMAN CO 500 ORDER BY ENAME Hj N OR WNE 2S 5 8 74 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference LIST LIST Purpose Lists one or more lines of the SOL buffer Syntax L IST n n m n n LAST n LAST LAST Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause n Lists line n nm Lists lines n through m n Lists line n through the current line n LAST Lists line n through the last line Lists the current line n Lists the current line through line n LAST Lists the current line through the l
6. The semicolon means that this is the end of the command Press Return SQL Plus processes the command and displays the results on the screen EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL 7369 SMITH CLERK 800 7521 WARD SALESMAN 1250 7654 MARTIN SALESMAN 1250 7876 ADAMS CLERK 1100 7900 JAMES CLERK 800 7934 ILLER CLERK 1300 9 rows selected SQL gt 2 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Entering and Executing Commands After displaying the results and the number of rows retrieved SQL Plus displays the command prompt again If you made a mistake and therefore did not get the results shown above simply re enter the command The headings may be repeated in your output depending on the setting of a system variable called PAGESIZE Whether you see the message concerning the number of records retrieved depends on the setting of a system variable called FEEDBACK You will learn more about system variables later in this chapter in the section Variables that Affect Running Commands To save space the number of records selected will not be shown in the rest of the examples in this Guide Understanding SQL Command Syntax Just as spoken language has syntax rules that govern the way we assemble words into sentences SQL Plus has syntax rules that govern how you assemble words into commands You must follow these rules if you want SQL Plus to accept and execute your commands Dividing
7. To run this command file enter SQL gt START PROMOTE 7280 CLERK 950 SQL Plus then executes the following command SELECT FROM EMP WHERE MGR 7280 AND JOB CLERK AND SAL gt 950 8 132 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference STARTUP STARTUP Purpose Starts an Oracle instance with several options including mounting and opening a database You cannot use STARTUP to start Oracle instances on Oracle7 servers Syntax STARTUP FORCE RESTRICT PFILE filename EXCLUSIVE PARALLEL RETRY SHARED RETRY MOUNT dbname OPEN open_options dbname NOMOUNT where open_options has the following syntax READ ONLY WRITE RECOVER RECOVER Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term and clause FORCE RESTRICT Shuts down the current Oracle instance if it is running with SHUT DOWN mode ABORT before restarting it If the current instance is run ning and FORCE is not specified an error results FORCE is useful while debugging and under abnormal circumstances It should not nor mally be used Only allows Oracle users with the RESTRICTED SESSION system priv ilege to connect to the database Later you can use the ALTER SYSTEM command to disable the restricted session feature PFILE filename Causes the specified paramet
8. Department Employee Salary ACCOUNTING CLARK 2 450 00 KING 5 000 00 ILLER 1 300 00 ee Be Se ee ie ay rr tes Subtotal 8 750 00 RESEARCH ADAMS 1 100 00 FORD 3 000 00 JONES 2 975 00 SCOTT 3 000 00 SMITH 800 00 RAMEE RERREEII gt s es O OU aires TENEN Subtotal 10 875 00 SALES ALLE 1 600 00 BLAKE 2 850 00 JAMES 950 00 MARTIN 1 250 00 TURNER 1 500 00 WARD 1 250 00 REMIT ll i a a ce is cae Subtotal 9 400 00 Total 29 025 00 The following example illustrates producing a report containing a CLOB column and then displaying it with the SET LOBOFFSET command Assume you have already created a table named clob_tab which contains a column named clob_col of type CLOB The clob_col contains the following data Remember to run the Departmental Salary Bill report each month This report contains confidential information To produce a report listing the data in the col_clob column enter SQL gt variable t clob SQL gt begin 2 select clob_col into t from clob_tab 3 end 4 Command Reference 8 149 VARIABLE PL SQL procedure successfully completed To print 200 characters from the column clob_col enter SQL gt set LONG 200 SQL gt print t The following output results T Remember to run the Departmental Salary Bill report each month This report contains confidential information To set the printing position to the 21st character enter SQL gt set LOBOFFSET 21 SQL gt
9. To display the prompt Enter date hired and place the reply ina DATE variable named HIRED with the format dd mm yy and a default of 01 01 99 enter SQL gt ACCEPT hired DATE FORMAT dd mm yy DEFAULT 01 01 99 gt PROMPT Enter date hired To display the prompt Enter employee lastname and place the reply ina CHAR variable named LASTNAME enter SQL gt ACCEPT lastname CHAR FORMAT A20 gt PROMPT Enter employee lastname Command Reference 8 11 APPEND APPEND Purpose Adds specified text to the end of the current line in the SQL buffer Syntax A PPEND text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause text Represents the text you wish to append If you wish to separate text from the preceding characters with a space enter two spaces between APPEND and text To APPEND text that ends with a semicolon end the command with two semicolons SQL Plus interprets a single semicolon as an optional command terminator Examples To append a space and the column name DEPT to the second line of the buffer make that line the current line by listing the line as follows SQL gt 2 2 FROM EMP Now enter APPEND SQL gt APPEND DEPT SQL gt 2 2 FROM EMP DEPT Notice the double space between APPEND and DEPT The first space separates APPEND from the characters to be appended the se
10. SQL gt LIST 1 SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE DEPTNO 10 4 ORDER BY SAL DESC If the query shown is not in your buffer re enter the query now Next enter the SAVE command followed by the filename DEPTINFO SQL gt SAVE DEPTINFO Created file DEPTINFO You can verify that the command file DEPTINFO exists by entering the SOL Plus HOST command followed by your host operating system s file listing command SQL gt HOST your_host s_file_listing_command You can use the same method to save a PL SQL block currently stored in the buffer Creating a Command File by Using INPUT and SAVE If you use INPUT to enter your commands you can enter SQL Plus commands as well as one or more SQL commands or PL SQL blocks into the buffer You must enter the SQL Plus commands first and the SQL command s or PL SQL block s last just as you would if you were entering the commands directly to the command prompt Manipulating Commands 3 9 Saving Commands for Later Use You can also store a set of SQL Plus commands you plan to use with many different queries by themselves in a command file Example 3 7 Saving Commands Using INPUT and SAVE Suppose you have composed a query to display a list of salespeople and their commissions You plan to run it once a month to keep track of how well each employee is doing To compose and save the query using INPUT you must first clear the buffe
11. COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected Listing Suppressing and Restoring Page Title Definitions To list a page title definition enter the appropriate title command with no clauses ITI BTI To suppress a title definition enter TTITLE OFF BTITLE OFF These commands cause SQL Plus to cease displaying titles on reports but do not clear the current definitions of the titles You may restore the current definitions by entering TTITLE ON 4 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions BIITLE ON Displaying Column Values in Titles You may wish to create a master detail report that displays a changing master column value at the top of each page with the detail query results for that value below You can reference a column value in a top title by storing the desired value in a variable and referencing the variable in a TTITLE command Use the following form of the COLUMN command to define the variable COLUMN column_name NEW_VALUE variable_name You must include the master column in an ORDER BY clause and in a BREAK command using the SKIP PAGE clause Example 4 23 Creating a Master Detail Report Suppose you want to create a report that displays two different managers employee numbers each at the top of a separate page and the people reporting to the manager on the same page as the manager s employe
12. SQL gt CLEAR BUFFER buffer cleared SQL gt INPUT 1 PROMPT Enter a valid employee number 2 PROMPT For example 7369 7499 7521 3 ACCEPT ENUMBER BER PROMPT Emp no 4 SELECT ENAME MGR JOB SAL 5 FROM EMP 6 WHERE EMPNO amp ENUMBER 7 SQL gt SAVE PROMPT2 Created file PROMPT2 Next run the command file SQL Plus prompts for the value of ENUMBER using the text you specified with PROMPT and ACCEPT SQL gt START PROMPT2 Enter a valid employee number For example 7369 7499 7521 Emp No Try entering characters instead of numbers to the prompt for Emp No Emp No ONE ONE is not a valid number Emp No Since you specified NUMBER after the variable name in the ACCEPT command SQL Plus will not accept a non numeric value Now enter a number Emp No 7521 3 30 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using Bind Variables old new ERE EMPNO amp ENUMBER ERE EMPNO 7521 3 WH 3 WH SQL Plus displays the following output ENAME MGR JOB SALARY WARD 7698 SALESMAN 1 250 Sending a Message and Accepting Return as Input If you want to display a message on the user s screen and then have the user enter Return after reading the message use the
13. One or more of the expressions columns or column aliases you reference in the OF clause must also be in the SELECT command a The expression column or column alias you reference in the ON clause must occur in the SELECT command and in the most recent BREAK command a Ifyou reference either ROW or REPORT in the ON clause also reference ROW or REPORT in the most recent BREAK command To remove all COMPUTE definitions use the CLEAR COMPUTES command Examples To subtotal the salary for the clerk analyst and salesman job classifications with a compute label of TOTAL enter SQL gt BREAK ON JOB SKIP 1 SQL gt COMPUTE SUM LABEL TOTAL OF SAL ON JOB SQL gt SELECT JOB ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE JOB IN CLERK ANALYST SALESMAN 4 ORDER BY JOB SAL The following output results JOB ENAME SAL ANALYST SCOTT 3000 FORD 3000 FOI s TOTAL 6000 Command Reference 8 43 COMPUTE CLERK SMIT JAMES a MILLER KK KKK KKK TOTAL SALESMAN WARD MARTIN TURNE Kk KKK KKK TOTAL To calculate the total of salaries less than 1 000 on a report enter SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON REPORT SQL gt BREAK ON REPORT SQL gt COLUMN DUMMY HI SQL gt SELECT D 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL lt 10 4 O
14. RIB EPTH 2 LINI D ENUM ON INDI To display the above settings enter SQL gt D ESCRIB emp_object The following output results ENT ON ame Null Type 1 EMPLOYEE ECUR_PERSON 2 1 AME VARCHAR2 20 3 1 ADDR E CUR_ADDRESS 4 1 ADDR1 ECUR_ADDRESS1 5 Al DOB DATE 6 1 GENDER VARCHARZ2 10 7 DEPT ECUR_DEPARTMENT 8 7 DEPTNO UMBER 9 7 DEPT_NAMF VARCHARZ2 20 Command Reference 8 115 SET 10 7 LOCATIO VARCHAR2 20 11 START_DATE DATE 12 POSITION VARCHAR2 1 13 SAL RECUR_SALARY 14 13 ANNUAL SAL UMBER 10 2 1 T3 EMP_TYPE VARCHAR2 1 16 13 COM UMBER 10 2 17 13 PENALTY_RATE UMBER 5 2 ESCAPE If you define the escape character as an exclamation point then SQL gt SET ESCAPE SQL gt ACCEPT vl PROMPT Enter amp 1 displays this prompt Enter amp 1 HEADING To suppress the display of column headings in a report enter SQL gt SET HEADING OFF If you then run a SQL SELECT command SQL gt SE ECT ENAI E SAL FROM EMP 2 WHE E JOB CLERK the following output results ADAMS 1100 JAMES 950 MILLER 1300 INSTANCE To set the default instance to PROD1 e
15. where option represents one of the following clauses LI AS alias E AR OR MAT format KE type name attribute_name alias OFF To Pk H Terms and Clauses Enter ATTRIBUTE followed by type_name attribute_name and no other clauses to list the current display characteristics for only the specified attribute Enter ATTRIBUTE with no clauses to list all current attribute display characteristics Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause type_name attribute_name Identifies the data item typically the name of an attribute within the set of attributes for a given object of Object Type type_name If you select objects of the same Object Type an ATTRIBUTE command for that type_name attribute_name will apply to all such objects you refer ence in that session ALI AS alias Assigns a specified alias to a type_name attribute_name which can be used to refer to the type_name attribute_name in other ATTRIBUTE com mands Command Reference 8 17 ATTRIBUTE CLE AR Resets the display characteristics for the attribute_name The format specification must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 not a vari able FOR MAT format Specifies the display format of the column The format specification must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 not a variable LIKE type_name attribute_name alias Copies the display characteristics of another attribute LIKE copies only charac
16. Connecting to the Default Database In order to access data in a given database you must first connect to the database When you start SQL Plus you normally connect to your default Oracle database under the username and password you enter while starting Once you have logged in you can connect under a different username with the SQL Plus CONNECT command The username and password must be valid for the database For example to connect the username TODD to the default database using the password FOX you could enter CONNECT TODD FOX If you omit the username and password SQL Plus prompts you for them You also have the option of typing only the username following CONNECT and omitting the password SQL Plus then prompts for the password Because CONNECT first disconnects you from your current database you will be left unconnected to any database if you use an invalid username and password in your CONNECT command If you log on or connect as a user whose account has expired SQL Plus prompts you to change your password before you can connect If an account is locked a message is displayed and connection as this user is not permitted until the account is unlocked by your DBA You can disconnect the username currently connected to Oracle without leaving SQL Plus by entering the SQL Plus command DISCONNECT at the SQL Plus command prompt The default database is configured at an operating system level by setting operating system en
17. Note DEL is aSQL Plus command and DELETE is a SQL command For more information about the SQL DELETE command see the Oracle8i SQL Reference Examples Assume the SQL buffer contains the following query ELECT ENAME DEPTNO ROM EMP HERE JOB SALESMAN Hj Mn WN ER z 8 54 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DEL 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO To make the line containing the WHERE clause the current line you could enter SQL gt LIST 3 3 WHERE JOB SALESMAN followed by SQL gt DEL The SQL buffer now contains the following lines 1 SELECT ENAME DEPTNO 2 FROM EMP 3 ORDER BY DEPTNO To delete the second line of the buffer enter SQL gt DEL 2 The SQL buffer now contains the following lines 1 SELECT ENAME DEPTNO 2 ORDER BY DEPTNO Command Reference 8 55 DESCRIBE DESCRIBE Purpose Lists the column definitions for the specified table view or synonym or the specifications for the specified function or procedure Syntax DESC RIBE schema object connect_identifier Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause schema Represents the schema where the object resides If you omit schema SQL Plus assumes you own object object Represents the table vie
18. To recover the database until a specified time enter SQL gt RECOVER DATABASE UNTIL TIME 23 NOV 99 04 32 00 To recover the two tablespaces ts_one and ts_two from the database enter SQL gt RECOVER TABLESPACE ts_one ts_two To recover the datafile datal db from the database enter SQL gt RECOVER DATAFILE datal db Command Reference 8 87 REMARK REMARK Purpose Begins a comment in a command file SQL Plus does not interpret the comment as a command Syntax REM ARK Usage Notes The REMARK command must appear at the beginning of a line and the comment ends at the end of the line A line cannot contain both a comment and a command For details on entering comments in command files using the SQL comment delimiters or the ANSI ISO comment delimiter refer to Placing Comments in Command Files in Chapter 3 Example The following command file contains some typical comments REM COMPUTE uses BREAK ON REPORT to break on end of table BREAK ON REPORT COMPUTE SUM OF DEPARTMENT 10 DEPARTMENT 20 DEPARTMENT 30 TOTAL BY JOB ON REPORT REM Each column displays the sums of salaries by job for REM one of the departments 10 20 30 SELECT JOB S
19. security level The combination of a hierarchical classification and a set of non hierarchical compartments that represent the sensitivity of information Glossary 19 Glossary 20 select To fetch rows from one or more database tables using a query the SOL statement SELECT SELECT list The list of items that follow the keyword SELECT in a query These items may include column names SQL functions constants pseudo columns calculations on columns and aliases The number of columns in the result of the query will match the number of items in the SELECT list SELECT statement A SQL statement that specifies which rows and columns to fetch from one or more tables or views See also SQL statement Server Oracle software that handles the functions required for concurrent shared data access to an Oracle database The server portion receives and processes SQL and PL SQL statements originating from client applications The computer that manages the server portion must be optimized for its duties session The time after a username connects to an Oracle database and before disconnecting and the events that happen in that time SET command variable See system variable SGA See also System Global Area SGA spooling Sending or saving output to a disk storage area Often used in order to print or transfer files The SQL Plus SPOOL command controls spooling SQL Structured Query Language The internationally accepted
20. 30 SALESMAN ALLE 1600 SALESMAN WARD 1250 SALESMAN MARTIN 1250 SALESMAN TURNER 1500 ERIE RFERK JAT 8B eet ae avg 1400 KEK KKK KK sum 6550 6 rows selected Command Reference 8 23 BTITLE BTITLE Purpose Places and formats a specified title at the bottom of each report page or lists the current BTITLE definition For a description of the old form of BTITLE see Appendix F Syntax BTI TLE printspec text variable ON QEF Terms and Clauses Refer to the TTITLE command for additional information on terms and clauses in the BTITLE command syntax Enter BTITLE with no clauses to list the current BTITLE definition Usage Notes If you do not enter a printspec clause before the first occurrence of text BTITLE left justifies the text SOL Plus interprets BTITLE in the new form if a valid printspec clause LEFT SKIP COL and so on immediately follows the command name Examples To set a bottom title with CORPORATE PLANNING DEPARTMENT on the left and a date on the right enter SQL gt BTITLE LEFT CORPORATE PLANNING DEPARTMENT gt RIGHT 23 Nov 1999 To set a bottom title with CONFIDENTIAL in column 50 followed by six spaces and a date enter SQL gt BTITLE COL 50 CONFIDENTIAL TAB 6 23 Nov 1999 8 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CHANGE CHANGE Purpose Changes the first occurrence of text on the current line in t
21. M lt o gt uses HTML markup options lt o gt R lt n gt uses restricted mode lt n gt S uses silent mod Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help 7 11 Getting Help Getting Help To access online help for SQL Plus commands you can type HELP followed by the command name at the SQL command prompt For example SQL gt HELP ACCEPT To display a list of SQL Plus commands type HELP followed by either TOPICS or INDEX HELP TOPICS displays a single column list of SQL Plus commands HELP INDEX displays a four column list of SQL Plus commands which usually fits in a single screen For example SQL gt HELP INDEX If you get a response that help is unavailable consult your database administrator See the HELP command in Chapter 8 for more information 7 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 8 Command Reference This chapter contains descriptions of SQL Plus commands listed alphabetically Use this chapter for reference only Each description contains the following parts Purpose Discusses the basic use s of the command Syntax Shows how to enter the command Refer to Chapter 1 for an explanation of the syntax notation Terms and Clauses Describes the function of each term or clause appearing in the syntax Usage Notes Provides additional information on how the command works and on uses of the command Examples Gives one or more examples of the command A summary table that lists
22. PRE FORMAT ON OFF NEWP AGE 1 n NONE P Bi ULL text UMF ORMAT format UM WIDTH 10 n N N N AGES IZE 24 n AU SE ON OFF text D RECSEP WR APPED RECSEPCHAR _ c SERVEROUT PUT ON OFF SIZE n FOR MAT WRA PP WRAPPED TRU NCATED SHIFT INOUT VIS IBLE INV ISIBLE SHOW MODE ON OFF SOLBL ANKLINES ON OFF SOLC ASE MIX ED LO WER UP PER SOLCO NTINUE gt text SOLN UMBER ON OFF SOLPRE FIX c EA CH OFF E D WOR D_ SQLP ROMPT SOL gt text SOLT ERMINATOR c ON OFF SUF FIX SQL text TAB ON OFF TERM OUT ON OFF TI ME ON OFF TIMI NG ON OFF dl T RIM OUT ON OFF RIMS POOL ON OFF UND ERLINE c ON OFF VER IFY ON OFF WRA P ON OFF Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term clause or system variable APPI NFO ON OFF text Sets automatic registering of command files through the DBMS_ APPLICATION_INFO package This enables the performance and resource usage of each command file to be monitored by your DBA The registered name appears in the MODULE column of the V SES Command Reference 8 99 SET SION and V SQLAREA virtual tables You can also rea
23. SQL gt SELEC T ENAME SAL 2 FRO EMP ENE Formatting Query Results 4 19 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines 3 WHERE JOB SALESMAN SQL Plus displays the results ENAME SAL ALLEN 1600 WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 URNER 1500 KRRKERERER a TOTAL 5600 To print a grand total or grand average grand maximum and so on in addition to subtotals or sub averages and so on include a break column and an ON REPORT clause in your BREAK command Then enter one COMPUTE command for the break column and another to compute ON REPORT BREAK ON break_column ON REPORT COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column ON break_column COMPUTE function LABEL Jabel_name OF column ON REPORT Computing Multiple Summary Values and Lines You can compute and print the same type of summary value on different columns To do so enter a separate COMPUTE command for each column Example 4 14 Computing the Same Type of Summary Value on Different Columns To print the total of salaries and commissions for all salesmen first enter the following COMPUTE command SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL COMM ON REPORT You do not have to enter a BREAK command the BREAK you entered in Example 4 13 is still in effect Now add COMM to the current query SQL gt 1 SELECT ENAME SAL COM Finally run the revis
24. To copy EMP from a remote database into a table called EMPCOPY on your own database enter the following command Note See your DBA for an appropriate username password and service name for a remote computer that contains a copy of EMP SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER BOSTONDB gt CREATE EMPCOPY gt USING SELECT FROM EMP SQL Plus displays the following messages Array fetch bind size is 20 arraysize is 20 Will commit when done copycommit is 0 Maximum long size is 80 long is 80 SQL Plus then creates the table EMPCOPY copies the rows and displays the following additional messages Table EMPCOPY created 14 rows selected from SCOTT BOSTONDB 14 rows inserted into EMPCOPY Accessing SQL Databases 6 7 Copying Data from One Database to Another 14 rows committed into EMPCOPY at DEFAULT HOST connection In this COPY command the FROM clause directs COPY to connect you to the database with the specification D BOSTON MFG as SCOTT with the password TIGER Notice that you do not need a semicolon at the end of the command COPY is a SQL Plus command not a SQL command even though it contains a query Since most COPY commands are longer than one line you must use a hyphen optionally preceded by a space at the end of each line except the last Interpreting the Messages that COPY Displays The f
25. but requires more memory Values over approximately 100 provide lit tle added performance ARRAYSIZE has no effect on the results of SQL Plus operations other than increasing efficiency AUTO COMMIT ON OFF IMM EDIATE n Controls when Oracle commits pending changes to the database ON commits pending changes to the database after Oracle executes each successful INSERT UPDATE or DELETE command or PL SQL block OFF suppresses automatic committing so that you must commit changes manually for example with the SQL command COMMIT 8 100 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET IMMEDIATE functions in the same manner as the ON option n com mits pending changes to the database after Oracle executes n successful SOL INSERT UPDATE or DELETE commands or PL SQL blocks n cannot be less than zero or greater than 2 000 000 000 The statement counter is reset to zero after successful completion of n INSERT UPDATE or DELETE commands or PL SQL blocks after a commit after a rollback and after a SET AUTOCOMMIT command Note For this feature a PL SQL block is considered one transaction regardless of the actual number of SQL commands contained within it AUTOP RINT ON OFF Sets the automatic PRINTing of bind variables ON or OFF controls whether SQL Plus automatically displays bind variables referenced in a successful PL SQL block or used in an EXECUTE command For more information about displaying bind variabl
26. command SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following output Employee Department Name Salary Commission 30 ALLE 1600 300 30 WARD 1250 500 30 MARTIN 1250 1400 30 TURNER 1500 0 To change the character used to underline each column heading set the UNDERLINE variable of the SET command to the desired character Example 4 3 Setting the Underline Character To change the character used to underline headings to an equal sign and rerun the query enter the following commands SQL gt SET UNDERLINE Formatting Query Results 4 3 Formatting Columns SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following results Employee Department Name Salary Commission 30 ALLE 1600 300 30 WARD 1250 500 30 MARTIN 1250 1400 30 TURNER 1500 0 Now change the underline character back to a dash SQL gt SET UNDERLINE Note You must enclose the dash in quotation marks otherwise SQL Plus interprets the dash as a hyphen indicating that you wish to continue the command on another line Formatting NUMBER Columns When displaying NUMBER columns you can either accept the SQL Plus default display width or you can change it using the COLUMN command The sections below describe the default display and how you can alter the default with the COLUMN command Default Display A NUMBER column s width equals the width of the heading or the width of the FORMAT plus one space for th
27. 4 RETURI ERATOR DENOMINATOR 5 END 6 END mers SQL gt DESCRIBE rational SQL Plus lists the following information Name Null Type UMERATOR NUMBER DENOMINATOR NUMBER 8 60 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE AP MEMBER FUNCTION RATIONAL ORD ER R ETURNS NUMB ER To describe the object emp_object and then format the output using the SET DESCRIBE command first enter SQL gt DESCRIBE emp_object SQL Plus lists the following information ame Null Type LOYEE RECUR_PERSON DEPT RECUR_DEPARTMENT START_DATE DATE POSITIO VARCHAR2 1 SAL RECUR_SALARY To format the DESCRIBE output use the SET command as follows SQL gt SET LINESIZE 80 SQL gt SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 2 SQL gt SET DESCRIBE INDENT ON SQL gt SET DESCRIBE LINE OFF To display the settings for the object use the SHOW command as follows SQL gt SHOW DESCRIBE describe DEPTH 2 LINENUM OFF INDENT SQL gt DESCRIBE emp_object ON SQL Plus lists the following information ame Null Type OYEE ECUR_PERSON NAME VARCHARZ2 20 ADDR ECUR_ADDRESS ADDR1 ECUR_ADDRESS1 DOB DAT
28. 8 67 use with SET MARKUP 4 39 WARNING clause 8 67 exit conditional 8 151 8 153 expression GL 10 extension 8 96 8 111 8 137 GL 10 F FAILURE clause 8 67 FEEDBACK variable 8 105 file GL 10 file extension 8 96 8 111 8 137 file extensions 3 20 file names in at sign command 8 5 in double at sign command 8 7 in EDIT command 8 64 in GET command 8 69 inSAVE command 3 8 8 96 in SPOOL command 4 34 8 130 in SQLPLUS command 7 10 inSTART command 8 131 file type GL 11 filename GL 11 files command files 3 8 flat 4 34 FLAGGER variable 8 105 flat file 4 34 FLUSH variable 8 105 FOLD_AFTER clause 8 32 FOLD_BEFORE clause 8 32 footers aligning elements 8 92 displaying at bottom of page 8 89 displaying system maintained values 8 91 formatting elements 8 92 indenting 8 92 listing current definition 8 89 setting at the end of reports 4 22 suppressing definition 8 92 FORCE clause 8 133 form feed GL 11 format GL 11 column GL 24 mask GL 11 model GL 11 FORMAT clause 8 10 8 32 in ATTRIBUTE command 8 18 Index 9 in COLUMN command 4 5 4 6 in REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands 8 92 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 4 27 8 142 format models number 4 5 8 34 formfeed to begin a new page 4 31 8 107 formula column GL 11 FROM clause 8 83 FROM clause SQL Plus 6 5 8 49 function GL 11 G GET command 3 15 8 69 disabling E 5 LIST clause 8 69 modifying comm
29. COMPATIBILITY variable 8 103 CONCAT variable 3 26 8 103 COPYCOMMIT variable 6 8 8 103 COPYTYPECHECK variable 8 103 DEFINE clause 3 26 DEFINE variable 8 103 DESCRIBE variable 8 104 disabling E 5 DOCUMENT variable F 2 F 5 ECHO variable 3 16 8 104 EDITFILE variable 8 104 EMBEDDED variable 8 104 ESCAPE variable 3 26 8 104 FEEDBACK variable 8 105 FLAGGER variable 8 105 FLUSH variable 8 105 HEADING variable 8 105 HEADSEP variable 4 3 8 106 INSTANCE variable 8 106 LINESIZE variable 4 24 4 32 8 106 LOBOFFSET variable 8 107 LOGSOURCE variable 8 107 LONG variable 6 8 8 107 LONGCHUNKSITZE variable 8 107 MARKUP clause 8 107 MAXDATA variable F 2 F 6 NEWPAGE variable 4 31 8 107 NULL variable 8 107 NUMFORMAT clause 3 19 NUMFORMAT variable 8 108 NUMWIDTH variable 4 4 8 34 8 108 PAGESIZE clause 3 19 PAGESIZE variable 2 7 4 32 8 108 PAUSE clause 3 19 PAUSE variable 2 17 8 108 RECSEP variable 4 9 8 108 RECSEPCHAR variable 4 9 8 108 SCAN variable F 2 F 6 SERVEROUTPUT variable 8 109 SHIFTINOUT clause 3 19 SHIFTINOUT variable 8 109 SPACE variable F 2 F 6 SQLBLANKLINES variable 8 110 SQLCASE variable 8 110 SQLCONTINUE variable 8 110 SQLNUMBER variable 8 110 SQLPREFIX variable 8 110 SQLPROMPT variable 8 110 SQLTERMINATOR variable 8 110 SUFFIX variable 8 111 TAB variable 8 111 TERMOUT variable 4 30 8 111 TIME clause 3 19 TIME variable 8 111 TIMING variable 8 111
30. CPY0006 Select list has more columns than destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the SELECT command is greater than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of col umns being selected agrees with the number in the destination table A 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CPY0007 Select list has fewer columns than destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the SELECT command is less than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of col umns being selected agrees with the number in the destination table CPY0008 More column list name than columns in the destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the column name list is greater than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of col umns in the column list agrees with the number in the destination table CPY0009 Fewer column list name than columns in the destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the column name list is less than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re spec
31. Entering and Executing Commands Entering and Executing Commands Entering Commands Your computer s cursor or pointer typically an underline a rectangular block or a slash appears after the command prompt The cursor indicates the place where the next character you type will appear on your screen To tell SQL Plus what to do simply type the command you wish to use Usually you separate the words in a command from each other by a space or tab You can use additional spaces or tabs between words if you wish to make your commands more readable Note You will see examples of spacing and indentation throughout this Guide When you enter the commands in the exercises you do not have to space them as shown but you may find them clearer to read if you do Case sensitivity is operating system specific For the sake of clarity all table names column names and commands in this Guide appear in capital letters You can enter three kinds of commands at the command prompt a SQL commands for working with information in the database a PL SQL blocks also for working with information in the database a SQL Plus commands for formatting query results setting options and editing and storing SQL commands and PL SQL blocks The manner in which you continue a command on additional lines end a command or execute a command differs depending on the type of command you wish to enter and run Examples of how to run and execute
32. For more information about this option see TABLE text in Chapter 7 The new MARKUP syntax for SQLPLUS MARKUP and SET MARKUP is HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FORMAT ON OFF For more information about this option see MARKUP Options in Chapter 7 COLUMN ENTMAP ON OFF A new option ENTMAP ON I OFF has been added to the COLUMN command to add flexibility for mapping entities The default for COLUMN ENTMAP is the current value of the MARKUP HTML ENTMAP option ENTMAP ON OFF in the COLUMN command allows you to explicitly turn entity mapping on or off for selected columns in HTML output For more information about this option see the COLUMN command in Chapter 8 B 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Release 8 1 6 Enhancements SQL Plus Release 8 1 6 Enhancements SQL Loader is no longer used to install the SQL Plus command line help system The help system is now installed by running SQL Plus scripts See the Installation Guide for your operating system for instructions on how to install the help system A SQL Plus script is also provided to enable the removal of the help system The SQLPLUS command now has a RESTRICT option RESTRICT allows certain commands that interact with the operating system to be disabled Compared to disabling the same commands with the Product User Profile PUP table commands disabled with RESTRICT ca
33. L 18 odd When you run a subprogram the SQL commands within the subprogram may behave somewhat differently than they would outside the subprogram See your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for detailed information on the PL SQL language Running SQL Plus Commands You can use SQL Plus commands to manipulate SQL commands and PL SQL blocks and to format and print query results SQL Plus treats SQL Plus commands differently than SQL commands or PL SQL blocks For information on individual SQL Plus commands refer to the Command Reference in Chapter 8 To speed up command entry you can abbreviate many SQL Plus commands to one or a few letters Abbreviations for some SQL Plus commands are described along with the commands in Chapter 3 Chapter 4 and Chapter 6 For abbreviations of all SQL Plus commands refer to the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Example 2 4 Entering a SQL Plus Command This example shows how you might enter a SQL Plus command to change the format used to display the column SAL of the sample table EMP 1 On the command line enter this SOL Plus command SQL gt COLUMN SAL FORMAT 99 999 HI FADING SALARY If you make a mistake use Backspace to erase it and re enter When you have entered the line press Return SQL Plus notes the new format and displays the SQL Plus command prompt again ready for a new command Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 11 Entering and Executing Commands 2 Enter the RUN c
34. Now restrict the width of the column LOC and tell SQL Plus to wrap whole words to additional lines when necessary SQL gt COLUMN LOC FORMAT A7 WORD_WRAPPED Finally enter and run the following query SQL gt SELECT FROM DEPT SQL Plus displays the results DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON If you set RECSEP to EACH SQL Plus prints a line of characters after every row after every department for the above example Before continuing set RECSEP to OFF to suppress the printing of record separators SQL gt SET RECSEP OFF 4 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines When you use an ORDER BY clause in your SQL SELECT command rows with the same value in the ordered column or expression are displayed together in your output You can make this output more useful to the user by using the SQL Plus BREAK and COMPUTE commands to create subsets of records and add space and or summary lines after each subset COMPUTE command functions are always executed in the sequence AVG COUNT MINIMUM MAXIMUM NUMBER SUM STD VARIANCE regardless of their order in the COMPUTE command The column you specify in a BREAK command is called a break column By including the break column in your O
35. TRIMOUT variable 8 111 TRIMSPOOL variable 8 112 TRUNCATE variable F 2 F 7 UNDERLINE variable 4 3 8 112 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 8 147 VERIFY clause 3 23 VERIFY variable 3 26 8 112 WRAP variable 4 7 8 112 SET command variables system variables 2 13 SET MARKUP BODY clause 7 4 embedded CGI example 4 42 ENTMAP clause 4 47 7 5 Index 17 HEAD clause 7 4 HTML 7 4 interactive HTML example 4 39 4 41 PREFORMAT clause 7 7 See also SPOOL command SPOOL clause 7 4 TABLE clause 7 5 SET ROLE command disabling E 6 SET TRANSACTION command disabling E 6 SGA GL 23 SGA clause 8 125 shared disk systems mounting shared 8 134 shared mode database 8 134 SHIFTINOUT clause in LOGIN SQL 3 19 SHIFTINOUT variable 8 109 SHOW clause 8 138 SHOW command 2 13 8 123 GL 23 ALL clause 8 123 BTITLE clause 8 124 ERRORS clause 8 124 LABEL variable F 2 F 7 listing current page dimensions 4 33 LNO clause 8 124 PNO clause 8 125 RELEASE clause 8 125 REPFOOTER clause 8 125 REPHEADER clause 8 125 SPOOL clause 8 125 SQLCODE clause 8 125 TTITLE clause 8 125 USER clause 8 125 SHOWMODE variable 8 109 SHUTDOWN command 8 128 ABORT 8 128 IMMEDIATE 8 128 NORMAL 8 128 SILENT option 4 46 7 8 site profile GLOGIN SQL 7 10 LOGIN SQL 7 10 Index 18 See also user profile SKIP clause in BREAK command 4 13 8 21 in REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands 8 92 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 4
36. The instance is shutdown and no instance recovery is required on the next database startup NORMAL is the default option which waits for users to disconnect from the database Further connects are prohibited The database is closed and dis mounted The instance is shutdown and no instance recovery is required on the next database startup 8 128 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHUTDOWN Usage Notes SHUTDOWN with no arguments is equivalent to SHUTDOWN NORMAL You must be connected to a database as SYSOPER or SYSDBA You cannot connect via a multi threaded server For more information about connecting to a database see the CONNECT command earlier in this chapter Example To shutdown the database in normal mode enter SQL gt SHUTDOWN Database closed Database dismounted Oracle instance shut down Command Reference 8 129 SPOOL SPOOL Purpose Stores query results in an operating system file and optionally sends the file to a printer Syntax SPO OL file_name ext OFF OUT Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause file_name ext Represents the name of the file to which you wish to spool SPOOL fol lowed by file_name begins spooling displayed output to the named file If you do not specify an extension SPOOL uses a default extension LST or LIS on most systems OFF Stops spooling OUT Stops spooling and sends the file to your host compute
37. and then returns control to the operating system 7 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command VERSION Option Displays the current version and level number for SQL Plus and then returns control to the operating system MARKUP Options M ARKUP You can use the MARKUP option to generate either a complete stand alone web page from your query or script or to generate HTML output which can be embedded in a web page MARKUP currently supports HTML 3 2 Use SQLPLUS MARKUP HTML ON or SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON to produce standalone web pages SQL Plus will generate complete HTML pages automatically encapsulated with lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt tags The HTML tags in a spool file are closed when SPOOL OFF is executed or SQL Plus exits The SILENT and RESTRICT command line options may be useful when used in conjunction with MARKUP You can use SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL OFF to generate HTML output suitable for embedding in an existing web page Output gener ated this way has no lt HTML gt or lt BODY gt tags In this release you can use MARKUP HTML ON to produce HTML output in either the lt PRE gt tag or in an HTML table Output to a table uses standard HTML lt TABLE gt lt TR gt and lt TD gt tags to automatically encode the rows and columns resulting from a query Output to an HTML table is now the default behavior when the HTML option is set ON You can generate
38. appearing above the column See also column heading host computer The computer from which you run SQL Plus Glossary 11 Glossary 12 HTML HTML Hyper Text Markup Language is the language used to write most of the documents available on the World Wide Web It provides display and linking specifications that are recognized by most web browsers The HTML recommendation is sponsered by the World Wide Web Consortium w3c and further details about the w3c and the HTML recommendation can be found at the w3c web site hitp uww w3c org instance The background processes and memory area required to access an Oracle database A database system requires one instance and one database An Oracle database server consists of an SGA and a set of Oracle database server system processes instance failure See database instance failure instance recovery Recovery of an instance in the event of software or hardware failure so that the database is again available to users If the instance terminates abnormally then the instance recovery automatically occurs at the next instance startup Julian date An algorithm for expressing a date in integer form using the SQL function JDATE Julian dates allow additional arithmetic functions to be performed on dates justification See alignment label Defines the label to be printed for the computed value in the COMPUTE command The maximum length of a COMPUTE label is 500 characters LGWR Se
39. buffer An area where the user s SQL statements or PL SQL blocks are temporarily stored The SQL buffer is the default buffer You can edit or execute commands from multiple buffers however SQL Plus does not require the use of multiple buffers byte A group of eight sequential bits that represents a letter number or symbol that is a character Treated as a unit of data by a computer CGI script See Common Gateway Interface CHAR datatype An Oracle datatype provided for ANSI ISO compatibility A CHAR column is a fixed length column and can contain any printable characters such as A 3 amp or blanks and can have from 1 to 2000 characters or can be null character A single location on a computer system capable of holding one alphabetic character or numeric digit One or more characters are held in a field One or more fields make up a record and one or more records may be held in a file or database table character string A group of sequential letters numerals or symbols usually comprising a word or name or portion thereof clause A part of a SQL statement that does not constitute the full statement for example a WHERE clause client A user software application or computer that requests the services data or processing of another application or computer the server In a two task environment the client is the user process In a network environment the client is the local user process and the server may b
40. clause 7 3 and at sign 3 17 6 4 7 2 and EXIT FAILURE 7 11 BODY option 7 4 connect identifier 7 9 connecting to a remote database 6 4 display syntax 7 2 ENTMAP option 7 5 HEAD option 7 4 HTML option 7 4 MARKUP clause 7 4 MARKUP option 7 3 MARKUP SPOOL clause 7 4 NOLOG clause 7 10 PREFORMAT option 7 7 RESTRICT 7 8 E 8 running command files 3 17 service name 6 4 7 9 SILENT clause 7 8 SILENT option 4 46 7 8 SPOOL clause 7 6 syntax 7 2 SYSDBA clause 7 9 TABLE option 7 5 unsuccessful connection 7 10 username password 2 3 7 9 SQL PNO referencing in report titles 4 27 SQLPREFIX variable 8 110 SQLPROMPT variable 8 110 SQL SQLCODE using in EXIT command 8 67 SQLTERMINATOR 8 110 SQLTERMINATOR variable 8 71 8 110 STANDBY DATAFILE clause 8 84 STANDBY TABLESPACE clause 8 84 START clause 8 14 8 138 START command 3 16 8 131 GL 24 arguments 3 27 8 131 command file 3 16 8 131 disabling E 5 passing parameters toa command file 3 27 8 131 similar to at sign command 3 16 8 6 8 132 similar to double at sign command 8 7 8 132 starting SQL Plus 2 3 shortcuts 2 4 STARTUP command 8 133 EXCLUSIVE clause 8 133 FORCE clause 8 133 MOUNT clause 8 134 NOMOUNT clause 8 134 OPEN clause 8 134 PARALLEL clause 8 134 PFILE clause 8 133 RECOVER clause 8 134 RESTRICT clause 8 133 RETRY clause 8 134 SHARED clause 8 134 specifying a databas
41. dept_sel FOR SELECT FROM DEPT 3 END 4 PL SQL procedure successfully completed The results from the SELECT statement can now be displayed in SQL Plus with the PRINT command SQL gt PRINT dept_sel DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON The PRINT statement also closes the cursor To reprint the results the PL SQL block must be executed again before using PRINT Example 3 19 Using REFCURSOR Variables in Stored Procedures A REFCURSOR bind variable is passed as a parameter to a procedure The parameter has a REF CURSOR type First define the type SQL gt CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE cv_types AS 2 TYPE DeptCurTyp is REF CURSOR RETURN dept ROWTYPE 3 END cv_types 4 Package created Next create the stored procedure containing an OPEN FOR SELECT statement SQL gt CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE dept_rpt 2 dept_cv IN OUT cv_types DeptCurTyp AS 3 BEGIN 4 OPEN dept_cv FOR SELECT FROM DEPT 3 34 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables 5 END 6 Procedure created Execute the procedure with a SQL Plus bind variable as the parameter SQL gt VARIABL SQL gt E odcv R EXECUTE dept_rp EFCURSOR t odcv PL SQL procedure successfully com
42. enter SQL gt REPHEADER PAGE CENTER EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT SQL gt TTITLE RIGHT Page FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SQL gt SELECT ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL gt 2000 Page 1 EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT Page 2 NAI SAL JONES 2975 BLAKE 2850 CLARK 2450 SCOTT 3000 KING 5000 FORD 3000 6 rows selected To suppress the report header without changing its definition enter Command Reference 8 93 REPHEADER SQL gt REPHEADER OFF 8 94 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RUN Purpose Lists and executes the SQL command or PL SQL block currently stored in the SQL buffer Syntax R UN Usage Notes RUN causes the last line of the SQL buffer to become the current line The slash command functions similarly to RUN but does not list the command in the SQL buffer on your screen Example Assume the SQL buffer contains the following query SELECT DEPTNO FROM DEPT To RUN the query enter SQL gt RUN The following output results 1 SELECT DEPTNO FROM DEPT Command Reference 8 95 SAVE SAVE Purpose Saves the contents of the SQL buffer in a host operating system file a command file Syntax SAV E file_name ext CRE ATE EP LACE APP END Terms and Clauses
43. gt CREATE EMPCOPY2 gt USING SELECT FROM ADAMS DEPT 6 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Copying Data between Tables on One Database Of course you could get the same result by instructing COPY to log in to the remote database as ADAMS You cannot do that however unless you know the password associated with the username ADAMS Copying Data between Tables on One Database You can copy data from one table to another in a single database local or remote To copy between tables in your local database specify your own username and password and the service name for your local database in either a FROM or a TO clause omit the other clause SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER MYDATABASE gt INSERT EMPCOPY2 gt USING SELECT FROM EMP To copy between tables on a remote database include the same username password and service name in the FROM and TO clauses SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER BOSTONDB gt TO SCOTT TIGER BOSTONDB gt INSERT EMPCOPY2 gt USING SELECT FROM EMP Accessing SQL Databases 6 9 Copying Data between Tables on One Database 6 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Part Il Reference This section provides an overview of how to start SQL Plus It also provides a Command Reference that contains a description of each SQL Plus command The followin
44. listing current in buffer 3 3 saving current 3 8 8 96 setting character used toend andrun 8 110 SQL Plus abbreviations 2 11 command summary 8 2 continuing on additional lines 2 12 8 1 editing at command prompt 3 2 ending 2 13 8 1 entering and executing 2 11 entering during SQL command entry 8 110 obsolete command alternatives F 2 stopping while running 2 15 storing in command files 3 8 syntax conventions 1 3 tabs 2 5 types of 2 5 variables that affect running 2 13 writing interactive 3 21 comments GL 5 GL 18 including in command files 3 11 8 88 F 2 using to create 3 12 using to create 3 12 using REMARK to create 3 12 8 88 F 2 commit GL 6 COMMIT clause 8 67 WHENEVER OSERROR 8 151 WHENEVER SQLERROR 8 153 COMMIT command 2 13 Common Gateway Interface GL 6 communications GL 14 COMPATIBILITY clause in LOGIN SQL 3 19 COMPATIBILITY variable 8 103 computation GL 6 Index 6 COMPUTE command 4 11 8 41 AVG function 4 16 computing a summary on different columns 4 20 COUNT function 4 16 LABEL clause 4 17 4 19 8 42 listing all definitions 4 22 8 43 MAXIMUM function 4 16 maximum LABEL length 8 42 MINIMUM function 4 16 NUMBER function 4 16 OF clause 4 16 ON column clause 4 16 8 42 ON expr clause 8 42 ON REPORT clause 4 19 8 42 ON ROW clause 8 42 printing grand and sub summaries 4 20 printing multiple summaries on same column 4 21 printing summary lines at
45. tag This gives you the flexi bility to customize output for your browser or special needs ENTMAP ON OFF ENTMAP ON or OFF specifies whether or not SQL Plus replaces spe cial characters lt gt and amp with the HTML entities amp lt amp gt amp quot and amp amp respectively ENTMAP is set ON by default You can turn ENTMAP ON and OFF as required during a session For example with ENTMAP OFF SQL Plus screen output is SQL gt SELECT ENAME EMPNO 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL lt 2000 With ENTMAP ON SQL Plus screen output is SQL amp gt SELECT ENAME EMPNO 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL amp lt 2000 If entities are not mapped web browsers may treat data as invalid HTML and all subsequent output may display incorrectly ENTMAP OFF allows users to write their own HTML tags to customize output As entities in the lt HEAD gt and lt BODY gt tags are not mapped you must ensure that valid entities are used in the MARKUP HEAD and BODY options Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help 7 5 Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command SPOOL Note ENTMAP only has affect when either the HTML option is set ON or the SPOOL option is set ON For more information about using entities in your output see the COLUMN command in Chapter 8 ON OFF SPOOL ON or OFF specifies whether or not SQL Plus writes the HTML opening tag
46. 1 1 Commands Terms and Clauses Feature Example Explanation expr An unspecified expression morn A number or an expression with a NUMBER value text A CHAR constant with or without single quotes variable A user variable unless the text specifies another variable type Other words are explained where used if their meaning is not explained by context Table 1 2 Punctuation Feature Example Explanation vertical bar brackets ON OFF braces ON OFF underlining ON OFF ellipsis ieee Separates alternative syntax elements that may be optional or mandatory One or more optional items If two items appear separated by enter one of the items separated by Do not enter the brackets or A choice of mandatory items enter one of the items separated by Do not enter the braces or A default value if you enter nothing SOL Plus uses the underlined value Preceding item s may be repeated any number of times Enter other punctuation marks where shown in the command syntax Sample Tables Many of the concepts and operations in this Guide are illustrated by a set of sample tables These tables contain personnel records for a fictitious company As you complete the exercises in this Guide imagine that you are the personnel director for this company The exercises make use of the information in two sample tables EMP Contains information about the employees of the sample company 1
47. 18 file GL 18 redo Log Files ARCHIVE LOG command 8 13 REFCURSOR bind variables 3 33 in a stored function 3 33 REFCURSOR clause VARIABLE command 8 146 Relational Database Management System GL 18 RELEASE clause 8 125 remark GL 18 REMARK command 3 12 8 88 GL 18 remote computer GL 19 remote database GL 19 RENAME command disabling E 6 REPFOOTER clause 8 125 REPFOOTER command 4 22 8 89 aligning footer elements 8 92 BOLD clause 8 92 CENTER clause 8 92 COL clause 8 92 FORMAT clause 8 92 indenting report footers 8 92 LEFT clause 8 92 OFF clause 8 92 RIGHT clause 8 92 SKIP clause 8 92 suppressing current definition 8 92 TAB clause 8 92 REPHEADER clause 8 125 REPHEADER command 4 22 8 91 aligning header elements 4 24 aligning heading elements 8 92 BOLD clause 8 92 CENTER clause 8 92 COL clause 8 92 FORMAT clause 8 92 indenting headings 8 92 LEFT clause 8 92 OFF clause 8 92 PAGE clause 8 91 RIGHT clause 8 92 SKIP clause 8 92 suppressing current definition 8 92 TAB clause 8 92 REPLACE clause in COPY command 6 6 8 50 inSAVE command 3 18 8 96 report breaks 8 19 title F 2 reports 1 2 GL 19 CGI scripts 4 42 clarifying with spacing and summary lines 4 11 columns 8 31 creating bottom titles 4 22 8 24 F 2 creating footers 8 89 creating headers 8 91 creating headers and footers 4 22 creating master detail 4 29 8 36 creating top title
48. 23 GL 25 bind variables 3 31 substitution variables 3 22 system variables 2 13 user variables 8 52 VARIANCE function 4 16 VERIFY clause 3 23 Index 22 VERIFY variable 3 26 8 112 WwW WARNING clause 8 67 web outputting reports 4 38 web browser 4 38 WHENEVER OSERROR command 8 151 COMMIT clause 8 151 CONTINUE clause 8 151 EXIT clause 8 151 NONE clause 8 151 ROLLBACK clause 8 151 WHENEVER SQLERROR command 3 18 8 153 COMMIT clause 8 153 CONTINUE clause 8 153 EXIT clause 8 153 NONE clause 8 153 ROLLBACK clause 8 153 width GL 25 WORD_WRAPPED clause 4 7 4 10 8 37 WRAP variable 4 7 8 112 WRAPPED clause 4 7 8 37 wrapping GL 25
49. 25 8 141 used to place blank lines before bottom title 4 25 SKIP PAGE clause 4 13 4 14 8 22 slash command 8 9 using with files loaded with GET command 8 69 SPACE variable F 2 F 6 SPOOL clause 7 4 7 6 8 125 SPOOL command 4 33 8 130 GL 20 disabling E 5 filename 4 34 8 130 OFF clause 4 34 8 130 OUT clause 4 35 8 130 to HTML file 7 6 turning spooling off 4 34 8 130 use with SET MARKUP 4 39 spooling GL 20 SQL GL 20 buffer GL 21 command GL 21 query GL 17 query results GL 18 reports GL 19 rollback GL 19 script GL 21 select GL 20 statement GL 21 transaction GL 24 SQL buffer 2 9 SQL clause 8 29 SQL commands list of major D 1 SQL database language 1 2 SQL DML statements reporting on 8 101 SQL Loader GL 21 SQL Net GL 14 GL 21 SQL Plus GL 21 basic concepts 1 2 command prompt 2 4 command summary 8 2 database administration 5 2 exiting 2 4 8 67 exiting conditionally 8 151 8 153 limits C 1 LOGIN SQL 3 19 obsolete command alternatives F 2 overview 1 2 running commands in batch mode 3 18 8 68 setting up environment 3 19 shortcuts to starting 2 4 starting 2 3 7 2 substitution variable GL 22 variable GL 25 what you need torun 1 6 who can use 1 3 SQLBLANKLINES variable 8 110 SQLCASE variable 8 110 SQLCODE clause 8 125 SHOW command 8 125 SQLCONTINUE variable 8 110 SQLNUMBER variable 8 110 SQLPLUS command 2 3 4 42 7 2 clause 7 2
50. 8 101 AUTOTRACE variable 3 36 8 101 AVG function 4 16 B background process GL 2 startup after abnormal termination 8 128 batch mode 3 18 8 68 BEGIN command 2 10 disabling E 6 bind reference GL 2 bind variables 3 31 GL 2 GL 25 creating 8 145 displaying 8 79 displaying automatically 8 101 8 146 in PL SQL blocks 8 146 in SQL statements 8 146 in the COPY command 8 146 REFCURSOR 3 33 bit GL 3 blank line in PL SQL blocks 2 10 in SQL commands 2 8 preserving inSQL commands 8 110 blocks GL 3 blocks PL SQL 1 2 continuing 2 10 editing in buffer 3 2 editing with host system editor 3 7 8 64 entering and executing 2 10 listing current in buffer 3 3 run from SQL buffer 2 10 saving current 3 8 8 96 setting character used toend 8 102 stored in SQL buffer 2 10 storing in command files 3 8 timing statistics 8 111 within SQL commands 2 8 BLOCKTERMINATOR 8 102 8 110 8 111 body GL 3 BODY clause 7 4 BODY option 7 4 BOLD clause 8 92 8 141 break GL 3 break columns 4 11 8 19 GL 3 inserting space when value changes 4 13 specifying multiple 4 14 suppressing duplicate values in 4 12 BREAK command 4 11 8 19 and SQL ORDER BY clause 4 11 4 12 4 14 8 20 clearing BREAKS 4 15 displaying column values in titles 4 29 DUPLICATES clause 8 22 inserting space after every row 4 13 inserting space when break column changes 4 13 listing current break definition 4 15 8 22 ON column
51. 8 30 Index 4 ALIAS clause 8 31 and BREAK command 8 21 and DEFINE command 8 52 CLEAR clause 4 9 8 31 DEFAULT clause F 3 displaying column values in bottom titles 4 30 8 36 displaying column values in top titles 4 29 8 35 entering multiple 8 37 ENTMAP clause 8 31 FOLD_AFTER clause 8 31 8 32 FOLD_BEFORE clause 8 32 FORMAT clause 4 5 4 6 8 32 formatting columns 4 6 formatting NUMBER columns 4 4 8 33 HEADING clause 4 2 8 35 HEADSEP character 8 35 JUSTIFY clause 8 35 LIKE clause 4 8 8 35 listing column display attributes 4 8 4 9 8 30 NEW_VALUE clause 4 29 4 30 8 35 NEWLINE clause 8 35 NOPRINT clause 4 29 8 36 NULL clause 8 36 OFF clause 4 9 8 37 OLD_VALUE clause 4 30 8 36 ON clause 4 9 8 37 PRINT clause 8 36 resetting a column to default display 4 9 8 31 F 2 restoring column display attributes 4 9 8 37 storing current date in variable for titles 4 30 8 38 suppressing column display attributes 4 9 8 37 TRUNCATED clause 4 7 8 37 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 8 147 WORD_WRAPPED clause 4 7 4 10 8 37 WRAPPED clause 4 7 8 37 column expression GL 5 column headings aligning 8 35 changing 4 2 8 35 changing character used to underline 4 3 8 112 changing to two or more words 4 3 8 35 displaying on more than one line 4 3 8 35 suppressing printing inareport 8 105 when truncated 8 32 when truncated for CHAR and LONG co
52. 8 98 listing current settings 2 13 8 123 listing old and new values 8 109 storing and restoring 3 20 used with substitution variables 3 26 system maintained values displaying in headers and footers 8 91 displaying in titles 4 27 8 140 formatting in titles 4 28 T TAB clause 8 92 8 141 TAB variable 8 111 TABLE clause 7 5 TABLE option 7 5 tables 1 2 GL 23 access to sample 1 7 alias GL 23 controlling destination when copying 6 6 8 50 copying values between 6 4 6 9 8 49 DEPT 1 5 EMP 1 4 listing column definitions 2 16 8 56 referring to another user s when copying 6 8 sample 1 4 TABLESPACE clause 8 84 tablespaces recovering 8 82 tag HTML 4 38 TERMOUT variable 8 111 storing current date in variable for titles 4 30 using with SPOOL command 8 130 text 7 4 7 5 adding to current line with APPEND 3 6 8 12 changing old to new with CHANGE 3 3 8 25 clearing from buffer 3 2 8 28 text editor GL 23 text editor host operating system 3 7 8 64 TIME clause in LOGIN SQL 3 19 TIME variable 8 111 timer GL 24 TIMING clause 8 29 TIMING command 2 15 8 138 deleting all areas created by 8 29 deleting current area 8 138 SHOW clause 8 138 START clause 8 138 STOP clause 8 138 TIMING variable 8 111 titles GL 24 aligning elements 4 24 8 141 displaying at bottom of page 4 22 8 24 F 2 displaying at top of page 4 22 8 140 F 2 displaying column values 4 29 8 35
53. 9 INSERT clause 6 7 8 50 INSERT command disabling E 6 instance GL 12 failure GL 7 recovery GL 12 INSTANCE variable 8 106 instances multiple sharing a database 8 134 shutting down 8 128 starting 8 133 INTERNAL See CONNECT J Julian date GL 12 justification GL 12 JUSTIFY clause 8 35 K keyboard significance of keys on 2 2 keys Backspace key 2 2 Cancel key 2 2 Interrupt key 2 2 Pause key 2 2 Resume key 2 2 Return key 2 2 L label GL 12 LABEL variable SHOW command F 2 F 7 labels in COMPUTE command 4 17 8 42 layout object width GL 25 LEFT clause 4 25 8 92 8 141 LGWR GL 13 LIKE clause 4 8 8 18 8 35 limits SQL Plus C 1 line numbers for SQL commands 2 6 line wrapping GL 25 lines adding at beginning of buffer 8 73 adding at end of buffer 8 73 adding new after current 3 5 8 73 appending text to 3 6 8 12 changing width 4 32 8 106 deleting allin buffer 8 54 deleting from buffer 3 7 8 54 determining which is current 3 3 editing current 3 3 listing allin buffer 3 2 8 75 removing blanks at end 8 111 LINESIZE variable 4 24 4 32 8 106 LIST clause 8 13 8 69 LIST command 3 2 8 75 determining current line 3 3 8 75 making last line current 3 4 8 75 using an asterisk 3 2 8 75 LNO clause 8 124 LOBOFFSET variable 8 107 local database GL 12 LOCK TABLE command disabling E 6 login GL 13 log off GL 13 logon GL 1
54. A line on a computer display on which typed in commands appear An example of a command line is the area next to the DOS prompt on a personal computer See also prompt command prompt The text by default SQL gt with which SQL Plus requests your next command comment A language construct for the inclusion of explanatory text in a program the execution of which remains unaffected Glossary 5 Glossary 6 commit To make permanent changes to data inserts updates deletes in the database Before changes are committed both the old and new data exist so that changes can be stored or the data can be restored to its prior state Common Gateway Interface The Common Gateway Interface CGI describes a part of a web server that allows user interaction typically via a web browser with programs running on the server CGI scripts enable this user interaction to create dynamic web pages or web page elements or to take user input and respond accordingly A very common use is to provide an interactive form which a user completes online and then submits Some common languages in use for CGI scripts are Perl JavaScript and Java computation Used to perform runtime calculations on data fetched from the database These calculations are a superset of the kinds of calculations that can be done directly with a SELECT statement See also formula column computed column See computation configuration In Net8 the set of instructions for
55. BY DEPTNO SQL gt 1 SELECT DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL SQL gt 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO JOB Now to skip a page when the value of DEPTNO changes and one line when the value of JOB changes enter the following command SQL gt BREAK ON DEPTNO SKIP PAGE ON JOB SKIP 1 To show that SKIP PAGE has taken effect create a TTITLE with a page number enter SQL gt TTITLE COL 35 FORMAT 9 Page SQL PNO Run the new query to see the results SQL gt Page 1 DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 10 CLERK ILLER 300 4 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines MANAGER CLARK 2450 Page 2 DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 20 CLERK SMITH 800 ADAMS 1100 Page 3 DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 30 CLERK JAMES 950 SALESMAN ALLE 1600 TURNER 1500 WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 9 rows selected Listing and Removing Break Definitions Before continuing turn off the top title display without changing its definition using SQL gt TTITLE OFF You can list your current break definition by entering the BREAK command with no clauses BREAK You can remove the current break definition by entering the CLEAR command with the BREAKS clause CLEAR BREAKS You may wish to place the command CLEAR BREAKS at the beginning of every command file to ensure t
56. HTML tag label n amp quot Double quote amp amp amp Ampersand The web browser displays the gt character but the actual text in the HTML encoded file is the HTML entity amp gt The SET MARKUP option ENTMAP controls the substitution of HTML entities ENTMAP is set ON by default It ensures that the characters lt gt and amp are always replaced by the HTML entities representing these characters This prevents web browsers from misinterpreting these characters when they occur in your SQL Plus commands or in data resulting from your query Formatting Query Results 4 47 Creating Web Reports 4 48 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 9 Database Administration This chapter provides a brief overview of the database administration tools available in SQL Plus and discusses the following topics a Overview a Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown a Redo Log Files a Database Recovery This chapter is intended for use by database administrators In order to access the functionality of the commands mentioned in this chapter database administrator privileges are necessary For more information on database administration see the Oracle8i Concepts manual Database Administration 5 1 Overview Overview Special operations such as starting up or shutting down a database are performed by a database administrator DBA The DBA has certain privileges that are not assigned to normal users The
57. If you want to define your own username and password see the OracleSi SQL Reference Access to Sample Tables Each table in the database is owned by a particular user You may wish to have your own copies of the sample tables to use as you try the examples in this Guide To get your own copies of the tables see your DBA or run the Oracle supplied command file named DEMOBLD you run this file from your operating system not from SQL Plus When you have no more use for the sample tables remove them by running another Oracle supplied command file named DEMODROP For instructions on how to run DEMOBLD and DEMODROP see the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Introduction 1 7 What You Need to Run SQL Plus 1 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 2 Learning SQL Plus Basics This chapter helps you learn the basics of using SOL Plus including the following topics a Getting Started a Entering and Executing Commands a Getting Help Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the examples shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the sample tables described in Chapter 1 Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 1 Getting Started Getting Started To begin using SQL Plus you must first become familiar with the functions of several keys on your keyboard and understand how to start and leave SQL Plus Using the Keyboard Several keys on your keyboard h
58. LOGIN File You can modify your LOGIN file just as you would any other command file You may wish to add some of the following commands to the LOGIN file SET COMPATIBILITY Followed by V7 or V8 sets compatibility to the version of Oracle you specify Setting COMPATIBILITY to V7 allows you to run command files created with Oracle7 SET NUMFORMAT Followed by a number format such as 99 999 sets the default format for displaying numbers in query results SET PAGESIZE Followed by a number sets the number of lines per page SET PAUSE Followed by ON causes SQL Plus to pause at the beginning of each page of output SQL Plus continues scrolling after you enter Return Followed by text sets the text to be displayed each time SQL Plus pauses you must also set PAUSE to ON SET SHIFTINOUT Followed by VISIBLE will display shift characters as a visible character Setting SHIFTINOUT to INVISIBLE will not display any shift characters Note this command can only be used with shift sensitive character sets SET TIME Followed by ON displays the current time before each command prompt See the SET command in Chapter 8 for more information on these and other SET command variables you may wish to set in your SQL Plus LOGIN file Manipulating Commands 3 19 Saving Commands for Later Use Storing and Restoring SQL Plus System Variables You can store the current SQL Plus sys
59. Multiple Summary Values and Lines ccccccccsseeeceeeeececseeeseeceeeeesseenecesens 4 20 Listing and Removing COMPUTE Definitions ccc cscs eseesecessssnesesesesesseseseseeeeeseees 4 22 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions 0 ccc eseseseeee ee seneeeneteteesenens 4 22 Setting the Top and Bottom Titles and Headers and Footers c ccccsccsesesteseeeeseseseenenenens 4 22 Displaying the Page Number and other System Maintained Values in Titles 4 27 Listing Suppressing and Restoring Page Title Definitions 0 0 cee cesses eens neeeees 4 28 Displaying Column Values in Titles pishsin iissa aikaa rpari aieiaa 4 29 Displaying the Current Date in Titles ccc cece aa a 4 30 Setting Page DIMENSIONS i iss tsecdeasscaciedstag lta asbsievasaas i iesiecsvaa lea Oa KODA EAEAN EEEa Enae RE asia erste 4 31 Storing and Printing Query Results 0 0 ccc cece cesseseseeeeseneseeseseseessesesessesseesesenesees 4 33 Sending Results toa File ies lt isciccisceaese pei a e e a a Snopes cavecestasestangss 4 34 Sending Results to a Printetasiars erena i e sa Be R E E S 4 35 Creating Web Reports ssn kanin ninaa a a E S S 4 38 Creating Web Reports Int ractively sssipiiseis oianetan danie aiar rereksan 4 38 Creating Embedded Web Reports wx cccstiscctscsnsisectecunssctvevevess ie si R R 4 42 Suppressing the Display of SOL Plus Commands in Web Reports s ssssssssssssssesseeseese 4 46 HTME Entities
60. Next put a value of 1 into the bind variable you have just created SQL gt BEGIN 2 tid 1 3 END 4 If you want to display a list of values for the bind variable named id enter SQL gt print id Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables SQL Plus REFCURSOR bind variables allow SQL Plus to fetch and format the results of a SELECT statement contained in a PL SQL block REFCURSOR bind variables can also be used to reference PL SQL cursor variables in stored procedures This allows you to store SELECT statements in the database and reference them from SQL Plus A REFCURSOR bind variable can also be returned from a stored function Note You must have Oracle7 Release 7 3 or above to assign the return value of a stored function to a REFCURSOR variable Example 3 18 Creating Referencing and Displaying REFCURSOR Bind Variables To create reference and display a REFCURSOR bind variable first declare a local bind variable of the REFCURSOR datatype SQL gt VARIABLE dept_sel REFCURSOR Manipulating Commands 3 33 Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables Next enter a PL SQL block that uses the bind variable in an OPEN FOR SELECT statement This statement opens a cursor variable and executes a query See the PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for information on the OPEN command and cursor variables In this example we are binding the SQL Plus dept_sel bind variable to the cursor variable SQL gt BEGI 2 OPEN
61. Null Type DEPTNO NUMBER 2 DNAME VARCHAR2 14 LOC VARCHAR2 13 Note DESCRIBE accesses information in the Oracle data dictionary You can also use SQL SELECT commands to access this and other information in the database See your Oracle8i SQL Reference for details Listing PL SQL Definitions To see the definition of a function or procedure use the SOL Plus DESCRIBE command Example 2 7 Using the DESCRIBE Command To list the definition of a function called AFUNC enter SQL gt DESCRIBE afunc The following output results FUNCTION afunc RETURNS NUMBER Argument Name Type In Out Default F1 CHAR IN F2 NUMBER IN Controlling the Display Suppose that you wish to stop and examine the contents of the screen while displaying a long report or the definition of a table with many columns Press Pause Refer to Table 2 1 to see how Pause is labelled on your keyboard The display will pause while you examine it To continue press Resume If you wish you can use the PAUSE variable of the SQL Plus SET command to have SQL Plus pause after displaying each screen of a query or report For more information refer to the SET command in Chapter 8 Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 17 Getting Help Interpreting Error Messages If SQL Plus detects an error in a command it will try to help you out by displaying an error message Example 2 8 Interpreting an Error Message For
62. Overview Roles are created and used with the SQL CREATE GRANT and SET commands a Tocreate a role you use the CREATE command You can create roles with or without passwords To grant access to roles you use the GRANT command In this way you can control who has access to the privileges associated with the role a To access roles you use the SET ROLE command If you created the role with a password the user must know the password in order to access the role For more information about roles see your Oracle8i SQL Reference your Oracle8i Administrator s Guide and your Oracle8i Concepts manual SQLPLUS RESTRICT Like the Product User Profile table the RESTRICT option allows you to disable certain commands that interact with the operating system However commands disabled with the RESTRICT option are disabled even when no connection to a server exists and remain disabled until SQL Plus terminates The following table shows which commands are disabled in each restriction level Command Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 EDIT disabled disabled disabled GET disabled HOST disabled disabled disabled SAVE disabled disabled SPOOL disabled disabled START disabled STORE disabled disabled For more information about the RESTRICT option see the SQLPLUS R 1 1 2 3 command on page 7 8 E 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ESTRICT F Obsolete SQL Plus Commands This appendix covers ear
63. Plus removes the SQLTERMINATOR a semicolon by default before the command is issued A workaround for this is to add another SQLTERMINATOR Command Reference 8 7 double at sign See the SQLTERMINATOR variable of the SET command in this chapter for more information Example Suppose that you have the following command file named PRINTRPT EMPRPT WKRPT SELECT FROM E p When you START PRINTRPT and it reaches the command it looks for the command file named EMPRPT in the current working directory and runs it When PRINTRPT reaches the command it looks for the command file named WKRPT in the same path as PRINTRPT and runs it 8 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference slash slash Purpose Executes the SQL command or PL SQL block currently stored in the SQL buffer Syntax j Usage Notes You can enter a slash at the command prompt or at a line number prompt of a multi line command The slash command functions similarly to RUN but does not list the command in the buffer on your screen Executing a SQL command or PL SQL block using the slash command will not cause the current line number in the SQL buffer to change unless the command in the buffer contains an error In that case SQL Plus changes the current line number to the number of the line containing the error Example To see the SQL command s you will execute you can list the con
64. RIGHT and headings for other column types default to LEFT LIKE expr alias Copies the display attributes of another column or expression whose attributes you have already defined with another COLUMN com mand LIKE copies only attributes not defined by another clause in the current COLUMN command NEWL INE Starts a new line before displaying the column s value NEWLINE has the same effect as FOLD_BEFORE NEW_V ALUE variable Specifies a variable to hold a column value You can reference the vari able in TTITLE commands Use NEW_VALUE to display column val ues or the date in the top title You must include the column ina Command Reference 8 35 COLUMN BREAK command with the SKIP PAGE action The variable name can not contain a pound sign NEW_VALUE is useful for master detail reports in which there is a new master record for each page For master detail reporting you must also include the column in the ORDER BY clause See the exam ple at the end of this command description For information on displaying a column value in the bottom title see COLUMN OLD_VALUE For more information on referencing vari ables in titles see the TTITLE command later in this chapter For infor mation on formatting and valid format models see the FORMAT command NOPRI NT PRI NT Controls the printing of the column the column heading and all the selected values NOPRINT turns off the screen output and printing of the colum
65. Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause file_name ext Specifies the command file in which you wish to save the buffer s con tents CREATE Creates a new file with the name specified This is the default behavior REP LACE Replaces the contents of an existing file If the file does not exist REPLACE creates the file APP END Adds the contents of the buffer to the end of the file you specify Usage Notes If you do not specify an extension SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing this default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command in this chapter If you wish to SAVE a file under a name identical to a SAVE command clause CREATE REPLACE or APPEND you must specify a file extension When you SAVE the contents of the SQL buffer SAVE adds a line containing a slash to the end of the file If the filename you specify is the word file you need to put the name in single quotes 8 96 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SAVE Examples To save the contents of the buffer in a file named DEPTSALRPT with the extension SQL enter SQL gt SAVE DEPTSALRPT To save the contents of the buffer in a file named DEPTSALRPT with the extension OLD enter SQL gt SAVE DEPTSALRPT OLD Command Reference 8 97 SET SET Purpose Sets a system variable to alter the SQL Plus environment for your curre
66. SHOW INSTANCI instance local GI To display the location for archive logs enter SQL gt SHOW LOGSOURCE logsource usr oracle81 dbs arch 8 126 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHOW To display information about the SGA enter SQL gt SHOW SGA Total System Global Area Fixed Size Variable Size Database Buffers Redo Buffers 7629732 bytes 60324 bytes 6627328 bytes 409600 bytes 532480 bytes Command Reference 8 127 SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN Purpose Shuts down a currently running Oracle instance optionally closing and dismounting a database You cannot use SHUTDOWN to stop Oracle instances on Oracle7 servers Syntax SHUTDOWN ABORT IMMEDIATE NORMAL Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause ABORT IMMEDIATE NORMAL Proceeds with the fastest possible shutdown of the database without waiting for calls to complete or users to disconnect Uncommitted transactions are not rolled back Client SOL statements currently being processed are terminated All users currently con nected to the database are implicitly disconnected and the next data base startup will require instance recovery You must use this option if a background process terminates abnor mally Does not wait for current calls to complete or users to disconnect from the database Further connects are prohibited The database is closed and dis mounted
67. TABLE because its name has a single ampersand and the variable is therefore not DEFINEd but not for GROUP_COL or NUMBER_COL because their names have double ampersands and the variables are therefore DEFINEd Before continuing set the system variable VERIFY back to ON SQL gt SET VERIFY ON Restrictions You cannot use substitution variables in the buffer editing commands APPEND CHANGE DEL and INPUT nor in other commands where substitution would be meaningless such as in SQL Plus comments REMARK or The buffer editing commands APPEND CHANGE and INPUT treat text beginning with amp or amp amp literally as any other text string System Variables The following system variables specified with the SQL Plus SET command affect substitution variables SET DEFINE Defines the substitution character by default the ampersand amp and turns substitution on and off SET ESCAPE Defines an escape character you can use before the substitution character The escape character instructs SQL Plus to treat the substitution character as an ordinary character rather than as a request for variable substitution The default escape character is a backslash SET VERIFY ON Lists each line of the command file before and after substitution SET CONCAT Defines the character that separates the name of a substitution variable or parameter from characters that immed
68. The condition can be resolved by archiving a log file group For information about specifying archive destinations see your platform specific Oracle documentation Note This command applies only to the current instance To specify archiving for a different instance or for all instances in a Parallel Server use the SQL command ALTER SYSTEM For more information about using SQL commands see the Oracle8i SQL Reference Examples To start up the archive process and begin automatic archiving using the archive destination specified in LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST enter SQL gt ARCHIVELOG START To stop automatic archiving enter SQL gt ARCHIVELOG STOP Command Reference 8 15 ARCHIVE LOG To archive the log file group with the sequence number 1001 to the destination specified enter SQL gt ARCHIVI ELOG 1001 vobs oracle dbs arch arch specifies the prefix of the filename on the destination device the remainder of the filename is dependent on the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_ FORMAT which specifies the filename format for archived redo log files 8 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ATTRIBUTE ATTRIBUTE Purpose Specifies display characteristics for a given attribute of an Object Type column such as format for NUMBER data Also lists the current display characteristics for a single attribute or all attributes Syntax ATTRIBUTE type_name attribute_name option
69. User s Guide and Reference Writing Interactive Commands The original values of the system variables can then be restored from the command file SQL gt START plusenv SQL gt SHOW PAGESIZE pagesize 24 Writing Interactive Commands The following features of SQL Plus make it possible for you to set up command files that allow end user input a defining user variables a substituting values in commands a using the START command to provide values prompting for values Defining User Variables You can define variables called user variables for repeated use in a single command file by using the SQL Plus DEFINE command Note that you can also define user variables to use in titles and to save you keystrokes by defining a long string as the value for a variable with a short name Example 3 11 Defining a User Variable To define a user variable EMPLOYEE and give it the value SMITH enter the following command SQL gt DEFINE EMPLOYEE SMITH To confirm the definition of the variable enter DEFINE followed by the variable name SQL gt DEFINE EMPLOYEE SOL Plus lists the definition DEFINE EMPLOYEE SMITH CHAR To list all user variable definitions enter DEFINE by itself at the command prompt Note that any user variable you define explicitly through DEFINE takes only CHAR values that is the value you assign to the variable
70. and Report Titles and Dimensions in Chapter 4 SQL gt COLUMN JOB NOPRINT NEW_VALUE JOBVAR SQL gt COLUMN TODAY NOPRINT NEW_VALUE DATEVAR SQL gt BREAK ON JOB SKIP PAGE ON TODAY SQL gt TTITLE CENTER Job Report RIGHT DATEVAR SKIP 2 gt LEFT Job JOBVAR SKIP 2 SQL gt SELECT TO_CHAR SYSDATE MM DD YY TODAY 2 ENAME JOB MGR HIREDATE SAL DEPTNO 3 FROM EMP WHERE JOB IN CLERK SALESMAN 4 ORDER BY JOB ENAME 8 38 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN Your two page report would look similar to the following report with Job Report centered within your current linesize Job Report 10 25 99 Job CLERK ENAME MGR HIREDATE SAL DEPTNO ADAMS 7788 12 JAN 83 1100 20 JAME 7698 03 DEC 81 950 30 MILIER 7782 23 JAN 82 1300 10 SMITH 7902 17 DEC 80 800 20 1037 5 Job Report 10 25 99 Job SALESMAN ENAI MGR HIREDATE SAL DEPTNO ALLEN 7698 20 FEB 81 1600 30 ARTIN 7698 28 SEP 81 1250 30 TURNER 7698 08 SEP 81 1500 30 WARD 7698 22 FEB 81 1250 30 1400 8 rows selected To change the default format of DATE columns to YYYY MM DD you can enter SOL gt ALT ER S ESSION S ET NLS_DAT The following output results Session altered To di
71. as CLEAR BUFFER unless you are using multiple buffers see the SET BUFFER command in Appendix F TIMI NG Deletes all timers created by the TIMING command Example To clear breaks enter SQL gt CL EAR BRE AKS To clear column definitions enter SQL gt CLI EAR COLUMNS Command Reference 8 29 COLUMN COLUMN Purpose Specifies display attributes for a given column such as a text for the column heading a alignment of the column heading a format for NUMBER data wrapping of column data Also lists the current display attributes for a single column or all columns Syntax COL UMN column expr option where option represents one of the following clauses ALI AS alias CLE AR ENTMAP ON OFF FOLD_A FTER FOLD_B EFORE FOR MAT format HEA DING text JUS TIFY L EFT C ENTER C ENTRE R IGHT LIKE expr alias EWL INE EW_V ALUE variable OPRI NT PRI NT UL L text OLD_V ALUE variable ON OFF WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED Terms and Clauses Enter COLUMN followed by column or expr and no other clauses to list the current display attributes for only the specified column or expression Enter COLUMN with no clauses to list all current column display attributes 8 30 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN Refer to the follo
72. be used to calculate a subgroup statistic the maximum value on a numeric column SQL gt CLEAR BUFFER SQL gt INPUT 1 SELECT amp GROUP_COL 2 MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM 3 FRO amp TABLE 4 GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL 5 SQL gt SAVE STATS Created file STATS Now run the command file STATS and respond to the prompts for values as shown SQL gt STATS Enter value for group_col JOB old 1 SELEC amp GROUP_COL new 1 SELEC JOB Enter value for number_col SAL old 2 AX amp BER_COL MAXIMUM new 2 AX SAL MAXIMUM Enter value for table EMP old 3 FROM amp TABLE new 3 FROM EMP Enter value for group_col JOB old 4 GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL Manipulating Commands 3 23 Writing Interactive Commands new 4 GROUP BY JOB SQL Plus displays the following output JOB MAXIMUM ANALYST 3000 CLERK 1300 MANAGER 2975 PRESIDENT 5000 SALESMAN 1600 If you wish to append characters immediately after a substitution variable use a period to separate the variable from the character For example SQL gt SELECT FROM EMP WHERE EMPNO amp X 01 Enter value for X 123 is interpreted as SQL gt SELECT FROM EMP WHERE T PNO 12301 Avoiding Unnecessary Prompts for Values Suppose you wanted to
73. column ENAME to its original heading by entering the following command SQL gt COLUMN ENAME CLEAR Communicating with the User Three SQL Plus commands PROMPT ACCEPT and PAUSE help you communicate with the end user These commands enable you to send messages to the screen and receive input from the user including a simple Return You can also use PROMPT and ACCEPT to customize the prompts for values SQL Plus automatically generates for substitution variables Prompting for and Accepting User Variable Through PROMPT and ACCEPT you can send messages to the end user and accept values as end user input PROMPT simply displays a message you specify on screen use it to give directions or information to the user ACCEPT prompts the user for a value and stores it in the user variable you specify Use PROMPT in 3 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Writing Interactive Commands conjunction with ACCEPT when your prompt for the value spans more than one line Example 3 15 Prompting for and Accepting Input To direct the user to supply a report title and to store the input in the variable MYTITLE for use in a subsequent query first clear the buffer SQL gt CLEAR BUFFER Next set up a command file as shown below SQL gt INPUT 1 PROMPT Enter a title up to 30 characters long 2 ACCEP YYTITLE PROMPT Title 3 TTITLE LEFT MYTITLE SKIP 2 4 SELECT FROM DEPT
74. command when you run the command file 3 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Commands for Later Use To input more than one PL SQL block enter the blocks one after another without including a period or a slash on a line between blocks Then for each block except the last list the last line of the block to make it current and use INPUT in the following form to insert a slash on a line by itself INPUT Creating Command Files with a System Editor You can also create a command file with a host operating system text editor by entering EDIT followed by the name of the file for example SQL gt EDIT SALES Like the SAVE command EDIT adds the filename extension SQL to the name unless you type a period and a different extension at the end of the filename When you save the command file with the text editor it is saved back into the same file You must include a semicolon at the end of each SQL command and a period on a line by itself after each PL SQL block in the file You can include multiple SQL commands and PL SQL blocks When you create a command file using EDIT you can also include SQL Plus commands at the end of the file You cannot do this when you create a command file using the SAVE command because SAVE appends a slash to the end of the file This slash would cause SQL Plus to run the command file twice once upon reaching the semicolon at the end of the last SQL command or the slash after the
75. commands outlined in this chapter would normally be used by a DBA For more information about security and roles in SQL Plus see Appendix E Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown An Oracle database may not always be available to all users To open or close a database or to start up or shut down an instance you must have dba privileges or be connected as SYSOPER or SYSDBA Other users cannot change the current status of an Oracle database You cannot use STARTUP or SHUTDOWN to start or stop Oracle instances on Oracle7 servers Database Startup Starting a database involves three steps 1 Starting an instance An instance controls the background processes and the allocation of memory area to access an Oracle database 2 Mounting the database Mounting the database associates it with a previously started instance 3 Opening the database Opening the database makes it available for normal database operations For more information about database startup see the Oracle8i Concepts manual For information about the STARTUP command see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Example 5 1 Starting an Instance To start an Oracle instance without mounting the database enter SQL gt STARTUP NOMOUNT 5 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown Example 5 2 Mounting the Database To start an instance mount the database but leave the database closed enter SQL gt STARTUP
76. correct the mistake This command has three parts separated by slashes or any other non alphanumeric character a the word CHANGE or the letter C a the sequence of characters you want to change a the replacement sequence of characters The CHANGE command finds the first occurrence in the current line of the character sequence to be changed and changes it to the new sequence If you wish to re enter an entire line you do not need to use the CHANGE command re enter the line by typing the line number followed by a space and the new text and pressing Return Example 3 3 Correcting the Error To change DPTNO to DEPTNO change the line with the CHANGE command 3 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Editing Commands SQL gt CHANGE DPTNO DEPTNO The corrected line appears on your screen 1 SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL Now that you have corrected the error you can use the RUN command to run the command again SQL gt RUN SOL Plus lists the command and then runs it 1 select deptno ename sal 2 from emp 3 where deptno 10 DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 CLARK 2450 10 KING 5000 10 MILLER 1300 Note that the column SAL retains the format you gave it in Example 2 4 If you have left SOL Plus and started again since performing Example 2 4 the column has reverted to its original format For information about the significance of case in a CHANGE command and on using wildca
77. ends of reports 4 19 printing summary lines ona break 4 16 referencing a SELECT expression in OF 8 42 referencing a SELECT expression in ON 8 43 removing definitions 4 22 8 28 STD function 4 16 SUM function 4 16 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 8 147 VARIANCE function 4 16 computed column GL 6 COMPUTES clause 8 28 CONCAT variable 3 26 8 103 concurrency instances multiple 8 134 configuration GL 6 configuration files GL 6 connect GL 6 CONNECT command 6 2 6 3 8 47 and at sign 6 3 8 47 changing password 8 47 8 48 8 77 connect identifier 6 3 INTERNAL 8 47 service name 6 3 SYSDBA clause 7 9 8 48 SYSOPER clause 7 9 8 48 username password 6 2 6 3 6 4 8 47 CONNECT command SQL disabling E 5 connect identifier 6 3 8 47 GL 6 in CONNECT command 8 47 in COPY command 8 49 in DESCRIBE command 8 56 in SQLPLUS command 7 9 CONTINUE clause WHENEVER OSERROR 8 151 WHENEVER SQLERROR 8 153 continuing a long SQL Plus command 2 12 8 1 conventions command syntax 1 3 COPY command 6 4 8 49 and at sign 6 5 8 49 and ARRAYSIZE variable 6 8 8 51 and COPYCOMMIT variable 6 8 8 51 and LONG variable 6 8 8 51 APPEND clause 6 7 8 50 copying data between databases 6 4 copying data between tables on one database 6 9 CREATE clause 6 6 8 50 creating a table 6 6 8 50 destination table 6 5 8 50 determining actions 6 5 determining source rows and columns 6 6 8 51 disabling E
78. example if you misspell the name of a table while entering a command an error message will tell you that the table or view does not exist SQL gt D ESCRIBE ERROR DPT ORA 04043 object DPT does not exist You will often be able to figure out how to correct the problem from the message alone If you need further explanation take one of the following steps to determine the cause of the problem and how to correct it a Ifthe error is a numbered error for the SQL Plus COPY command look up the message in Appendix A of this Guide a Ifthe error is a numbered error beginning with the letters ORA look up the message in the Oracle8i Error Messages manual or in the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system to determine the cause of the problem and how to correct it a Ifthe error is unnumbered look up correct syntax for the command that generated the error in Chapter 8 of this Guide for a SQL Plus command in the Oracle8i SQL Reference for a SQL command or in the PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for a PL SQL block Otherwise contact your DBA 2 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 3 Manipulating Commands This chapter helps you learn to manipulate SQL Plus commands SQL commands and PL SQL blocks It covers the following topics a Editing Commands a Saving Commands for Later Use a Writing Interactive Commands a Using Bind Variables a Using REFCURSOR Bi
79. file group that is still online An error occurs if the log file cannot be found online or the sequence num ber is not valid This option can be used to rearchive a log file group destination Specifies the destination device or directory in an operating system Specification of archive destination devices is installation specific see your platform specific Oracle documentation for examples of specify ing archive destinations On many operating systems multiple log files can be spooled to the same tape If not specified in the command line the archive destination is derived from the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST The com 8 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ARCHIVE LOG mand ARCHIVE LOG START destination causes the specified device or directory to become the new default archive destination for all future automatic or manual archives A destination specified with any other option is a temporary destination that is in effect only for the current manual archive It does not change the default archive destination for subsequent automatic archives For information about specifying archive destinations see your plat form specific Oracle documentation Usage Notes You must be connected to an open Oracle database as SYSOPER or SYSDBA For information about connecting to the database see the CONNECT command If an online redo log file group fills and none are available for reuse database operation is suspended
80. for more information on date format models For more information about the LOGIN file see the section Modifying Your LOGIN File in Chapter 3 You can also enter these commands interactively at the command prompt For more information see the COLUMN command in Chapter 8 Setting Page Dimensions Typically a page of a report contains the number of blank line s set in the NEWPAGE variable of the SET command a top title column headings your query results and a bottom title SQL Plus displays a report that is too long to fit on one page on several consecutive pages each with its own titles and column headings The amount of data SQL Plus displays on each page depends on the current page dimensions The default page dimensions used by SQL Plus are shown below number of lines before the top title 1 a number of lines per page from the top title to the bottom of the page 24 a number of characters per line 80 You can change these settings to match the size of your computer screen or for printing the size of a sheet of paper You can change the page length with the system variable PAGESIZE For example you may wish to do so when you print a report since printed pages are customarily 66 lines long To set the number of lines between the beginning of each page and the top title use the NEWPAGE variable of the SET command SET NEWPAGE number_of_lines If you set NEWPAGE to zero SQL Plus skips zero lines and
81. gt SELECT ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL gt 2000 Page 1 ENAME SAL JONES 2975 BLAKE 2850 Command Reference 8 89 REPFOOTER CLARK 2450 SCOTT 3000 KING 5000 FORD 3000 Page 2 END EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT 6 rows selected To suppress the report footer without changing its definition enter SQL gt REPFOOTER OFF 8 90 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference REPHEADER REPHEADER Purpose Places and formats a specified report header at the top of each report or lists the current REPHEADER definition Syntax REPH EADER PAGE printspec text variable ON OFF where printspec represents one or more of the following clauses used to place and format the text COL n S KIP n TAB n LE F CE NTER R IGHT BOLD FORMAT text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause These terms and clauses also apply to the REPFOOTER command PAGE Begins a new page after printing the specified report header or before printing the specified report footer text Represents the report header or footer text Enter text in single quotes if you want to place more than one word on a single line The default is NULL variable Represents a user variable or any of the following system maintained values SQL LNO is the
82. however the data is not displayed The AUTOTRACE report is printed after the statement has successfully completed Information about Execution Plans and the statistics is documented in the Oracle8i Tuning manual When SQL Plus produces a STATISTICS report a second connection to the database is automatically created This connection is closed when the STATISTICS option is set to OFF or you log out of SQL Plus The formatting of your AUTOTRACE report may vary depending on the version of the server to which you are connected and the configura tion of the server AUTOTRACE is not available when FIPS flagging is enabled See Tracing Statements in Chapter 3 for more information on AUTOTRACE BLO CKTERMINATOR lc Sets the non alphanumeric character used to end PL SQL blocks to c It cannot be an alphanumeric character or a whitespace To execute the block you must issue a RUN or slash command CMDS EP c ON OFF Sets the non alphanumeric character used to separate multiple SQL Plus commands entered on one line to c ON or OFF controls whether you can enter multiple commands on a line ON automatically sets the command separator character to a semicolon COLSEP _ text Sets the text to be printed between SELECTed columns If the COLSEP variable contains blanks or punctuation characters you must enclose it with single quotes The default value for text is a single space 8 102 SQL Plus User s Guide and Ref
83. installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for specific information related to your operating system environment arg Represent data items you wish to pass to parameters in the command file If you enter one or more arguments SOL Plus substitutes the val ues into the parameters amp 1 amp 2 and so forth in the command file The first argument replaces each occurrence of amp 1 the second replaces each occurrence of amp 2 and so forth The START command DEFINEs the parameters with the values of the arguments if you START the command file again in this session you can enter new arguments or omit the arguments to use the old values For more information on using parameters refer to the subsection Passing Parameters through the START Command under Writing Interactive Commands in Chapter 3 Command Reference 8 131 START Usage Notes The at sign and double at sign commands function similarly to START Disabling the START command in the Product User Profile also disables the and commands See the at sign and double at sign commands in this chapter for further information on these commands The EXIT or QUIT commands in a command file terminate SQL Plus Example A file named PROMOTE with the extension SQL used to promote employees might contain the following command SELECT FROM EMP WHERE MGR amp 1 AND JOB amp 2 AND SAL gt amp 3
84. is always treated as a CHAR Manipulating Commands 3 21 Writing Interactive Commands datatype You can define a user variable of datatype NUMBER implicitly through the ACCEPT command You will learn more about the ACCEPT command later in this chapter To delete a user variable use the SQL Plus command UNDEFINE followed by the variable name Using Substitution Variables Suppose you want to write a query like the one in SALES see Example 3 7 to list the employees with various jobs not just those whose job is SALESMAN You could do that by editing a different CHAR value into the WHERE clause each time you run the command but there is an easier way By using a substitution variable in place of the value SALESMAN in the WHERE clause you can get the same results you would get if you had written the values into the command itself A substitution variable is a user variable name preceded by one or two ampersands amp When SQL Plus encounters a substitution variable in a command SQL Plus executes the command as though it contained the value of the substitution variable rather than the variable itself For example if the variable SORTCOL has the value JOB and the variable MYTABLE has the value EMP SOL Plus executes the commands SQL gt BREAK ON amp SORTCOL SQL gt SELECT amp SORTCOL SAL 2 FROM amp MYTABLE 3 ORDER BY amp SORTCOL as if they were SQL gt BREAK ON JOB SQL gt SELECT JOB SAL
85. is issued A workaround for this is to add another Command Reference 8 71 HOST SQLTERMINATOR See the SQLTERMINATOR variable of the SET command in this chapter for more information on the SQLTERMINATOR Example To execute an operating system command ls sql enter SQL gt HOST ls sql 8 72 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference INPUT INPUT Purpose Adds one or more new lines of text after the current line in the buffer Syntax I NPUT text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause text Represents the text you wish to add To add a single line enter the text of the line after the command INPUT separating the text from the com mand with a space To begin the line with one or more spaces enter two or more spaces between INPUT and the first non blank character of text To add several lines enter INPUT with no text INPUT prompts you for each line To leave INPUT enter a null empty line Usage Notes If you enter a line number at the command prompt larger than the number of lines in the buffer and follow the number with text SOL Plus adds the text in a new line at the end of the buffer If you specify zero 0 for the line number and follow the zero with text then SQL Plus inserts the line at the beginning of the buffer that line becomes line 1 Examples Assume the SQL buffer contains the following command 1 SELECT ENAME DEPTNO SAL COMM 2 FROM EMP
86. loosely coupled processors allow multiple computers to share access to data software or peripheral devices With systems that have the parallel server option Oracle can take advantage of such hardware platforms by running multiple database instances that share a single physical database In appropriate applications the Oracle Parallel Server allows access to a single database by the users on multiple machines with increased database performance parameter A substitution variable consisting of an ampersand followed by a numeral amp 1 amp 2 and so on You use parameters in a command file and pass values into them through the arguments of the START command parameter file A file used by Oracle 8i Server to provide specific values and configuration settings to be used on database startup For more information about the function of the parameter file see the OracleSi Administrator s Guide password A secondary identification word or string of alphanumeric characters associated with a username A password is used for data security and known only to its owner Passwords are entered in conjunction with an operating system login ID Oracle username or account name in order to connect to an operating system or software application such as the Oracle database Whereas the username or ID is public the secret password ensures that only the owner of the username can use that name or access that data PL SQL The 3GL Oracle procedu
87. more than one DBA per site database instance failure Failure that occurs when a problem arises that prevents an Oracle database instance SGA and background processes from continuing to work Instance failure may result from a hardware problem such as power outage or a software problem such as operating system crash When an instance failure occurs the data in the buffers of the SGA is not written to the datafiles database link An object stored in the local database that identifies a remote database a communication path to the remote database and optionally a username and password for it Once defined a database link can be used to perform queries on tables in the remote database Also called DBlink In SQL Plus you can reference a database link in a DESCRIBE or COPY command database object Something created and stored in a database Tables views synonyms indexes sequences clusters and columns are all examples of database objects database server The computer which runs the ORACLE Server kernel and contains the database Glossary 7 Glossary 8 database specification An alphanumeric code that identifies a database used to specify the database in Net8 operations and to define a database link In SQL Plus you can reference a database specification in a COPY CONNECT or SQLPLUS command database string A string of Net8 parameters used to indicate the network prefix the host system you want to connect to a
88. off for selected columns in HTML output This feature allows you to include for example HTML hyperlinks in a column of data while still mapping entities in other col umns of the same report By turning entity mapping off for a column containing HTML hyperlinks the HTML anchor tag delimiters lt gt and amp are correctly interpreted in the report Otherwise they would be replaced with their respective entities amp lt amp gt amp quot and amp amp preventing web browsers from correctly interpreting the HTML Command Reference 8 31 COLUMN Entities in the column heading and any COMPUTE labels or output appearing in the column are mapped or not mapped according to the value of ENTMAP for the column The default setting for COLUMN ENTMATP is the current setting of the MARKUP HTML ENTMAP option For more information about the MARKUP HTML ENTMAP option see MARKUP Options in Chapter 7 and SET later this Chapter FOLD_A FTER Inserts a carriage return after the column heading and after each row in the column SQL Plus does not insert an extra carriage return after the last column in the SELECT list FOLD_B EFORE Inserts a carriage return before the column heading and before each row of the column SQL Plus does not insert an extra carriage return before the first column in the SELECT list FOR MAT format Specifies the display format of the column The format specification must be a text constant such as A10 or
89. order in the COMPUTE command Table 8 2 COMPUTE Functions Function Computes Applies to Datatypes AVG Average of non null values NUMBER COU NT Count of non null values all types MIN IMUM Minimum value NUMBER CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING MAX IMUM Maximum value NUMBER CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING Command Reference 8 41 COMPUTE Table 8 2 COMPUTE Functions Function Computes Applies to Datatypes NUM BER Count of rows all types SUM Sum of non null values NUMBER STD Standard deviation of non null NUMBER values VAR IANCE Variance of non null values NUMBER LAB EL text Defines the label to be printed for the computed value If no LABEL clause is used text defaults to the unabbreviated function keyword If text contains spaces or punctuation you must enclose it with single quotes The label prints left justified and truncates to the column width or linesize whichever is smaller The maximum length of a label is 500 characters The label for the computed value appears in the break column speci fied To suppress the label use the NOPRINT option of the COLUMN command on the break column If you repeat a function in a COMPUTE command SQL Plus issues a warning and uses the first occurrence of the function With ON REPORT and ON ROW computations the label appears in the first column listed in the SELECT statement The label
90. output using HTML lt PRE gt tags by setting PRE FORMAT ON Use the SHOW MARKUP command to view the status of MARKUP options The SQLPLUS MARKUP command has the same options and func tionality as the SET MARKUP command These options are described in this section For information on the SET MARKUP command see the SET command in Chapter 8 Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help 7 3 Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command Note Depending on your operating system the complete MARKUP clause for the SQLPLUS command may need to be contained in quotes HTML ON OFF HTML is a mandatory MARKUP argument which specifies that the type of output to be generated is HTML The optional HTML argu ments ON and OFF specify whether or not to generate HTML output The default is OFF MARKUP HTML ON generates HTML output using the specified MARKUP options or in the case of SET MARKUP options set by previ ous SET MARKUP HTML commands in the current session You can turn HTML output ON and OFF as required during a session The default is OFF You enable the writing of HTML output with the MARKUP option SPOOL ON and you subsequently initiate writing output to a spool file with the SQL Plus command SPOOL filename See SPOOL ON OFF below and the SPOOL command in Chapter 8 for more information Note SQL Plus 8 1 7 implements HTML tables as the default HTML output More HTML tags may be implemented in future rel
91. pending changes to the database Directs SQL Plus to execute a ROLLBACK before exiting or continuing and abandon pending changes to the database Directs SQL Plus to take no action before continuing Usage Notes The WHENEVER SQLERROR command is triggered by SOL command or PL SQL block errors and not by SQL Plus command errors Command Reference 8 153 WHENEVER SQLERROR Examples The commands in the following command file cause SQL Plus to exit and return the SQL error code if the SQL UPDATE command fails SQL gt WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SOL SQLCODE SQL gt UPDATE EMP SET SAL SAL 1 1 The following SQL command error causes SQL Plus to exit and return the SQL error code SQL gt WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SQL SOQLCODE SQL gt SELECT COLUMN_DOES_NOT_EXIST FROM DUAL select column_does_not_exiSt from dual ERROR at line 1 ORA 00904 invalid column name Disconnected from Oracle The following SQL command error causes SQL Plus to exit and return the value of the variable MY_ERROR_VAR SQL gt DEFINE MY_ERROR_VAR 99 SQL gt WHENEVER SOQLERROR EXIT my_error_var SQL gt UPDATE non_existed_table set coll coll 1 UPDATE NON_EXISTED_TABLE set coll coll 1 ERROR at line 1 ORA 00942 table or view does not exist Disconnected from Oracle The followin
92. prompt the echoing of commands and the banner nor mally displayed when you start SOL Plus If you omit username or pass word SQL Plus prompts for them but the prompts are not visible Use SILENT to invoke SQL Plus within another program so that the use of SOL Plus is invisible to the user SILENT is a useful mode for creating reports for the web using the SQLPLUS MARKUP command inside a CGI script or operating sys 7 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Starting SQL P lus Using the SQLPLUS Command tem command file The SQL Plus banner and prompts are suppressed and do not appear in reports created using the SILENT option Logon username password Represent the username and password with which you wish to start SQL Plus and connect to Oracle If you omit username and password SQL Plus prompts you for them If you omit only password SQL Plus prompts you for password When prompting SQL Plus does not display password on your terminal screen In silent mode username and password prompts are not visi ble your username will appear as you type it but not your password connect_identifier Consists of a Net8 connect identifier The exact syntax depends upon the Net8 communications protocol your Oracle installation uses For more information refer to the Net8 manual appropriate for your proto col or contact your DBA Represents a default logon using operating system authentication You cannot enter a database_spec
93. reconnect to an instance in order for the new setting to be enabled This command may only be issued when Net8 is running You can use any valid Net8 connect identifier as the specified instance path See your operating system specific Oracle documentation for a complete description of how your operating system specifies Net8 connect identi fiers The maximum length of the instance path is 64 characters LIN ESIZE 80 n Sets the total number of characters that SQL Plus displays on one line before beginning a new line It also controls the position of centered and right aligned text in TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER and REP FOOTER You can define LINESIZE as a value from 1 to a maximum that is system dependent Refer to the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system 8 106 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET LOBOF FSET n 1 Sets the starting position from which CLOB and NCLOB data is retrieved and displayed LOGSOURCE pathname Specifies the location from which archive logs are retrieved during recovery The default value is set by the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST initial ization parameter in the Oracle initialization file init ora Using the SET LOGSOURCE command without a pathname restores the default loca tion LONG 80 n Sets maximum width in bytes for displaying LONG CLOB and NCLOB values and for copying LONG values The maximum value of n is 2 gigabytes LONGC HUNKSIZE 80 n Sets
94. tells SQL Plus to use the default display attributes for the column but does not remove the attributes you have defined through the COLUMN command To restore the attributes you defined through COLUMN use the ON clause COLUMN column_name ON Printing a Line of Characters after Wrapped Column Values As you have seen by default SOL Plus wraps column values to additional lines when the value does not fit within the column width If you want to insert a record separator a line of characters or a blank line after each wrapped line of output or after every row use the RECSEP and RECSEPCHAR variables of the SET command Formatting Query Results 4 9 Formatting Columns RECSEP determines when the line of characters is printed you set RECSEP to EACH to print after every line to WRAPPED to print after wrapped lines and to OFF to suppress printing The default setting of RECSEP is WRAPPED RECSEPCHAR sets the character printed in each line You can set RECSEPCHAR to any character You may wish to wrap whole words to additional lines when a column value wraps to additional lines To do so use the WORD_WRAPPED clause of the COLUMN command as shown below COLUMN column_name WORD_WRAPPED Example 4 8 Printing a Line of Characters after Wrapped Column Values To print a line of dashes after each wrapped column value enter the following commands SQL gt SET RECSEP WRAPPED SQL gt SET RECSEPCHAR
95. the NLS parameters in effect Otherwise the default format width is A9 For more information on formatting DATE columns see the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command in Chapter 8 Note The default justification for datatypes is left justification Changing the Default Display You can change the displayed width of a datatype or DATE by using the COLUMN command with a format model consisting of the letter A for alphanumeric followed by a number representing the width of the column in characters Within the COLUMN command identify the column you want to format and the model you want to use COLUMN column_name FORMAT model 4 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Formatting Columns If you specify a width shorter than the column heading SOL Plus truncates the heading If you specify a width for a LONG CLOB or NCLOB column SQL Plus uses the LONGCHUNKSIZE or the specified width whichever is smaller as the column width See the COLUMN command in Chapter 8 for more details Example 4 5 Formatting a Character Column To set the width of the column ENAME to four characters and rerun the current query enter SQL gt COLUMN ENAME FORMAT A4 SQL gt SQL Plus displays the results Empl Department Name Salary Commission 30 ALLE 1 600 300 30 WARD 1 250 500 30 MART 1 250 1400 IN 30 TURN 1 500 0 ER Note The format model will stay in effect until you enter
96. these types of commands are found on the following pages Getting Help To get online help for SQL Plus commands type HELP at the command prompt followed by the name of the command For example SQL gt HELP ACCEPT Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 5 Entering and Executing Commands If you get a response indicating that help is not available consult your database administrator For more details about the help system see the HELP command in the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Executing Commands After you enter the command and direct SQL Plus to execute it SQL Plus processes the command and re displays the command prompt indicating that you can enter another command Running SQL Commands The SQL command language enables you to manipulate data in the database See your Oracle8i SQL Reference for information on individual SQL commands Example 2 3 Entering a SQL Command In this example you will enter and execute a SQL command to display the employee number name job and salary of each employee in the sample table EMP 1 At the command prompt enter the first line of the command SQL gt SELECT EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL If you make a mistake use Backspace to erase it and re enter When you are done press Return to move to the next line 2 SQL Plus will display a 2 the prompt for the second line Enter the second line of the command 2 FROM EMP WHERE SAL lt 1500
97. user s manual s published in a separate version for each host computer and operating system that SQL Plus supports Keep a copy of your Oracle installation and user s manual s available for reference as you work through this Guide When necessary this Guide will refer you to your installation and user s manual s Username and Password When you start SQL Plus you will need a username that identifies you as an authorized Oracle user and a password that proves you are the legitimate owner of your username See the PASSWORD command in Chapter 8 for details on how to change your password The demonstration username SCOTT and password TIGER may be set up on your system during the installation procedure In this 1 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference What You Need to Run SQL Plus case you can use the Oracle username SCOTT and password TIGER with the EMP and DEPT tables Figure 1 1 and Figure 1 2 Multi User Systems If several people share your computer s operating system your DBA can set up your SQL Plus username and password You will also need a system username and password to gain admittance to the operating system These may or may not be the same ones you use with SQL Plus Single User Systems If only one person at a time uses your computer you may be expected to perform the DBAs functions for yourself In that case you can use the Oracle username SCOTT and password TIGER with the appropriate DBA privileges
98. user or the system when the file itself is created See also extension and file type file type On some operating systems the part of the filename that usually denotes the use or purpose of the file See extension format Columns contain information in one of four types users can specify how they want a query to format information it retrieves from character number date or long columns For example they can choose to have information of type date appear as 23 11 98 or Monday Twenty third November 1998 or any other valid date format format model A clause element that controls the appearance of a value in a report column You specify predefined format models in the COLUMN TTITLE and BTITLE commands FORMAT clauses You can also use format models for DATE columns in SQL date conversion functions such as TO_DATE form feed A control character that when executed causes the printer to skip to the top of a new sheet of paper top of form When SQL Plus displays a form feed on most terminals the form feed clears the screen formula column Manually created column that gets its data from a PL SQL procedure function or expression user exit SOL statement or any combination of these function A PL SQL subprogram that executes an operation and returns a value at the completion of the operation A function can be either built in or user named Contrast with procedure heading In SQL Plus text that names an output column
99. variable created with VARIABLE use the PRINT command For more information see the PRINT command in this chapter To automatically display the value of a bind variable created with VARIABLE use the SET AUTOPRINT command For more information see the SET AUTOPRINT command in this chapter Bind variables cannot be used in the COPY command or SQL statements except in PL SQL blocks Instead use substitution variables When you execute a VARIABLE CLOB or NCLOB command SQL Plus associates a LOB locator with the bind variable The LOB locator is automatically populated when you execute a SELECT clob_column INTO cv statement in a PL SQL block SQL Plus closes the LOB locator after completing a PRINT statement for that bind variable or when you exit SQL Plus SOL Plus SET commands such as SET LONG and SET LONGCHUNKSIZE and SET LOBOFFSET may be used to control the size of the buffer while PRINTing CLOB or NCLOB bind variables SQL Plus REFCURSOR bind variables may be used to reference PL SQL 2 3 or higher Cursor Variables allowing PL SQL output to be formatted by SQL Plus For more information on PL SQL Cursor Variables see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference When you execute a VARIABLE REFCURSOR command SQL Plus creates a cursor bind variable The cursor is automatically opened by an OPEN FOR SELECT statement referencing the bind variable in a PL SQL block SQL Plus 8 146 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIAB
100. versions of available tools such as PL SQL Next SQL Plus displays the SQL Plus command prompt SQL gt The command prompt indicates that SOL Plus is ready to accept your commands If SQL Plus does not start you should see a message to help you correct the problem Shortcuts to Starting SQL Plus When you start SOL Plus you can enter your username and password separated by a slash following the command SQLPLUS For example if your username is SCOTT and your password is TIGER you can enter SQLPLUS SCOTT TIGER and press Return You can also arrange to log in to SQL Plus automatically when you log on to your host operating system See the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for details Leaving SQL Plus When you are done working with SQL Plus and wish to return to the operating system enter the EXIT command at the SQL Plus command prompt Example 2 2 Exiting SQL Plus To leave SQL Plus enter the EXIT command at the SQL Plus command prompt SQL gt EXIT SQL Plus displays the version of Oracle from which you disconnected and the versions of tools available through SQL Plus After a moment you will see the operating system prompt Before continuing with this chapter follow steps 3 4 and 5 of Example 2 1 to start SQL Plus again Alternatively log in using the shortcut shown under Shortcuts to Starting SQL Plus above 2 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference
101. with any web browser supporting HTML 3 2 mounted database A database associated with an Oracle instance The database may be opened or closed A database must be both mounted an opened to be accessed by users A database that has been mounted but not opened can be accessed by DBAs for some maintenance purposes Glossary 13 Glossary 14 multi threaded server Allows many user processes to share a small number of server processes minimizing the number of server processes and maximizing the utilization of available system resources NCHAR datatype A standard Oracle datatype The NCHAR datatype specifies a fixed width national character set character string and can have a maximum column size up to 2000 bytes NCLOB datatype A standard Oracle datatype The NCLOB datatype is used to store fixed width national character set character NCHAR data and can store up to 4 gigabytes of character text data Net8 Oracle s remote data access software that enables both client server and server server communications across any network Net8 supports distributed processing and distributed database capability Net8 runs over and interconnects many communications protocols Net8 is backward compatible with SQL Net version 2 network A group of two or more computers linked together through hardware and software to allow the sharing of data and or peripherals null A value that means a value is not applicable or the value is un
102. 022007 eedaeivise Ai dae dee ANEN dl E aaa E TR 4 47 5 Database Administration COVE VIC W io scee cece E ER U OAE ap tts TELS ove ly O EEA NEO RERS 5 2 Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown cccccccessseseseseserssesesesesenseesesensneseseees 5 2 Database Startup nnn cori mand n an a ela Aai a aaka Sa Ea ET i E aE 5 2 Databa se SHN tdOWN aias i a i i ea A ATSE S S Ea 5 3 Redo Log Files pinsi reee eE e aeaa aa a aaa a a e ERA EEE A SEE EE ATES 5 4 ARCHIVELOG Mod rrer aeda iie ea a a n aSa are a E ai 5 4 Database Recovery onare e a s etae asea A e Ea eo TASET ea Eaa S A SES EER NS 5 5 6 Accessing SQL Databases Connecting to the Default Database cccccceseesesescsesssesesesessesesesesesssesesesesessseseseseseseseseees 6 2 Connecting to a Remote Database s ssssssssissssriesissiestsssesiesissesstestestesenstententestesnestesientesnesnestente 6 3 Connecting to a Remote Database from within SQL PIUS cceeeesesesesesesceeseses eset ceeeees 6 3 Connecting to a Remote Database as You Start SQL PIUS cece neeeee tees eeeeeees 6 4 Copying Data from One Database to Another ccccceeccesecsessesesesesesenesesesesensseseseseseneseseees 6 4 Understanding COPY Command Syntax cccccccccccsesesescscsseseececscssseseececssssssseececsssnsnesecenes 6 5 Controlling Treatment of the Destination Table ccccceeecesessssssseseseesesescssesesescseseseecees 6 6 Interpreting the Messages that
103. 2 FROM EMP 3 ORDER BY JOB Here the BREAK command suppresses duplicate values of the column named in SORTCOL For more information about the BREAK command see the section Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines in Chapter 4 Where and How to Use Substitution Variables You can use substitution variables anywhere in SQL and SQL Plus commands except as the first word entered at the command prompt When SQL Plus 3 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Writing Interactive Commands encounters an undefined substitution variable in a command SQL Plus prompts you for the value You can enter any string at the prompt even one containing blanks and punctuation If the SOL command containing the reference should have quote marks around the variable and you do not include them there the user must include the quotes when prompted SQL Plus reads your response from the keyboard even if you have redirected terminal input or output to a file If a terminal is not available if for example you run the command file in batch mode SQL Plus uses the redirected file After you enter a value at the prompt SQL Plus lists the line containing the substitution variable twice once before substituting the value you enter and once after substitution You can suppress this listing by setting the SET command variable VERIFY to OFF Example 3 12 Using Substitution Variables Create a command file named STATS to
104. 21 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Listing and Removing COMPUTE Definitions You can list your current COMPUTE definitions by entering the COMPUTE command with no clauses COMPUTE Example 4 16 Removing COMPUTE Definitions To remove all COMPUTE definitions and the accompanying BREAK definition enter the following commands SQL gt CLEAR BREAKS breaks cleared SQL gt CLEAR COMPUTES computes cleared You may wish to place the commands CLEAR BREAKS and CLEAR COMPUTES at the beginning of every command file to ensure that previously entered BREAK and COMPUTE commands will not affect queries you run in a given file Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions The word page refers to a screenful of information on your display or a page of a spooled printed report You can place top and bottom titles on each page set the number of lines per page and determine the width of each line The word report refers to the complete results of a query You can also place headers and footers on each report and format them in the same way as top and bottom titles on pages Setting the Top and Bottom Titles and Headers and Footers As you have already seen you can set a title to display at the top of each page of a report You can also set a title to display at the bottom of each page The TTITLE command defines the top title the BTITLE command defines the bottom title You ca
105. 3 log out GL 13 Log Writer GL 13 LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST parameter 8 13 LOGFILE clause 8 84 logging off conditionally 8 151 8 153 Oracle 6 2 8 63 SQL Plus 2 4 8 67 logging on Oracle 6 2 6 3 8 47 SQL Plus 2 4 LOGIN SQL 3 19 7 10 including SET commands 3 19 sample commands to include 3 19 See also GLOGIN SQL storing current date in variable for titles 4 30 logon string GL 13 LONG columns changing format 4 6 8 32 default format 8 32 setting maximum width 8 107 setting retrieval size 8 107 LONG datatype GL 13 LONG variable 8 107 effect on COPY command 6 8 8 51 LONGCHUNKSIZE variable 4 7 8 32 8 107 Index 11 MARKUP 4 38 4 42 7 3 SPOOL clause 7 4 SQLPLUS command clause 7 4 MARKUP 4 38 7 3 8 107 GL 13 BODY clause 7 4 ENTMAP clause 7 5 example 8 117 HEAD clause 7 4 PREFORMAT clause 7 7 SPOOL clause 7 4 TABLE clause 7 5 mask format GL 11 MAXDATA variable F 2 F 6 MAXIMUM function 4 16 media recovery 8 134 message sending to screen 3 28 8 80 MINIMUM function 4 16 model format GL 11 MOUNT clause 8 134 mounted GL 13 mounting shared databases 8 134 mounting a database 8 134 multi threaded server GL 14 N NCHAR clause VARIABLE command 8 145 NCHAR columns changing format 4 6 8 32 default format 4 6 8 32 NCHAR datatype GL 14 NCLOB clause VARIABLE command 8 146 NCLOB columns changing format 4 6 8 32 default format 8 32 setting maximum width 8 107 sett
106. 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using this Guide DEPT Contains information about the departments in the company Note Dates in the sample tables use four digit years As the default date format in SQL Plus is DD MM YY dates displayed show only a two digit year Use the SQL TO_CHAR function in your SELECT statements to control the way dates are displayed Figure 1 1 and Figure 1 2 show the information in these tables Figure 1 1 DEPT Table DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON Figure 1 2 EMP Table EMPNO ENAME JOB MGR HIREDATE SAL COMM DEPTNO 7369 SMITH CLERK 7902 17 DEC 80 800 20 7499 ALLEN SALESMAN 7698 20 FEB 81 1600 300 30 7521 WARD SALESMAN 7698 22 FEB 81 1250 500 30 7566 JONES MANAGER 7839 02 APR 81 2975 20 7654 MARTIN SALESMAN 7698 28 SEP 81 1250 1400 30 7698 BLAKE MANAGER 7839 01 MAY 81 2850 30 7782 CLARK MANAGER 7839 09 JUN 81 2450 30 7788 SCOTT ANALYST 7566 09 DEC 82 3000 20 7839 KING PRESIDENT 17 NOV 81 5000 10 7844 TURNER SALESMAN 7698 08 SEP 81 1500 0 30 7876 ADAMS CLERK 7788 12 JAN 83 1100 20 7900 JAMES CLERK 7698 03 DEC 81 950 30 7902 FORD ANALYST 7566 03 DEC 81 3000 20 7934 MILLER CLERK 7782 23 JAN 82 1300 10 Introduction 1 5 What You Need to Run SQL Plus
107. 5 FROM clause 6 5 8 49 INSERT clause 6 7 8 50 inserting data in a table 6 7 8 50 interpreting messages 6 8 mandatory connect identifier 8 50 naming the source table with SELECT 6 6 8 51 query 6 6 8 51 referring to another user s table 6 8 REPLACE clause 6 6 8 50 replacing data ina table 6 6 8 50 sample command 6 5 6 6 service name 6 5 6 7 6 9 specifying column names for destination 6 5 8 50 specifying the data to copy 6 6 8 51 TO clause 6 5 8 49 username password 6 5 6 7 6 9 8 49 USING clause 6 6 8 51 when a commit is performed 8 51 COPYCOMMIT variable 8 103 relationship to COPY command 6 8 8 51 COPYTYPECHECK variable 8 103 COUNT function 4 16 CREATE clause in COPY command 6 6 8 50 CREATE command disabling E 6 entering PL SQL 2 8 creating flat files 4 34 creating the PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table E 2 current line GL 7 cursor variables 8 146 D Data Control Language GL 8 Data Definition Language GL 8 data dictionary GL 8 Data Manipulation Language GL 8 data security GL 8 database GL 7 connect identifier 8 47 dismounted GL 9 failure GL 7 link GL 7 local GL 12 mounting 8 134 object GL 7 open GL 15 opening 8 134 schema GL 19 server GL 7 specification GL 8 string GL 8 transaction GL 24 USERID GL 24 username GL 24 database administrator 1 6 5 2 GL 7 database changes saving automatically 2 13 8 100 DATABASE clause 8 83 database f
108. 599 bytes sent via Net8 to client 256 bytes received via Net8 from client 3 Net8 roundtrips to from client 2 sort memory 0 sort disk 14 rows processed COON fk Oo This option is useful when you are tuning a large query but do not want to see the query report Example 3 23 Tracing Statements Using a Database Link To trace a statement using a database link SQL gt SET AUTOTRACE TRACEONLY EXPLAIN SQL gt SELECT FROM EMP MY_LINK Execution Plan SELECT STATEMENT REMOTE Optimizer CHOOSE 1 0 TABLE ACCESS FULL OF EMP My_LINK DB_ DOMAIN The Execution Plan shows the table being accessed on line 1 is via the database link MY_LINK DB_DOMAIN Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries When you trace a statement in a parallel or distributed query the Execution Plan shows the cost based optimizer estimates of the number of rows the cardinality In general the cost cardinality and bytes at each node represent cumulative results 3 40 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Tracing Statements For example the cost of a join node accounts for not only the cost of completing the join operations but also the entire costs of accessing the relations in that join Lines marked with an asterisk denote a parallel or remote operation Each operation is explained in the second part of the report See the Oracle8i Designing an
109. 7 BREAK seccscioimo knna akoe n a aa a e a S e 8 19 BEITER orea T aaa aaa T E E A E stussveres slbvcnecusdes Sesetucestaticy 8 24 CHANG Esne e r aie aa a ore e o E AE EA Cody ak ods Sead hte E S 8 25 CLEAR ren oe eea Eaa A ESEE E IEE sin st oti EAEE Wht eit led OE ea E S SE AT E 8 28 COLUMN seiret i aner apear Ear aA A a E aAA EA EAEE SKEE EE SEa EE ASi 8 30 COMPUTE snesen Nen r e NS S N E A A E NA RE S 8 41 CONNECT ien ip aaea aaea e a rE r EELEE E E R E TR E a EE A EOS E aT 8 47 COPY ios batt r ha E Mii ERE a E ER E E ORE 8 49 DEFINE ce eaa E a E E E fetes E E E E Shae cect ted 8 52 DED arinen e A thon e Seah could a a ere e aaa e e E a E 8 54 DESCRIBE esensi ih honnii en aa erideiten ie 8 56 DISCONNECT iero a aa aaraa Aai ie a E E 8 63 EDI kne o aa a e a aaa Aa S 8 64 vii viii ENED araa she Vee iil sae Bel Leia eds aS E OERA e EANA iss eoe ESTEA POEA S eE E EEE e ss satin 8 67 GET EEEN TEITE ETETA ETIE PIE A TATEA 8 69 HELP senan n Ae A a an n E vig hted Seat a neds te tiae ede eb Uebel aa Sheetal eee Tes 8 70 HOS Doae aeae a re a Aa ick aa aE aS oe Tie aa ae Ro A RE sea E ERE 8 71 INPUT enn e ie a ETE ERTO R E cel E E AER 8 73 PIST nt a OEE EE E TEE EE ET E a E E ENED 8 75 PASSWORD iiae ouier aaie E oea e ee a Sheth oooh ep Aa TEE er E E E EE Ee shuts SE E ie 8 77 PAUSE eoio na aa a a a a a r a EENS 8 78 A E D AEREA RI ENAA TTA TAN ETE EE E A AAEE 8 79 PROMP E eenn ne nena ae A SANS E E e A SANN 8 80 RECOVER Ge Eanan Ere AAE a RENE EE
110. 8 aborting and exiting with a return code 3 18 8 152 8 154 allowing end user input 3 21 creating with a system editor 3 11 creating with INPUT and SAVE 3 9 creating with SAVE 3 8 8 96 editing with GET and SAVE 3 18 editing with host system editor 3 18 8 64 in at sign command 3 16 8 5 in double at sign command 8 7 in EDIT command 3 18 8 64 in GET command 3 15 8 69 in SAVE command 3 8 3 10 8 96 in SQLPLUS command 3 17 7 10 in START command 3 16 8 131 including comments in 3 11 8 88 including more than one PL SQL block 3 11 including more than one SQL command 3 10 3 11 listing names with HOST command 3 9 nesting 3 17 passing parameters to 3 27 8 5 8 131 registering 8 99 retrieving 3 15 8 69 running 3 16 8 5 8 131 running a series in sequence 3 17 running as you start SQL Plus 3 17 7 10 running in batch mode 3 18 8 68 running nested 8 7 saving contents of buffer in 3 8 8 96 command prompt GL 5 host operating system 2 3 SQL Plus 2 4 commands 1 2 collecting timing statistics on 2 15 8 138 disabling E 4 host running from SQL Plus 2 16 8 71 listing current in buffer 8 75 re enabling E 5 spaces 2 5 Index 5 SQL continuing on additional lines 2 7 editing in buffer 3 2 editing with host system editor 3 7 8 64 ending 2 7 entering and executing 2 6 entering without executing 2 8 executing current 2 10 8 9 8 95 following syntax 2 7 list of major D 1
111. 8 36 displaying current date 4 30 8 35 8 38 displaying page number 4 27 8 143 displaying system maintained values 4 27 8 140 formatting elements 8 142 formatting system maintained values in 4 28 indenting 4 26 8 141 listing current definition 4 28 8 24 8 142 restoring definition 4 28 setting at start or end of report 4 22 setting lines from top of page to top title 4 31 8 107 F 2 setting lines from top title to end of page 8 108 setting top and bottom 4 22 8 24 8 140 F 2 spacing between last row and bottom title 4 25 suppressing definition 4 28 8 141 TO clause 6 5 8 49 tracing statements 3 36 for performance statistics 3 38 for query execution path 3 38 using a database link 3 40 with parallel query option 3 41 transaction GL 24 transaction rollback GL 19 TRIMOUT variable 8 111 TRIMSPOOL variable 8 112 truncate GL 24 TRUNCATE command disabling E 6 TRUNCATE variable F 2 F 7 TRUNCATED clause 4 7 8 37 TTITLE clause 8 125 TTITLE command 4 22 8 140 GL 24 aligning title elements 4 24 8 141 BOLD clause 8 141 CENTER clause 4 25 8 141 COL clause 4 26 8 141 FORMAT clause 4 27 8 142 indenting titles 4 26 8 141 LEFT clause 4 25 8 141 listing current definition 4 28 8 142 OFF clause 4 28 8 141 old form F 7 ON clause 4 28 referencing column value variable 4 29 8 35 restoring current definition 4 28 RIGHT clause 4 25 8 141 SKIP clause 4 25 8 141 suppressing
112. 9 999 not a variable Character Columns The default width of CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR and NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING col umns is the width of the column in the database SOL Plus formats these datatypes left justified If a value does not fit within the column width SQL Plus wraps or truncates the character string depending on the setting of SET WRAP A LONG CLOB or NCLOB column s width defaults to the value of SET LONGCHUNKSIZE or SET LONG whichever one is smaller To change the width of a datatype to n use FORMAT Arn A stands for alphanumeric If you specify a width shorter than the column head ing SQL Plus truncates the heading If you specify a width for a LONG CLOB or NCLOB column SQL Plus uses the LONGCHUNK SIZE or the specified width whichever is smaller as the column width DATE Columns The default width and format of unformatted DATE columns in SQL Plus is derived from the NLS parameters in effect Oth erwise the default width is A9 In Oracle8i the NLS parameters may be set in your database parameter file or may be environment variables or an equivalent platform specific mechanism They may also be specified 8 32 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN for each session with the ALTER SESSION command See the docu mentation for Oracle8i for a complete description of the NLS parame ters You can change the format of any DATE column using the SQL func tion TO_CHAR in your SQL SELECT stat
113. BLE table created in your schema For information on how to grant the PLUSTRACE role and how to create the PLAN_TABLE table see the Oracle8i SQL Reference manual For more information about the PLUSTRACE role and the PLAN_ TABLE see the Oracle8i SQL Reference manual and the AUTOTRACE variable of the SET command in Chapter 8 Execution Plan The Execution Plan shows the SQL optimizer s query execution path Both tables are accessed by a full table scan sorted and then merged Each line of the Execution Plan has a sequential line number SQL Plus also displays the line number of the parent operation The Execution Plan consists of four columns displayed in the following order Column Name Description ID_PLUS_EXP Shows the line number of each execution step PARENT_ID_PLUS_EXP Shows the relationship between each step and its parent This column is useful for large reports PLAN_PLUS_EXP Shows each step of the report OBJECT_NODE_PLUS_EXP Shows the database links or parallel query servers used The format of the columns may be altered with the COLUMN command For example to stop the PARENT_ID_PLUS_EXP column being displayed enter SQL gt COLUMN PARENT_ID_PLUS_EXP NOPRINT Manipulating Commands 3 37 Tracing Statements Statistics The default formats can be found in the site profile for example glogin sql The Execution Plan output is generated using the EXPLAIN PLAN command For information abo
114. CCEPT gives an error message and prompts again for a reply The format element must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 See the COLUMN command in this chapter for a complete list of format elements Oracle date formats such as dd mm yy are valid when the datatype is DATE DATE without a specified format defaults to the Oracle NLS_ DATE_FORMAT of the current session See the Oracle8i Administrator s 8 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ACCEPT Guide and the Oracle8i SQL Reference for information on Oracle date for mats DEF AULT Sets the default value if a reply is not given The reply must be in the specified format if defined PROMPT text Displays text on screen before accepting the value of variable from the user NOPR OMPT Skips a line and waits for input without displaying a prompt HIDE Suppresses the display as you type the reply To display or reference variables use the DEFINE command See the DEFINE command in this chapter for more information Examples To display the prompt Password place the reply in a CHAR variable named PSWD and suppress the display enter SQL gt ACCEPT pswd CHAR PROMPT Password HIDE To display the prompt Enter weekly salary and place the reply ina NUMBER variable named SALARY with a default of 000 0 enter SQL gt ACCEPT salary NUMBER FORMAT 999 99 DEFAULT 000 0 gt PROMPT Enter weekly salary
115. CME WIDGET SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ALLE 1600 30 BLAKE 2850 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected Example 4 18 Placing a Header on a Report To put a report header on a separate page and to center it enter SQL gt R EPH FAD ER PAGE CE NT ER ACME WIDGE Now run the current query SQL gt T Formatting Query Results 4 23 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions SQL Plus displays the following output on page one ACME WIDGET SALES DEPARTME PERSONNEL REPORT ACME WIDGE COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL and the following output on page two ACME WIDGET SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ALLE 1600 30 BLAKE 2850 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected To suppress the report header without changing its definition enter SQL gt REPHEADER OFF Positioning Title Elements The report in the preceding exercises might look more attractive if you give the company name more emphasis and place the type of report and the department name on either end of a separate line It may also help to reduce the linesize and thus center th
116. COPY Displays c cccccseccsssssesesesceseecscssseseseecscessnsneseeses 6 8 Specifying Another User s Table siiis isani haa raa aas aea E Er EE E EEEE 6 8 Copying Data between Tables on One Database cccceccesssssesesesesenssesesesesesseesesenenesesees 6 9 vi Part Il Reference 7 Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help Starting SOL Plus Using the SOLPLUS Command cccc cece cs csc eeececeeeneneneceeees 7 2 OPHONS antaiien naie See asi ais aa aaa a eaaa es eve iioa tetea iea aeia eas 7 2 1E0110 OCEA E A AE A A E E A T AE 7 9 Olarletist atisinei sale oe ea Siena ache ene an a Sens 7 10 Setting Up the Site Profiles essaia eese sed caseabe dedscusahadfestutshidasseissSacedscseabsdadsedeatesbtad 7 10 Setting Up the User Profilen ie rane iran tn a sedesstvec a EE E A ER R EKR RS 7 10 Receiving a Return Coders tssresre tean e es e a A 7 10 Getting Hell pe cisccsc fics tvsiess nccecags i a Sai Sei A A louie Sh E aaae a a 7 12 Command Reference SOL Plus Command S mmaiy ingieni a iiy i ae iaiia 8 2 af Sigh seasecctine son authored dest aa a p evana e via iaeiae ais E Baa iaoea HINNES 8 5 Q double at sign iien aa apa ArT R aara e a aS aA EEEE beta ae 8 7 RCI ET 1 EEE E A ten A A E T E E 8 9 ACCERTATA E E I e Eas sa EAE Ea Ne sE AER AES eoe a O At 8 10 APPEND o o E E E A E RE E AT E E OURA EERE 8 12 ARCHIVE LOG Guesa aa a e SEO NRO EN NESNA N 8 13 ATTRIBUTE nai ipa r a both des Ae ia Se EE E ETa a a a Aaii 8 1
117. E Examples To assign the value MANAGER to the variable POS type SQL gt DEFINE POS MANAGER If you execute a command that contains a reference to amp POS SQL Plus will substitute the value MANAGER for amp POS and will not prompt you for a POS value To assign the CHAR value 20 to the variable DEPTNO type SQL gt DEFINE DEPTNO 20 Even though you enter the number 20 SOL Plus assigns a CHAR value to DEPTNO consisting of two characters 2 and 0 To list the definition of DEPTNO enter SQL gt DEFINE DEPTNO DEFINE DEPTNO 20 CHAR This result shows that the value of DEPTNO is 20 Command Reference 8 53 DEL DEL Purpose Deletes one or more lines of the buffer Syntax DEL n n m n n LAST n LAST LAST Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause n Deletes line n nm Deletes lines n through m n Deletes line n through the current line n LAST Deletes line n through the last line i Deletes the current line n Deletes the current line through line n LAST Deletes the current line through the last line LAST Deletes the last line Enter DEL with no clauses to delete the current line of the buffer Usage Notes DEL makes the following line of the buffer if any the current line You can enter DEL several times to delete several consecutive lines
118. E GENDER VARCHARZ2 10 DEPT ECUR_DEPARTMENT DEPTNO UMBER DEPT_NAME VARCHAR2 20 LOCATIO VARCHAR2 20 Command Reference 8 61 DESCRIBE START_DATE DATE POSITION VARCHAR 1 SAL RECUR_SALARY ANNUAL_SAL UMBER 10 2 EMP TYPE VARCHAR2 1 COMM UMBER 10 2 PENALTY_RATE UMBER 5 2 For more information on using the CREATE TYPE command see your Oracle8i SQL Reference For information about using the SET DESCRIBE and SHOW DESCRIBE commands see the SET and SHOW commands later in this chapter 8 62 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DISCONNECT DISCONNECT Purpose Commits pending changes to the database and logs the current username out of Oracle but does not exit SOL Plus Syntax DISC ONNECT Usage Notes Use DISCONNECT within a command file to prevent user access to the database when you want to log the user out of Oracle but have the user remain in SQL Plus Use EXIT or QUIT to log out of Oracle and return control to your host computer s operating system Example Your command file might begin with a CONNECT command and end with a DISCONNECT as shown below SQL gt GET MYFILE 1 CONNECT 15 DISCONNECT Command Reference 8 63 EDIT EDIT Purpose Invokes a host operating system text editor on the contents of the specified file or on the contents of the buffer Syntax ED IT file_na
119. E LONGCHUNKSIZE value output line size line size after variable substitution number of characters in a COMPUTE command label number of lines per SQL command maximum PAGESIZE total row width maximum ARRAYSIZE maximum number of nested command files maximum page number maximum PL SQL error message size maximum ACCEPT character string length maximum number of DEFINE variables system dependent 30 bytes 30 bytes 240 characters 2500 characters LINESIZE value system dependent system dependent system dependent 3 000 characters internal only 500 characters 500 assuming 80 characters per line 50 000 lines 60 000 characters for VMS otherwise 32 767 characters 5000 rows 20 for VMS CMS Unix otherwise 5 99 999 2K 240 Bytes 2048 C 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference D SQL Command List Table D 1 on the following page lists major SQL commands Refer to the OracleSi SQL Reference for full documentation of these commands SQL Command List D 1 Table D 1 SQL Command List Major SQL Commands and Clauses ALTER LOCK TABLE ANALYZE NOAUDIT AUDIT RENAME COMMENT REVOKE CREATE SAVEPOINT DROP SET ROLE EXPLAIN SET TRANSACTION GRANT TRUNCATE INSERT UPDATE D 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference E Security This appendix describes the available methods for controlling access to database tables and SQL Plus commands The available methods for
120. E addr_varray AS VARRAY 10 OF ADDRESS 2 SQL gt DESCRIBE addr_varray SQL Plus lists the following information addr_varray VARRAY 10 OF ADDRESS Name Null Type STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 Command Reference 8 59 DESCRIBE To create and describe the table dept_emp that contains the columns DEPTNO PERSON and LOC enter SQL gt CREATE TABLE dept_emp 2 DEPTNO NUMBER 3 PERSON EMPLOYEE 4 LOC UMBER eet W 6 SQL gt DESCRIBE dept_emp SQL Plus lists the following information Name Null Type DEPTNO UMBER PERSON EMPLOYEE LOC UMBER To create and describe the object type rational that contains the attributes NUMERATOR and DENOMINATOR and the METHOD rational_order enter SQL gt CREATE OR REPLACE TYPE rational AS OBJECT 2 NUMERATOR NUMBER 3 DENOMINATOR NUMBER AP MEMBER FUNCTION rational_order gt RETURN DOUBLE PRECISION 5 PRAGMA RESSTRICT_REFERENCES 6 rational_order RNDS WNDS RNPS WNPS 7 SQL gt CREATE OR REPLACE TYPE BODY rational AS OBJECT 2 MAP MEMBER FUNCTION rational_order gt RETURN DOUBLE PRECISION IS 3 BEGIN
121. E is used if only a single word or string in quotes follows the TTITLE command For a description of the old form of TTITLE see TTITLE in Appendix F Syntax TTI TLE printspec text variable ON OFF where printspec represents one or more of the following clauses used to place and format the text COL n S KIP n TAB n LE F CE NTER R IGHT BOLD FORMAT text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause These terms and clauses also apply to the BTITLE command text Represents the title text Enter text in single quotes if you want to place more than one word on a single line variable Represents a user variable or any of the following system maintained values a SQL LNO current line number a SQL PNO current page number a SQL RELEASE current Oracle release number 8 140 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference TTITLE OFF ON COL n S KIP TAB n a SQL SQLCODE current error code a SQL USER current username To print one of these values reference the appropriate variable in the title You can format variable with the FORMAT clause Turns the title off suppresses its display without affecting its defini tion Turns the title on restores its display When you define a top title SQL Plus automatically sets TTITLE to ON Indents to column n of the current line backward if column n has been passed Column in t
122. EFAULT clause F 3 NEWPAGE F 2 F 4 SET command BUFFER variable F 4 SET command CLOSECURSOR variable F 2 F 5 SET command DOCUMENT variable F 2 F 5 SET command MAXDATA variable F 2 F 6 SET command SCAN variable F 2 F 6 SET command SPACE variable F 2 F 6 SET command TRUNCATE variable F 2 F 7 SHOW command LABEL variable F 2 F 7 TTITLE command old form F 7 OF clause 4 16 OFF clause 8 37 in ATTRIBUTE command 8 18 in COLUMN command 4 9 8 37 in REPFOOTER commands 8 92 in REPHEADER commands 8 92 in SPOOL command 4 34 8 130 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 4 28 8 141 OLD_VALUE clause 4 30 8 36 ON clause in ATTRIBUTE command 8 18 in COLUMN command 4 9 8 37 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 4 28 ON column clause in BREAK command 4 12 8 19 in COMPUTE command 4 16 8 42 ON expr clause in BREAK command 8 20 in COMPUTE command 8 42 ON REPORT clause in BREAK command 4 19 8 21 in COMPUTE command 4 19 8 42 ON ROW clause in BREAK command 4 13 8 21 in COMPUTE command 8 42 online help 2 5 7 12 8 70 online redo log GL 15 OPEN clause 8 134 open database GL 15 opening a database 8 134 operating system GL 15 Oracle USERID GL 24 Oracle Server GL 16 ORDER BY clause displaying column values in titles 4 29 displaying values together in output 4 11 OUT clause 4 35 8 130 output GL 16 formatting white space in 8 111 pausing during display 2 17 8 108 query results 1 2 output file GL 16 P p
123. ERM OUT ON OFF Controls the display of output generated by commands executed from a command file OFF suppresses the display so that you can spool out put from a command file without seeing the output on the screen ON displays the output TERMOUT OFF does not affect output from com mands you enter interactively TI ME ON OFF Controls the display of the current time ON displays the current time before each command prompt OFF suppresses the time display TIMI NG ON OFF Controls the display of timing statistics ON displays timing statistics on each SQL command or PL SQL block run OFF suppresses timing of each command For information about the data SET TIMING ON dis plays see the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Refer to the TIMING command for information on timing multiple commands TRIM OUT ON OFF Determines whether SQL Plus allows trailing blanks at the end of each displayed line ON removes blanks at the end of each line improving performance especially when you access SQL Plus from a slow commu nications device OFF allows SQL Plus to display trailing blanks TRI MOUT ON does not affect spooled output Command Reference 8 111 SET TRIMS POOL ON OFF Determines whether SQL Plus allows trailing blanks at the end of each spooled line ON removes blanks at the end of each line OFF allows SQL Plus to include trailing blanks TRIMSPOOL ON does not affect terminal ou
124. ERT or APPEND The REPLACE clause names the table to be created in the destination database and specifies the following actions a Ifthe destination table already exists COPY drops the existing table and replaces it with a table containing the copied data a Ifthe destination table does not already exist COPY creates it using the copied data You can use the CREATE clause to avoid accidentally writing over an existing table CREATE specifies the following actions a Ifthe destination table already exists COPY reports an error and stops 6 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Copying Data from One Database to Another a If the destination table does not already exist COPY creates the table using the copied data Use INSERT to insert data into an existing table INSERT specifies the following actions a Ifthe destination table already exists COPY inserts the copied data in the destination table a Ifthe destination table does not already exist COPY reports an error and stops Use APPEND when you want to insert data in an existing table or create a new table if the destination table does not exist APPEND specifies the following actions a Ifthe destination table already exists COPY inserts the copied data in the destination table a Ifthe table does not already exist COPY creates the table and then inserts the copied data in it Example 6 1 Copying from a Remote Database to Your Local Database Using CREATE
125. FF turns this display on or off Turn ing feedback ON sets n to 1 Setting feedback to zero is equivalent to turning it OFF FLAGGER OFF ENTRY INTERMED IATE FULL Checks to make sure that SQL statements conform to the ANSI ISO SQL92 standard If any non standard constructs are found the Oracle Server flags them as errors and displays the violating syntax This is the equivalent of the SQL language ALTER SESSION SET FLAGGER com mand You may execute SET FLAGGER even if you are not connected to a database FIPS flagging will remain in effect across SQL Plus sessions until a SET FLAGGER OFF or ALTER SESSION SET FLAGGER OFF command is successful or you exit SQL Plus When FIPS flagging is enabled SQL Plus displays a warning for the CONNECT DISCONNECT and ALTER SESSION SET FLAGGER com mands even if they are successful FLU SH ON OFF Controls when output is sent to the user s display device OFF allows the host operating system to buffer output ON disables buffering Use OFF only when you run a command file non interactively that is when you do not need to see output and or prompts until the com mand file finishes running The use of FLUSH OFF may improve per formance by reducing the amount of program I O HEA DING ON OFF Controls printing of column headings in reports ON prints column headings in reports OFF suppresses column headings The SET HEADING OFF command will not affect the column width displayed
126. Guide Oracle8i Application Developer s Guide Fundamentals Oracle amp i Distributed Database Systems Oracle8i Replication Oracle8i Utilities Oracle8i Error Messages Oracle8i Migration Oracle8i Reference Oracle8i Designing and Tuning for Performance Oracle8i Parallel Server Concepts Net8 Administrator s Guide Oracle Call Interface Programmer s Guide Pro COBOL Precompiler Programmer s Guide Pro C C Precompiler Programmer s Guide Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Part Understanding SQL Plus This section provides an introduction to SQL Plus It provides an overview of how to run SQL Plus and demonstrates this with various examples The following chapters are covered in this section a Introduction a Learning SQL Plus Basics a Manipulating Commands a Formatting Query Results a Database Administration a Accessing SQL Databases 1 Introduction This chapter introduces you to SQL Plus covering the following topics a Overview of SQL Plus a Using this Guide a What You Need to Run SQL Plus Introduction 1 1 Overview of SQL Plus Overview of SQL Plus You can use the SQL Plus program in conjunction with the SQL database language and its procedural language extension PL SQL The SQL database language allows you to store and retrieve data in Oracle PL SQL allows you to link several SQL commands through procedural logic SQL Plus enables you to
127. If the BREAK command specified earlier in this section is used the fol lowing SELECT command produces meaningful results SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO JOB SAL ENAME 2 FROM EMP 3 ORDER BY DEPINO JOB SAL ENAME All rows with the same DEPTNO print together on one page and within that page all rows with the same JOB print in groups Within each group of jobs those jobs with the same SAL print in groups Breaks in ENAME cause no action because ENAME does not appear in the BREAK command 8 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BREAK ON expr action action When you include action s specifies action s for SOL Plus to take when the value of the expression changes When you omit action s BREAK ON expr suppresses printing of dupli cate values of expr and marks a place in the report where SQL Plus will perform the computation you specify in a corresponding COMPUTE command You can use an expression involving one or more table columns or an alias assigned to a report column in a SQL SELECT or SQL Plus COL UMN command If you use an expression in a BREAK command you must enter expr exactly as it appears in the SELECT command If the expression in the SELECT command is a b for example you cannot use b a or a b in a BREAK command to refer to the expression in the SELECT command The information given above for ON column also applies to ON expr ON ROW action act
128. If your command file generates a SQL error while running from a batch file on the host operating system you may want to abort the command file and exit with a return code Use the SQL Plus command WHENEVER SQLERROR to do this see the WHENEVER SQLERROR command in Chapter 8 for more information Similarly the WHENEVER OSERROR command may be used to exit if an operating system error occurs See the WHENEVER OSERROR command in Chapter 8 for more information 3 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Commands for Later Use Setting Up Your SQL Plus Environment You may wish to set up your SQL Plus environment in a particular way such as showing the current time as part of the SQL Plus command prompt and then reuse those settings with each session You can do this through a host operating system file called LOGIN with the file extension SQL also called your User Profile The exact name of this file is system dependent see the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for the precise name You can add any SQL commands PL SQL blocks or SQL Plus commands to this file when you start SQL Plus it automatically searches for your LOGIN file first in your local directory and then on a system dependent path and runs the commands it finds there You may also have a Site Profile for example GLOGIN SQL See page 7 10 for more information on the relationship of Site and User Profiles Modifying Your
129. LE closes the cursor after completing a PRINT statement for that bind variable or on exit SQL Plus formatting commands such as BREAK COLUMN COMPUTE and SET may be used to format the output from PRINTing a REFCURSOR A REFCURSOR bind variable may not be PRINTed more than once without re executing the PL SQL OPEN FOR statement Examples The following example illustrates creating a bind variable and then setting it to the value returned by a function SQL gt VARIABLE id BER SQL gt BEGIN 2 id emp management hire 3 BLAKE MANAGER KING 2990 SALES 4 END The bind variable named id can be displayed with the PRINT command or used in subsequent PL SQL subprograms The following example illustrates automatically displaying a bind variable SQL gt SET AUTOPRINT O SQL gt VARIABLE a REFCURSOR SQL gt BEGIN 2 OPEN a FOR SELECT FROM DEPT ORDER BY DEPTNO 3 END 4 PL SQL procedure successfully completed DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON In the above example there is no need to issue a PRINT command to display the variable Command Reference 8 147 VARIABLE The following example creates some variables and then lists them SQL gt VARIABLE id ER SQL gt VARIABLE SQL gt VARIAB
130. LE SQL gt VARIABLE variable id txt CHAR 20 myvar datatype NUMB variable txt datatype CHAR 20 variable myvar datatype REFCURSOR REF CURSOR The following example lists a single variable SQL gt VARIABLE variable txt datatype CHAR The following example illustrates producing a report listing individual salaries and txt 20 computing the departmental and total salary cost SQL gt VARIABLE RC REFCURSOR 2 BEGIN 3 OPEN RC FOR SELECT DNAME ENAME SAL 4 FROM EMP DEP 5 WHERE EMP DEPTNO DEPT DEPTNO 6 ORDER BY EMP DEPTNO ENAME 7 END 8 PL SQL procedure successfully completed SQL gt SET PAGESIZE 100 FEEDBACK OFF SQL gt TTITLE LEFT Depar SQL gt COLUMN SAL FORMAT 999 990 99 HI SQL gt COLUMN DNAI HEADING Department SQL gt COLUMN ENAME HEADING Employee SQL gt COMPUTE SUM LABEL SQL gt COMPUTE SUM LABEL SQL gt BREAK ON DNAME SKIP 1 ON REPORT SQL gt PRINT RC 8 148 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference FADING Subtotal OF SAL Q Total OF SAL ON RI SKIP 1 tmental Salary Bill Salary DNAI EPORT VARIABLE Departmental Salary Bill
131. MN command in Chapter 8 Example 4 4 Formatting a NUMBER Column To display SAL with a dollar sign a comma and the numeral zero instead of a blank for any zero values enter the following command SQL gt COLUMN SAL FORMAT 99 990 Now rerun the current query SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following output Employee Department Name Salary Commission 30 ALLE 1 600 300 30 WARD 1 250 500 30 MARTIN 1 250 1400 30 TURNER 1 500 0 Use a zero in your format model as shown above when you use other formats such as a dollar sign and wish to display a zero in place of a blank for zero values Note The format model will stay in effect until you enter a new one reset the column s format with COLUMN colname CLEAR or exit from SQL Plus Formatting Query Results 4 5 Formatting Columns Formatting Datatypes When displaying datatypes you can either accept the SQL Plus default display width or you can change it using the COLUMN command Datatypes in this manual include the following variables a CHAR a NCHAR a VARCHAR2 VARCHAR a NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING a DATE a LONG a CLOB a NCLOB Note The NCHAR NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING CLOB and NCLOB datatypes require Oracle8 or higher Default Display The default width of datatype columns is the width of the column in the database The default width and format of unformatted DATE columns in SQL Plus is derived from
132. MOUNT Example 5 3 Opening the Database To start an instance using the Oracle8i Server parameter file INITSALE ORA mount and open the database named SALES in exclusive mode and restrict access to administrative personnel enter SQL gt STARTUP OPEN sales PFILE INITSALE ORA EXCLUSIVE RESTRICT where SALES is the database name specified in the DB_LNAME parameter in the INITSALE ORA parameter file Database Shutdown Shutting down a database involves three steps 1 Closing the database When a database is closed all database and recovery data in the SGA are written to the datafiles and redo log files and closes all online datafiles 2 Dismounting the database Dismounting the database disassociates the database from an instance and closes the control files of the database 3 Shutting down the instance Shutting down an instance reclaims the SGA from memory and terminates the background Oracle processes that constitute an Oracle instance For more information about database shutdown see the OracleSi Concepts manual For information about the SHUTDOWN command see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Example 5 4 Shutting Down the Database To shut down the database normally after it has been opened and mounted enter SQL gt SHUTDOWN Database closed Database dismounted ORACLE instance shut down Database Administration 5 3 Redo Log Files Redo Log Files Every Oracle database has a s
133. MP 3 WHERE DEPTNO lt 20 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO SQL Plus displays the following output DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 CLARK 2450 10 KING 5000 10 MILLER 1300 8750 20 SMITH 800 Command Reference 8 45 COMPUTE 20 ADAMS 1100 20 FORD 3000 20 SCOTT 3000 20 JONES 2975 10875 8 rows selected To calculate the salary total at the end of the report without printing the compute label enter SQL gt COLUMN DUMMY NOPRINT SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DUMMY SQL gt BREAK ON DUMMY SQL gt SELEC ULL DUMMY DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE DEPTNO lt 20 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO SQL Plus displays the following output DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 CLARK 2450 10 KING 5000 10 MILLER 1300 20 SMITH 800 20 ADAMS 1100 20 FORD 3000 20 SCOTT 3000 20 JONES 2975 19625 8 rows selected 8 46 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CONNECT CONNECT Purpose Connects a given username to Oracle Syntax CONN ECT logon AS SYSOPER SYSDBA where logon requires the following syntax username password connect_identifier Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause username password Represent the username and password with which you wish to connect to Oracle If you omit user
134. MPLOYEE Similarly to list the column definitions for a table called EMP you might enter this command DESCRIBE EMP Using this Guide This Guide gives you information about SQL Plus that applies to all operating systems Some aspects of SQL Plus however differ on each operating system Such operating system specific details are covered in the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your system Use these operating system specific manuals in conjunction with the SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Throughout this Guide examples showing how to enter commands use a common command syntax and a common set of sample tables Both are described below You will find the conventions for command syntax particularly useful when referring to commands in Chapter 7 and Chapter 8 of this Guide Conventions for Command Syntax The following two tables describe the notation and conventions for command syntax used in this Guide Table 1 1 Commands Terms and Clauses Feature Example Explanation uppercase BTITLE Enter text exactly as spelled it need not be in uppercase lowercase italics column A clause value substitute an appropriate value words with c A single character specific meanings char A CHAR value a literal in single quotes or an expression with a CHAR value d ore A date or an expression with a DATE value Introduction 1 3 Using this Guide Table
135. MY SQL gt BREAK ON DUMMY SQL gt SELEC ULL DUMMY DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 W EPTNO lt 20 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO Ej J 4 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines SQL Plus displays the following output DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 KING 5000 10 CLARK 2450 10 MILLER 1300 20 JONES 2975 20 FORD 3000 20 SMITH 800 20 SCOTT 3000 20 ADAMS 1100 19625 8 rows selected Note The format of the column SAL controls the appearance of the sum of SAL as well as the individual values of SAL When you establish the format of a NUMBER column you must allow for the size of sums you will include in your report Computing Summary Lines at the End of the Report You can calculate and print summary lines based on all values in a column by using BREAK and COMPUTE in the following forms BREAK ON R EPORT COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column column column ON REPORT Example 4 13 Computing and Printing a Grand Total To calculate and print the grand total of salaries for all salesmen and change the compute label first enter the following BREAK and COMPUTE commands SQL gt BREAK ON REPORT SQL gt COMPU TE SUM LABEL TOTAL OF SAL ON REPORT Next enter and run a new query
136. N DEPTNO HEADING DEPARTMENT SQL gt COLUMN ENAME HEADING EMPLOYEE SQL gt COLUMN SAL FORMAT 99 999 HEADING SALARY SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 ORDER BY DEPTNO SQL Plus displays a formfeed followed by the query results ACME WIDGET PERSONNEL REPORT 10 JAN 99 DEPARTMENT EMPLOYEE SALARY 10 CLARK 2 450 10 KING 5 000 10 MILLER 1 300 4 32 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Storing and Printing Query Results 20 SMITH 800 20 ADAMS 1 100 20 FORD 3 000 20 SCOTT 3 000 20 JONES 2 975 30 ALLE 1 600 30 BLAKE 2 850 30 MARTIN 1 250 30 JAMES 950 30 TURNER 1 500 30 WARD 1 250 14 rows selected Now reset PAGESIZE NEWPAGE and LINESIZE to their default values SQL gt SET PAGESIZE 24 SQL gt SET NEWPAGE 1 SQL gt SET LINESIZE 80 To list the current values of these variables use the SHOW command SQL gt SHOW PAGESIZE pagesize 24 SQL gt SHOW NEWPAGE newpage 1 SQL gt SHOW LINESIZE linesize 80 Through the SQL Plus command SPOOL you can store your query results in a file or print them on your computer s default printer Storing and Printing Query Results Send your query results to a file when you want to edit them
137. OL PIAS cess eetcc ss cevccicecctesttct cssetes ire NA a E E NA a EER 2 4 Entering and Executing Commands cccccccssessesssesssssseesesessssesesesessssesesesesssseseseseseseseseees 2 5 Running SOL Commands cernas aia csdis coves eeo atape aneri nni aare aaia SS ee SA aE 2 6 Running PL SQL Blocksi y meiege rei parrain 2 10 Running SOL Plus Command vc ccs casts ion i E EE R SERR 2 11 Variables that Affect Running Commands sssssssessssessesssesiesisstesssstesinsiesensneniesiesenssenteseesee 2 13 Saving Changes to the Database Automatically s sssssssssssissessssssssisstessssnesiesnsrensesnesnesne 2 13 Stopping a Command while it is RUNNINg s ssesssessessestessesressestersissesntsnensessesnesnnnnieseeneeneens 2 15 Collecting Timing Statistics on Commands You Run s sssssssssssisssssississrsnsessesnesssrinsesnesneess 2 15 Running Host Operating System CommandS s sssssssssssisisstsseesiestssesreestesiesessneseeseeneenenns 2 16 Getting Helprint pisie e E A A E E R AA E EAE ER A E 2 16 Listing a Table Definition seneesa i tea vane Besen S Geass aE 2 16 Fisting PE SQLDeEfiNIUONS aeara noe See eE E Aaen En D D Seah ee Toi rE a EESE 2 17 Controlling the Displ ayssniririieri ei E E E E E E E E E tts 2 17 Interpreting Error Messages cccccccsssssesesesessesescseneessseseecsesessesesesesseseecsenssesessesesesseseessenaeeeess 2 18 3 Manipulating Commands Editing Crm at NS 2s oo sees van Basse eas
138. OPROMPT clause 8 11 NUMBER clause 3 30 PROMPT clause 3 29 8 11 access denying and granting E 2 account GL 1 GL 24 alias GL 1 GL 23 ALIAS clause 8 31 Index 1 in ATTRIBUTE command 8 17 alignment GL 1 ALL clause 8 123 ALTER command disabling E 5 ampersands amp in parameters 3 27 8 5 8 131 substitution variables 3 22 ANALYZE command disabling E 5 anonymous block GL 1 APPEND clause in COPY command 6 7 8 50 inSAVE command 3 18 8 96 APPEND command 3 2 3 6 8 12 APPINFO clause 8 99 ARCH background process 8 14 ARCHIVE LOG command 5 4 8 13 mode 5 4 archived redo log GL 1 ARCHIVELOG GL 1 argument GL 2 in START command 3 27 8 131 array processing GL 2 ARRAYSIZE variable 8 100 relationship to COPY command 6 8 8 51 ASCII GL 2 attribute display characteristics 8 17 ATTRIBUTE command 8 17 ALIAS clause 8 17 and CLEAR COLUMN command 8 18 CLEAR clause 8 18 clearing columns 8 28 8 31 controlling display characteristics 8 18 entering multiple 8 18 FORMAT clause 8 18 LIKE clause 8 18 listing all attributes display characteristics 8 17 listing an attribute s display characteristics 8 17 OFF clause 8 18 ON clause 8 18 restoring column display attributes 8 18 suppressing column display attributes 8 18 Index 2 AUDIT command disabling E 5 autocommit GL 2 AUTOCOMMIT variable 2 14 8 100 AUTOMATIC clause 8 82 AUTOPRINT variable 8 101 AUTORECOVERY variable
139. PY Purpose Copies the data from a query to a table in a local or remote database COPY supports the following datatypes CHAR DATE LONG NUMBER VARCHAR2 Syntax COPY FROM database TO database FROM database TO database APPEND CREATE INSERT REPLACE destination_table column column column USING query where database has the following syntax username password connect_identifier Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause FROM database Specifies the database that contains the data to be copied If you omit the FROM clause the source defaults to the database to which SQL Plus is connected that is the database that other commands address You must include a FROM clause to specify a source database other than the default TO database database Specifies the database containing the destination table If you omit the TO clause the destination defaults to the database to which SOL Plus is connected that is the database that other commands address You must include a TO clause to specify a destination database other than the default Specifies username password connect_identifier of the Oracle source or destination database you wish to COPY FROM or COPY TO If you do Command Reference 8 49 COPY not specify password in either the FROM clause or the TO clause SQL Plus will prompt you for it SQL Plus suppre
140. Plus commands in command files You create a command file within SQL Plus in one of three ways enter a command and save the contents of the buffer a use INPUT to enter commands and then save the buffer contents a use EDIT to create the file from scratch using a host system text editor Because SQL Plus commands are not stored in the buffer you must use one of the latter two methods to save SQL Plus commands Creating a Command File by Saving the Buffer Contents To save the current SOL command or PL SQL block for later use enter the SAVE command Follow the command with a file name SQL gt SAVE file_name 3 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Commands for Later Use SQL Plus adds the extension SQL to the filename to identify it as a SQL query file If you wish to save the command or block under a name with a different file extension type a period at the end of the filename followed by the extension you wish to use Note sql is the file extension used by default for files saved from SOL Plus You can use the SOL Plus command SET SUFFIX extension to set the file extension you want to use Note that within SQL Plus you separate the extension from the filename with a period Your operating system may use a different character or a space to separate the filename and the extension Example 3 6 Saving the Current Command First LIST the buffer contents to see your current command
141. QL script There are three main elements required a A web page to call the CGI script a A CGI script to gather the input and run SQL Plus a The SQL script to be run by the SQL Plus session Web Page for CGI Example In this example the web page is a form which prompts for your username and password a database connection string and the name of the SQL script to run 4 42 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Creating Web Reports Note You need to carefully consider security on your server before embedding login information in a script file or using a CGI script to prompt for login information and pass it into the SOLPLUS command Consider setting initial conditions rather than assuming default values For example explicitly set ENTMAP ON even thought its default is ON lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt SOL Plus Report Demonstration lt title gt lt head gt lt body bgcolor ffffff gt lt h1 gt SQL Plus Report Demonstration lt h1 gt lt Change the URL here On Windows NT you may need to use http whatever cgi bin perl plus pl if your web server is not configured to identify the script as a Perl program gt lt form method post action http whatever cgi bin plus pl gt lt table border 0 summary gt lt tr gt lt td gt Username lt td gt lt td gt lt input type text name username size 10 align left gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt Password
142. R variables 8 147 SPOOL command 8 130 procedure GL 17 process GL 17 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table E 2 prompt GL 17 PROMPT clause 3 29 8 11 PROMPT command 3 28 8 80 customizing prompts for value 3 30 prompts for value bypassing with parameters 3 27 customizing 3 30 through ACCEPT 3 28 through substitution variables 3 23 PUPBLD SQL E 2 Q queries 1 2 displaying number of records retrieved 2 7 8 105 in COPY command 6 6 8 51 query GL 17 results GL 18 GL 19 query execution path including in report 8 101 query results 1 2 displaying on screen 2 6 sending toa printer 4 35 8 130 storing ina file 4 34 8 130 QUIT command 8 67 See also EXIT R RAW datatype GL 18 RDBMS GL 18 record GL 18 GL 19 record separators printing 4 9 8 108 RECOVER clause 8 134 recover GL 18 RECOVER command 8 82 AUTOMATIC clause 8 82 CANCEL clause 8 84 CONTINUE clause 8 84 DATABASE clause 8 83 DATAFILE clause 8 84 FROM clause 8 83 LOGFILE clause 8 84 NOPARALLEL clause 8 86 STANDBY DATABASE clause 8 83 STANDBY DATAFILE clause 8 84 STANDBY TABLESPACE clause 8 84 TABLESPACE clause 8 84 UNTIL CANCEL clause 8 83 UNTIL CHANGE clause 8 83 UNTIL CONTROLFILE clause 8 84 UNTIL TIME clause 8 83 USING BACKUP CONTROL FILE clause 8 84 recovery RECOVER command 8 82 RECOVERY command and database recovery 5 5 RECSEP variable 4 9 8 108 RECSEPCHAR variable 4 9 8 108 redo log GL 15 GL
143. RDER BY SAL FADING UMMY SAL EMPNO 00 The following output results SAL EMPNO 800 7369 950 7900 sum 1750 To calculate the average and maximum salary for the accounting and sales departments enter SQL gt BREAK ON DNAME SKIP 1 SQL gt COMPUTE AVG LABEL Dept Average gt AX LABEL Dept Maximum gt OF SAL ON DNAME SQL gt SELECT DNAME ENAME SAL pI n 2 FROM DEPT EMP 3 WHERE DEPT DEPTNO EMP DEPTNO 4 AND DNAME IN ACCOUNTING SALI 5 ORDER BY DNAME 8 44 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COMPUTE The following output results DNAI ENAME SAL ACCOUNTING CLARK 2450 KING 5000 ILLER 1300 KEKE KKK Fk O O DR Dept Average 2916 66667 Dept Maximum 5000 SALES ALLEN 1600 BLAKE 2850 MARTIN 1250 JAMES 950 TURNER 1500 WARD 1250 KEKE KKK KKK O aa Dept Average 1566 66667 Dept Maximum 2850 9 rows selected To calculate the sum of salaries for departments 10 and 20 without printing the compute label enter SQL gt COLUMN DUMMY NOPRINT SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DUMMY SQL gt BREAK O UMMY SKIP 1 iw SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO DUMMY DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM E
144. RDER BY clause you create meaningful subsets of records in your output You can then add formatting to the subsets within the same BREAK command and add a summary line containing totals averages and so on by specifying the break column in a COMPUTE command For example the following query without BREAK or COMPUTE commands SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL lt 2500 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO produces the following unformatted results DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 CLARK 2450 10 ILLER 1300 20 SMITH 800 20 ADAMS 1100 30 ALLE 1600 30 JAMES 950 30 TURNER 1500 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 9 rows selected To make this report more useful you would use BREAK to establish DEPTNO as the break column Through BREAK you could suppress duplicate values in DEPTNO and place blank lines or begin a new page between departments You could use BREAK in conjunction with COMPUTE to calculate and print summary Formatting Query Results 4 11 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines lines containing the total and or average maximum minimum standard deviation variance or count of rows of salary for each department and for all departments Suppressing Duplicate Values in Break Columns The BREAK command suppresses duplicate values by default in the column or expression you name Thus to suppress the duplicate value
145. SEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO OPERATIONS BOSTON Pisa Document Done Formatting Query Results 4 41 Creating Web Reports The SQLPLUS command in this example contains three layers of nested quotes From the inside out these are a 70 is a quoted HTML attribute value for WIDTH a WIDTH 70 is the quoted text argument for the TABLE option a HTML ON TABLE BORDER 2 is the quoted argument for the MARKUP option The nesting of quotes may be different in some operating systems or program scripting languages Creating Embedded Web Reports The SQLPLUS MARKUP command allows you to start a SQL Plus session in Internet enabled mode rather than using the SET MARKUP command interactively This allows you to run a SQL Plus session embedded inside a Common Gateway Interface CGI script or an operating system command file A file created in this way can be displayed directly in a web browser You can use any script language which is supported by your web server such as a shell script a Windows command file batch file Java JavaScript or a Perl file You can use this embedded approach to produce HTML web outputs that use existing SQL Plus scripts unchanged It provides an easy way to provide dynamically created web based reports Example 4 28 Creating a Standalone Web Report from a CGI Script You can use a CGI script to run SQL Plus and so produce a web report from a S
146. SKIP PAGE ON JOB gt SKIP 1 ON SAL SKIP 1 the first ON clause represents the outermost break in this case ON DEPTNO and the last ON clause represents the innermost break in this case ON SAL SQL Plus searches each row of output for the specified break s starting with the outermost break and proceeding in the order you enter the clauses to the innermost In the example SQL Plus searches for a change in the value of DEPTNO then JOB then SAL Next SQL Plus executes actions beginning with the action specified for the innermost break and proceeding in reverse order toward the outer most break in this case from SKIP 1 for ON SAL toward SKIP PAGE for ON DEPTNO SQL Plus executes each action up to and including the action specified for the first occurring break encountered in the ini tial search If for example in a given row the value of JOB changes but the val ues of DEPTNO and SAL remain the same SQL Plus skips two lines before printing the row one as a result of SKIP 1 in the ON SAL clause and one as a result of SKIP 1 in the ON JOB clause Whenever you use ON column you should also use an ORDER BY clause in the SQL SELECT command Typically the columns used in the BREAK command should appear in the same order in the ORDER BY clause although all columns specified in the ORDER BY clause need not appear in the BREAK command This prevents breaks from occur ring at meaningless points in the report
147. SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Release 8 1 7 September 2000 Part No A82950 01 ORACLE SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Release 8 1 7 Part No A82950 01 Copyright 1996 2000 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved Primary Author Simon Watt Contributors Alison Goggin Alison Holloway Christopher Jones Anita Lam Luan Nim The Programs which include both the software and documentation contain proprietary information of Oracle Corporation they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are also protected by copyright patent and other intellectual and industrial property laws Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of the Programs is prohibited The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice If you find any problems in the documentation please report them to us in writing Oracle Corporation does not warrant that this document is error free Except as may be expressly permitted in your license agreement for these Programs no part of these Programs may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Oracle Corporation If the Programs are delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing or using the programs on behalf of the U S Government the following notice is applicable Restricted Rights Notice Programs delivered subj
148. SQL Plus command PAUSE For example you might include the following lines in a command file PROMPT Before continuing make sure you have your account card PAUSE Press RETURN to continue Clearing the Screen If you want to clear the screen before displaying a report or at any other time include the SQL Plus CLEAR command with its SCREEN clause at the appropriate point in your command file using the following format CLEAR SCREEN Before continuing to the next section reset all columns to their original formats and headings by entering the following command SQL gt CLEAR COLUMNS Using Bind Variables Suppose that you want to be able to display the variables you use in your PL SQL subprograms in SQL Plus or use the same variables in multiple subprograms If you declare a variable in a PL SQL subprogram you cannot display that variable in SQL Plus Use a bind variable in PL SQL to access the variable from SQL Plus Bind variables are variables you create in SQL Plus and then reference in PL SQL If you create a bind variable in SQL Plus you can use the variable as you would a declared variable in your PL SQL subprogram and then access the variable from SQL Plus You can use bind variables for such things as storing return codes or debugging your PL SQL subprograms Manipulating Commands 3 31 Using Bind Variables Because bind variables are recognized by SQL Plus you can display their valu
149. STEMP already exists SQL Plus replaces the table and its contents The columns in WESTEMP have the same names as the columns in the source table EMP SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER HO TO JOHN CHROME WEST gt REPLACE WES FMP gt USING SELECT FROM EMP The following command copies selected records from EMP to the database to which SQL Plus is connected SQL Plus creates SALESMEN through the copy SQL Plus copies only the columns EMPNO and ENAME and at the destination names them EMPNO and SALESMAN SQL gt COPY FROM SCOIT TIGER HO gt CREATE SALESMEN EMPNO SALESMAN gt USING SELECT EMPNO ENAME FROM EMP gt WHERE JOB SALESMAN Command Reference 8 51 DEFINE DEFINE Purpose Specifies a user variable and assigns it a CHAR value or lists the value and variable type of a single variable or all variables Syntax DEF INE variable variable text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause variable Represents the user variable whose value you wish to assign or list text Represents the CHAR value you wish to assign to variable Enclose text in single quotes if it contains punctuation or blanks variable text Defines names a user variable and assigns it a CHAR value Enter DEFINE followe
150. TI TLE USER Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause system_variable Represents any system variable set by the SET command Lists the settings of all SHOW options except ERRORS in alphabetical order BTI TLE Shows the current BTITLE definition Command Reference 8 123 SHOW ERR ORS FUNCTION PROCEDURE PACKAGE PACKAGE BODY TRIGGER VIEW TYPE TYPE BODY schema name Shows the compilation errors of a stored procedure includes stored functions procedures and packages After you use the CREATE com mand to create a stored procedure a message is displayed if the stored procedure has any compilation errors To see the errors you use SHOW ERRORS When you specify SHOW ERRORS with no arguments SQL Plus shows compilation errors for the most recently created or altered stored procedure When you specify the type function procedure package package body trigger view type or type body and the name of the PL SQL stored procedure SQL Plus shows errors for that stored proce dure For more information on compilation errors see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference schema contains the named object If you omit schema SHOW ERRORS assumes the object is located in your current schema SHOW ERRORS output displays the line and column number of the error LINE COL as well as the error itself ERROR LINE COL and ERROR have default widths of 8 and 65 respec
151. TT ANALYST 20 ADAMS CLERK 20 FORD ANALYST 20 COMPATIBILITY To run a command file SALARY SQL created with Oracle7 enter SQL gt SET COMPATIBILITY V7 SQL gt START SALARY After running the file reset compatibility to V8 to run command files created with Oracle8i SQL gt SET COMPATIBILITY V8 Alternatively you can add the command SET COMPATIBILITY V7 to the beginning of the command file and reset COMPATIBILITY to V8 at the end of the file DESCRIBE To describe the object emp_object to a depth of two levels and indent the output while also displaying line numbers first describe the object as follows 8 114 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET ESCRIB SQL gt D emp_object The following output results ame Null Type EMPLOYEE ECUR_PERSON NAME VARCHAR2 20 ADDR ECUR_ADDRESS ADDR1 ECUR_ADDRESS1 DOB DATE GENDER VARCHAR2 10 DEP ECUR_DEPARTMENT DEPTNO UMBER DEPT_NAME VARCHAR2 20 LOCATIO VARCHAR2 20 START_DATE DATE POSITIO VARCHAR2 1 SAL RECUR_SALARY ANNUAL_SAL UMBER 10 2 EMP_TYPE VARCHAR2 1 CO UMBER 10 2 PENALTY _RATE UMBER 5 2 To format emp_object so that the output displays with indentation and line numbers use the SET DESCRIBE command as follows SQL gt SI ET DI ESC
152. UM DECODE DEPTNO 10 SAL 0 DEPARTMENT 10 SUM DECODE DEPTNO 20 SAL 0 DEPARTMENT 20 SUM DECODE DEPTNO 30 SAL 0 DEPARTMENT 30 SUM SAL TOTAL BY JOB FROM EMP GROUP BY JOB 8 88 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference REPFOOTER REPFOOTER Purpose Places and formats a specified report footer at the bottom of each report or lists the current REPFOOTER definition Syntax REPF OOTER PAGE printspec text variable ON OFF Terms and Clauses Refer to the REPHEADER command for additional information on terms and clauses in the REPFOOTER command syntax Enter REPFOOTER with no clauses to list the current REPFOOTER definition Usage Notes If you do not enter a printspec clause before the text or variables REPFOOTER left justifies the text or variables You can use any number of constants and variables in a printspec SQL Plus displays the constants and variables in the order you specify them positioning and formatting each constant or variable as specified by the printspec clauses that precede it Note If SET EMBEDDED is ON the report footer is suppressed Example To define END EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT as a report footer on a separate page and to center it enter SQL gt REPFOOTER PAGE CENTER END EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT SQL gt TTITLE RIGHT Page FORMAT 999 SOQL PNO SQL
153. What You Need to Run SQL Plus To run SQL Plus you need hardware software operating system specific information a username and password and access to one or more tables Hardware and Software Oracle and SQL Plus can run on many different kinds of computers Your computer s operating system manages the computer s resources and mediates between the computer hardware and programs such as SQL Plus Different computers use different operating systems For information about your computer s operating system see the documentation provided with the computer Before you can begin using SQL Plus both Oracle and SQL Plus must be installed on your computer Note that in order to take full advantage of the enhancements in SQL Plus Release 8 1 7 you must have Oracle8i Release 8 1 7 For a list of SQL Plus Release 8 1 7 enhancements see Appendix B If you have multiple users on your computer your organization should have a Database Administrator called a DBA who supervises the use of Oracle The DBA is responsible for installing Oracle and SQL Plus on your system If you are acting as DBA see the instructions for installing Oracle and SQL Plus in the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Information Specific to Your Operating System A few aspects of Oracle and SQL Plus differ from one type of host computer and operating system to another These topics are discussed in the Oracle installation and
154. a they only retrieve data Queries are often considered to be DML statements Glossary 17 Glossary 18 query results The data retrieved by a query RAW datatype A standard Oracle datatype a RAW data column may contain data in any form including binary You can use RAW columns for storing binary non character data RDBMS Relational Database Management System An Oracle7 and earlier term Refers to the software used to create and maintain the system as well as the actual data stored in the database See also Relational Database Management System RDBMS Server and Oracle Server record A synonym for row one row of data in a database table having values for one or more columns recover The Oracle process of restoring all or part of a database from specified redo log files redo log A sequential log of all changes made to the data The redo log is written and used in the event of a failure that prevents changes from being written to disk The redo log consists of two or more redo log files redo log file A file containing records of all changes made to the database These files are used for recovery purposes See also redo log Relational Database Management System RDBMS An Oracle7 and earlier term A computer program designed to store and retrieve shared data In a relational system data is stored in tables consisting of one or more rows each containing the same set of columns Oracle is a relational da
155. a SQL Command into Separate Lines You can divide your SQL command into separate lines at any points you wish as long as individual words are not split between lines Thus you can enter the query you entered in Example 2 3 on one line SQL gt SELECT EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL FROM EMP WHERE SAL lt 2500 You can also enter the query on several lines SQL gt SELECT 2 EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL 3 FROM EMP 4 WHERE SAL lt 1500 In this Guide you will find most SQL commands divided into clauses one clause on each line In Example 2 3 for instance the SELECT and FROM clauses were placed on separate lines Many people find this clearly visible structure helpful but you may choose whatever line division makes commands most readable to you Ending aSQL Command You can end a SQL command in one of three ways witha semicolon a with a slash ona line by itself Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 7 Entering and Executing Commands a witha blank line A semicolon tells SQL Plus that you want to run the command Type the semicolon at the end of the last line of the command as shown in Example 2 3 and press Return SQL Plus will process the command and store it in the SQL buffer see the section The SQL Buffer below for details If you mistakenly press Return before typing the semicolon SQL Plus will prompt you with a line number fo
156. a new one reset the column s format with COLUMN colname CLEAR or exit from SQL Plus If the WRAP variable of the SET command is set to ON its default value the employee names wrap to the next line after the fourth character as shown in Example 4 5 If WRAP is set to OFF the names are truncated cut off after the fourth character The system variable WRAP controls all columns you can override the setting of WRAP for a given column through the WRAPPED WORD_WRAPPED and TRUNCATED clauses of the COLUMN command See the COLUMN command in Formatting Query Results 4 7 Formatting Columns Chapter 8 for more information on these clauses You will use the WORD_ WRAPPED clause of COLUMN later in this chapter Note The column heading is truncated regardless of the setting of WRAP or any COLUMN command clauses Now return the column to its previous format SQL gt COLUMN ENAME FORMAT A10 Copying Column Display Attributes When you want to give more than one column the same display attributes you can reduce the length of the commands you must enter by using the LIKE clause of the COLUMN command The LIKE clause tells SQL Plus to copy the display attributes of a previously defined column to the new column except for changes made by other clauses in the same command Example 4 6 Copying a Column s Display Attributes To give the column COMM the same display attributes you gave to SAL bu
157. ackages GL 16 page GL 16 PAGE clause 8 91 page number including in titles 4 14 4 27 pages changing length 4 31 8 108 default dimensions 4 31 matching dimensions to screen or paper size 4 31 setting dimensions 4 31 PAGESIZE variable 2 7 4 32 8 108 PAGESIZEclause in LOGIN SQL 3 19 PARALLEL clause 8 134 parallel server GL 16 Index 13 parameter GL 16 width GL 25 parameter file GL 16 parameter files INIT ORA files specifying alternate 8 133 parameters 3 27 8 5 8 131 PARAMETERS clause 8 124 password 1 6 GL 17 changing with the PASSWORD command 8 77 in CONNECT command 6 2 6 3 8 47 in COPY command 6 5 6 7 6 9 in SQLPLUS command 2 3 6 4 7 9 PASSWORD command 8 47 8 77 disabling E 5 paths creating Installation and User s Guide 8 51 PAUSE command 3 31 8 78 in LOGIN SQL 3 19 PAUSE variable 2 17 8 108 performance of SQL statements 3 36 performance over dial up lines 8 111 Period terminating PL SQL blocks 8 102 period terminating PL SQL blocks 2 10 PLAN_TABLE table 3 37 PL SQL 1 2 2 10 GL 17 blocks PL SQL 2 10 executing 8 66 formatting output in SQL Plus 8 146 listing definitions 2 17 mode in SQL Plus 2 8 within SOL commands 2 8 PLUSTRACE role 3 37 PNO clause 8 125 pound sign 8 35 PREFORMAT 7 7 PREFORMAT clause 7 7 print spooling GL 20 PRINT clause 8 36 PRINT command 8 79 printing bind variables automatically 8 101 Index 14 REFCURSO
158. acle com SALES htm1 gt SALES lt a gt lt td gt lt td gt CHICAGO lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt a href http oracle com OPERATIONS html gt OPERATIONS lt a gt lt td gt lt td gt BOSTON lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt p gt lt body gt lt htm1 gt we ESEARCH lt a gt lt td gt Example 4 27 Creating a Standalone Web Report using the SQLPLUS command Enter the following command at the operating system prompt SQLPLUS S M HTML ON TABLE BORDER 2 scott tiger dept sql gt dept html where dept sql contains SELECT DEPTNO DNAME LOC FROM DEPT ORDER BY DEPTNO EXIT This example starts SOL Plus with user scott sets HTML ON sets a BORDER attribute for TABLE and runs the script dept sql The output from dept sql is a complete web page which is this case has been redirected to the file dept html using the gt operating system command It could be sent to a web browser if SQL Plus was called in a web server CGI script See Creating a Standalone Web Report from a CGI Script for information about calling SQL Plus from a CGI script Start your web browser and enter the appropriate URL to open dept html 3 SQL Plus Report Netscape Bei File Edit View Go Communicator Help Back Forward Reload Home Search Netscape Print Security Stop PN Loc DNAME 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RE
159. act format of the file extension and the location of the file are system dependent See the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system or your DBA for more information Note If the table is created incorrectly all users other than SYSTEM will see a warning when connecting to Oracle that the PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE information is not loaded E 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table Table Structure The PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table consists of the following columns PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUMERIC_VALUE CHAR VALUE DATE_VALUE LONG_VALUE NOT NULL CHAR 30 CHAR 30 CHAR 240 CHAR 240 NUMBER 15 2 CHAR 240 DATE LONG Description and Use of Columns Refer to the following list for the descriptions and use of each column in the PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table Product Userid Attribute Must contain the product name in this case SQL Plus You cannot enter wildcards or NULL in this column Also notice that the product name SQL Plus must be specified in mixed case as shown in order to be recognized Must contain the username in uppercase of the user for whom you wish to disable the command To disable the command for more than one user use SQL wild cards or make multiple entries Thus all of the following entries are valid a SCOTT a CLASS1 a CLASS all
160. adings specified for DEPTNO ENAME and SAL enter the following commands SQL gt COLUMN DEPTNO HEADING Department SQL gt COLUMN ENAME HEADING Employee SQL gt COLUMN SAL HEADING Salary SQL gt COLUMN CQA HEADING Commission SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL COMM 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE JOB SALESMAN SQL Plus displays the following output Department Employee Salary Commission 30 ALLEN 1600 300 30 WARD 1250 500 4 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Formatting Columns 30 MARTIN 1250 1400 30 TURNER 1500 0 Note The new headings will remain in effect until you enter different headings reset each column s format or exit from SOL Plus To change a column heading to two or more words enclose the new heading in single or double quotation marks when you enter the COLUMN command To display a column heading on more than one line use a vertical bar where you want to begin a new line You can use a character other than a vertical bar by changing the setting of the HEADSEP variable of the SET command See the SET command in Chapter 8 for more information Example 4 2 Splitting a Column Heading To give the column ENAME the heading EMPLOYEE NAME and to split the new heading onto two lines enter SQL gt COLUMN ENAME HEADING Employee Name Now rerun the query with the slash
161. ae r a Von Sat as slave Ga cus lotus ta as A crempuetaceremeueess 3 2 Listing the Buffer Contents ssrin iannis e asea a cova ai ini Eear Ea aaa 3 3 Editing the C rrent LiN kissinessasisan ni s a iss 3 3 Adding a New Lin srira ae Ea ENE aE Eaa E e Oa a aA r SR EE A BEE E EEEa 3 5 Appending Text toa Linens ioien s a E S a E Sa SE e S Eii 3 6 Deleting EINES Annn esne aT EA eE ees Pese o woe E EAE RE a A ER 3 7 Editing Commands with a System Editor cccccceccccsssesesescscssesesescsesesesesescseseecscsssnsnesecees 3 7 Saving Commands for Later Use ccscscsc ccliseeecesiieedsesestsacesevevesesesaveveunsviatavdesuveavenadobsetesmsavetsverariy 3 8 Storing Commands in Command Files 00 cece cece seeseesesenessssesesesesesescsesesesesssnsnesecees 3 8 Placing Comments in Command Files ccccecccc ce cceeeeecececeeseseecssseesesesssesseeseseessseseees 3 11 Retrieving Command Files ccc oeiee oe ae ea A E p E eE E E 3 15 Running Command Filesi sristi oeei aeaa eiea E R a E Ta 3 16 Nesting Command Files es sa e ae i eea Ae Ee eea Sia aee Teide ea ae DETA 3 17 Modifying Command FileS pe an epea Eaa aE a apaia EE RA E EAE Epia aen 3 18 Exiting from a Command File with a Return Code s ssssssssissesssssiesisiesssssesiesissesssessesnenne 3 18 Setting Up Your SQL Plus Environment ssssssssisrissesssssiesiestesessseniestesensnenienienennresnesnenne 3 19 Storing and Restoring SQL Plus System Variables ssssssssessessssssssi
162. age 8 102 columns SET TRUNCATE SET WRAP Controls whether SQL Plus truncates a SELECTed on page 8 112 row if it is too long for the current line width SHOW LABEL none Obsolete TTITLE TTITLE Places and formats a title at the top of each report old form on page 8 140 page or lists the current TTITLE definition F 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DOCUMENT BTITLE old form Purpose Displays a title at the bottom of each report page Syntax BII TLE text Usage Notes The old form of BTITLE offers formatting features more limited than those of the new form but provides compatibility with UFI a predecessor of SOL Plus The old form defines the bottom title as an empty line followed by a line with centered text Refer to TTITLE old form in this appendix for more details COLUMN DEFAULT Purpose Resets the display attributes for a given column to default values Syntax COL UMN column expr DEF AULT Usage Notes Has the same effect as COLUMN CLEAR DOCUMENT Purpose Begins a block of documentation in a command file Syntax DOC UMENT Obsolete SQL Plus Commands F 3 NEWPAGE NEWPAGE Usage Notes For information on the current method of inserting comments in a command file refer to the section Placing Comments in Command Files under Saving Commands for Later Use in Chapter 3 and to the REMARK command in the Command Reference in Chapter 8 After you type DOCUMENT an
163. als who have a basic understanding of the SQL database language If you do not have any familiarity with this database tool you should refer to the Oracle8i SQL Reference If you plan to use the PL SQL database language in conjunction with SQL Plus refer to the PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for information on using PL SQL This manual is divided into two parts containing a total of eight chapters six appendices and a glossary of SQL Plus related terms Part 1 Understanding SQL Plus contains the first six chapters and Part 2 Reference contains the remaining two chapters PART I Understanding SQL Plus Chapter 1 Introduction is an overview of SQL Plus with instructions on using this Guide and information on what you need to run SQL Plus Chapter 2 Learning SQL Plus Basics explains how to start SQL Plus and enter and execute commands You learn by following step by step examples using sample tables Chapter 3 Manipulating Commands uses further examples to help you learn to edit commands save them for later use and write interactive commands Chapter 4 Formatting Query Results uses examples to explain how you can format columns clarify your reports with spacing and summary lines define page dimensions and titles store and print query results and output query results to the web Chapter 5 Database Administration is intended for use by DBAs It covers basic database administration features in SQL Plus Chapt
164. an set PAGESIZE to zero to suppress all headings page breaks titles the initial blank line and other formatting information PAU SE ON OFF text Allows you to control scrolling of your terminal when running reports ON causes SQL Plus to pause at the beginning of each page of report output You must press Return after each pause The text you enter specifies the text to be displayed each time SQL Plus pauses If you enter multiple words you must enclose text in single quotes You can embed terminal dependent escape sequences in the PAUSE command These sequences allow you to create inverse video messages or other effects on terminals that support such characteristics RECSEP WR APPED EA CH OFF RECSEPCHAR _ c Display or print record separators A record separator consists of a sin gle line of the RECSEPCHAR record separating character repeated LINESIZE times RECSEPCHAR defines the record separating character A single space is the default RECSEP tells SQL Plus where to make the record separation For exam ple if you set RECSEP to WRAPPED SQL Plus prints a record separa tor only after wrapped lines If you set RECSEP to EACH SQL Plus prints a record separator following every row If you set RECSEP to OFF SQL Plus does not print a record separator SERVEROUT PUT ON OFF SIZE n FOR MAT 8 108 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET WRA PPED WOR D WRAPPED TRU NCATED Controls whether to
165. and If no file suffix file extension is speci fied the suffix defined by the SET SUFFIX command is used The default suffix is sql See the START command in Chapter 8 for more information Setting Up the Site Profile SQL Plus supports a Site Profile a SQL Plus command file created by the database administrator This file is generally named GLOGIN with an extension of SQL SQL Plus executes this command file whenever any user starts SQL Plus and SQL Plus establishes the Oracle connection The Site Profile allows the DBA to set up SQL Plus environment defaults for all users at a particular site users cannot directly access the Site Profile The default name and location of the Site Profile depend on your system Site Profiles are described in more detail in the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Setting Up the User Profile SQL Plus also supports a User Profile executed after the Site Profile SQL Plus searches for a file named LOGIN with the extension SQL in your current directory If SQL Plus does not find the file there SQL Plus will search a system dependent path to find the file Some operating systems may not support this path search Receiving a Return Code If you fail to log in successfully to SQL Plus because your username or password is invalid or some other error SQL Plus will return an error status equivalent to an 7 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Starting SQL P l
166. and briefly describes SQL Plus commands precedes the individual command descriptions You can continue a long SQL Plus command by typing a hyphen at the end of the line and pressing Return If you wish you can type a space before typing the hyphen SQL Plus displays a right angle bracket gt as a prompt for each additional line You do not need to end a SQL Plus command with a semicolon When you finish entering the command you can just press Return If you wish however you can enter a semicolon at the end of a SQL Plus command Command Reference 8 1 SQL Plus Command Summary SQL Plus Command Summary Command Page Description 8 5 Runs the specified command file ee 8 7 Runs the specified command file which is expected to be in the same directory as the script that called it 7 8 9 Executes the SQL command or PL SQL block ACCEPT 8 10 Reads a line of input and stores it in a given user variable APPEND 8 12 Adds specified text to the end of the current line in the buffer ARCHIVE LOG 8 13 Starts or stops the automatic archiving of online redo log files manually explicitly archives specified redo log files or displays information about redo log files ATTRIBUTE 8 17 Specifies display characteristics for a given attribute of an Object Type column and lists the current display characteristics for a single attribute or all attributes BREAK 8 19 Specifies where and how f
167. and files 3 18 NOLIST clause 8 69 retrieving command files 3 15 8 69 GLOGIN SQL 3 19 3 38 3 41 7 10 See also LOGIN SQL GRANT command E 2 disabling E 6 H HEAD clause 7 4 HEAD option 7 4 headers aligning elements 4 24 displaying at top of page 8 91 displaying system maintained values 8 91 setting at the start of reports 4 22 suppressing 4 24 heading GL 11 HEADING clause 4 2 8 35 HEADING variable 8 105 headings aligning elements 8 92 column headings 8 105 formatting elements 8 92 indenting 8 92 listing current definition 8 93 suppressing definition 8 92 HEADSEP variable 8 106 Index 10 use in COLUMN command 4 3 8 35 HELP command 8 70 help online 2 5 7 12 8 70 HIDE clause 8 11 HOST command 2 16 8 71 disabling E 5 listing command file names with 3 9 host computer GL 11 host operating system command prompt 2 3 editor 3 7 8 64 file loading into buffer 8 69 running commands from SQL Plus 2 16 8 71 HTML 4 38 4 42 GL 12 clause 7 4 entities 4 47 option 7 4 spooling to file 7 6 tag 4 38 hyphen continuing a long SQL Plus command 2 12 8 1 IMMEDIATE mode 8 128 infinity sign 8 35 initialization parameters displaying 8 124 INIT ORA file parameter file 8 133 input accepting Return 3 31 8 78 accepting values from the user 3 28 8 10 INPUT command 3 2 3 5 8 73 entering several lines 8 73 using with SAVE to create command files 3
168. and only suppresses the printing of the column header itself Command Reference 8 105 SET HEADS EP 1L c ON OFF Defines the character you enter as the heading separator character The heading separator character cannot be alphanumeric or white space You can use the heading separator character in the COLUMN com mand and in the old forms of BTITLE and TTITLE to divide a column heading or title onto more than one line ON or OFF turns heading sep aration on or off When heading separation is OFF SOL Plus prints a heading separator character like any other character ON changes the value of c back to the default INSTANCE instance_path LOCAL Changes the default instance for your session to the specified instance path Using the SET INSTANCE command does not connect to a data base The default instance is used for commands when no instance is specified Any commands preceding the first use of SET INSTANCE communi cate with the default instance To reset the instance to the default value for your operating system you can either enter SET INSTANCE with no instance_path or SET INSTANCE LOCAL See your operating system specific Oracle docu mentation for a description of how to set the initial default instance Note you can only change the instance when you are not currently con nected to any instance That is you must first make sure that you have disconnected from the current instance then set or change the instance and
169. ange you wish to recover For example if you want to restore your database up to the transaction with an SCN of 9 you would specify UNTIL CHANGE 10 UNTIL TIME date Specifies an incomplete time based recovery Use single quotes and the following format YYYY MM DD HH24 MI SS Command Reference 8 83 RECOVER USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE Specifies that a backup of the control file be used instead of the current control file STANDBY DATAFILE datafilename DATAFILE datafilename Reconstructs a lost or damaged datafile in the standby database using archived redo log files copied from the primary database and a control file STANDBY TABLESPACE tablespace TABLESPACE tablespace Reconstructs a lost or damaged tablespace in the standby database using archived redo log files copied from the primary database and a control file UNTIL CONSISTENT WITH CONTROLFILE Specifies that the recovery of an old standby datafile or tablespace uses the current standby database control file TABLESPACE tablespace Recovers a particular tablespace tablespace is the name of a tablespace in the current database You may recover up to 16 tablespaces in one statement DATAFILE datafilename Recovers a particular datafile You can specify any number of datafiles LOGFILE filename Continues media recovery by applying the specified redo log file CONTINUE DEFAULT Continues multi instance recovery after it has been interr
170. ast line LAST Lists the last line Enter LIST with no clauses to list all lines Usage Notes The last line listed becomes the new current line marked by an asterisk Example To list the contents of the buffer enter SQL gt LIST You will see a listing of all lines in the buffer similar to the following example 1 SELECT ENAME DEPTNO JOB 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE JOB CLERK 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO The asterisk indicates that line 4 is the current line Command Reference 8 75 LIST To list the second line only enter SQL gt LIST 2 You will then see this 2 FROM EMP To list the current line now line 2 to the last line enter SQL gt LIST LAST You will then see this 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE JOB CLERK 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO 8 76 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PASSWORD PASSWORD Purpose Allows you to change a password without echoing it on an input device Syntax PASSW ORD username Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the clause or term username Specifies the user If you do not specify a username username defaults to the current user Usage Notes To change the password of another user you must have been granted the appropriate privilege For more information about changing your password see the CONNECT command in this chapter Example Suppose you are lo
171. at sign command except that it looks for the specified command file in the same path as the command file from which it was called Syntax file_name ext Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause file_name ext Represents the nested command file you wish to run If you omit ext SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see the SUFFIX vari able of the SET command in this chapter When you enter file_name ext from within a command file SQL Plus runs file_name ext from the same directory as the command file When you enter file_name ext interactively SQL Plus runs file_name ext from the current working directory If SQL Plus does not find such a file SQL Plus searches a system dependent path to find the file Some operating systems may not support the path search See the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for specific information related to your operating system environment Usage Notes You can include in a command file any command you would normally enter interactively typically SQL or SQL Plus commands An EXIT or QUIT command used in a command file terminates SQL Plus The command functions similarly to START If the START command is disabled this will also disable the command For more information see the START command later in this chapter SQL
172. ated an Oracle error SQL Plus sets the buffer s current line to the line containing the error so that you can make modifications To reenter an entire line you can type the line number followed by the new contents of the line If you specify a line number larger than the number of lines in the buffer and follow the number with text SOL Plus adds the text in a new line at the end of the buffer If you specify zero 0 for the line number and follow the zero with text SQL Plus inserts the line at the beginning of the buffer that line becomes line 1 Examples Assume the current line of the buffer contains the following text 4 WHERE JOB IS IN CLERK SECRETARY RECEPTIONIST Enter the following command SQL gt C RECEPTIONIST GUARD The text in the buffer changes as follows 4 WHERE JOB IS IN CLERK SECRETARY GUARD Or enter the following command SQL gt C CLERK CLERK The original line changes to 4 WHERE JOB IS IN CLERK Or enter the following command SQL gt C COOK BUTLER The original line changes to 4 WHERE JOB IS IN COOK BUTLER You can replace the contents of an entire line using the line number This entry SQL gt 2 FROM EMP el causes the second line of the buffer to be r
173. atements SALES BLAKE 2850 MANAGER SALES MARTIN 1250 SALESMAN SALES JAMES 950 CLERK SALES TURNER 1500 SALESMAN SALES WARD 1250 SALESMAN 14 rows selected Execution Plan 0 SELECT STATEMENT Opt imizer CHOOSE 1 0 RGE JOI 2 1 SORT JOIN 3 2 ABLE ACCESS FULL OF DEPT 4 Al SORT JOIN 5 4 ABLE ACCESS FULL OF EMP Statistics 148 recursive calls 4 db block gets 24 consistent gets 6 physical reads 43 redo size 591 bytes sent via Net8 to client 256 bytes received via Net8 from client 3 Net8 roundtrips to from client 2 sort memory 0 sort disk 14 rows processed Note Your output may vary depending on the version of the server to which you are connected and the configuration of the server Example 3 22 Tracing Statements Without Displaying Query Data To trace the same statement without displaying the query data SQL gt SET AUTOTRACE TRACEONLY SQL gt Execution Plan Manipulating Commands 3 39 Tracing Statements 0 SELECT STATEMENT Optimizer CHOOSE 1 0 ERGE JOI 2 1 SORT JOIN 3 2 ABLE ACCESS FULL OF DEPT 4 1 SORT JOIN 5 4 ABLE ACCESS FULL OF EMP Statistics recursive calls db block gets consistent gets physical reads redo size
174. atements using the EMP table It also includes the actions if any that are audited for each schema object datatype 1 A standard form of data The Oracle datatypes are CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 NVARCHAR2 DATE NUMBER LONG CLOB NCLOB RAW and LONG RAW however the Oracle database server recognizes and converts other standard datatypes 2 A named set of fixed attributes that can be associated with an item as a property Data typing provides a way to define the behavior of data DATE datatype A standard Oracle datatype used to store date and time data Standard date format is DD MMM YY as in 23 NOV 98 A DATE column may contain a date and time between January 1 4712 BC to December 31 9999 AD DBA See database administrator DBA DCL See Data Control Language DCL DDL See Data Definition Language DDL default A clause or option value that SQL Plus uses if you do not specify an alternative default database See local database directory On some operating systems a named storage space for a group of files It is actually one file that lists a set of files on a particular device dismounted database A database that is not mounted by any instance and thus cannot be opened and is not currently available for use display format See format Glossary 9 Glossary 10 display width The number of characters or spaces allowed to display the values for an output field DML See Data Manipulation Languag
175. ave disabled automatic archiving the last three lines might look like Oldest online log sequence 222 Next log sequence to archive 222 Current log sequence 225 If you are using NOARCHIVELOG mode the next log sequence to archive line is suppressed Command Reference 8 13 ARCHIVE LOG The log sequence increments every time the Log Writer begins to write to another redo log file group it does not indicate the number of logs being used Every time an online redo log file group is reused the con tents are assigned a new log sequence number STOP Disables automatic archival If the instance is still in ARCHIVELOG mode and all redo log file groups fill database operation is suspended until a redo log file is archived for example until you enter the com mand ARCHIVE LOG NEXT or ARCHIVE LOG ALL START Enables automatic archiving Starts the background process ARCH which performs automatic archiving as required If ARCH is started and a filename is supplied the filename becomes the new default archive destination ARCH automatically starts on instance startup if the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_START is set to TRUE NEXT Manually archives the next online redo log file group that has been filled but not yet archived Manually archives all filled but not yet archived online redo log file groups integer Causes archival of the online redo log file group with log sequence number n You can specify any redo log
176. ave special meaning in SQL Plus Table 2 1 SQL Plus Special Keys and their Functions lists these keys See your Oracle installation and user s manual s for your operating system to learn which physical key performs each function on the keyboard commonly used with your host computer Note A SQL Plus key may perform different functions when pressed in other products or the operating system Fill in each blank in Table 2 1 with the name of the corresponding keyboard key Then locate each key on your keyboard Table 2 1 SQL Plus Special Keys and their Functions SQL Plus Key Name Keyboard Key Name Function Return ee End of a line of input Backspace Move cursor left one character to correct an error Pause Suspend program operation and display of output Resume Resume program operation and output Pause Cancel Halt program operation return to the SQL Plus command prompt Interrupt Exit SQL Plus and return to the host operating system 2 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Getting Started Starting SQL Plus Now that you have identified important keys on your keyboard you are ready to start SOL Plus Example 2 1 Starting SQL Plus This example shows you how to start SQL Plus Follow the steps shown 1 2 Make sure that Oracle has been installed on your computer Turn on your computer if it is off and log on to the host operating system if required If you are a
177. ble table alias A temporary substitute name for a table defined in a query and only good during that query If used an alias is set in the FROM clause of a SELECT statement and may appear in the SELECT list See also alias text editor A program run under your host computer s operating system that you use to create and edit host system files and SQL Plus command files containing SQL commands SOL Plus commands and or PL SQL blocks Glossary 23 Glossary 24 timer An internal storage area created by the TIMING command title One or more lines that appears at the top or bottom of each report page You establish and format titles through the TTITLE and BTITLE commands transaction A logical unit of work that comprises one or more SQL statements executed by a single user According to the ANSI ISO SQL standard with which Oracle is compatible a transaction begins with the user s first executable SQL statement A transaction ends when it is explicitly committed or rolled back by the user truncate To discard or lose one or more characters from the beginning or end of a value whether intentionally or unintentionally type A column contains information in one of four types character date number or long The operations users can perform on the contents of a column depend on the type of information it contains See also format USERID A command line argument that allows you to specify your Oracle username and pass
178. can be sup pressed by using a NOPRINT column first in the SELECT statement When you compute a function of the first column in the SELECT state ment ON REPORT or ON ROW then the computed value appears in the first column and the label is not displayed To see the label select a dummy column first in the SELECT list OF expr column alias In the OF clause you can refer to an expression or function reference in the SELECT statement by placing the expression or function reference in double quotes Column names and aliases do not need quotes ON expr column alias REPORT ROW Specifies the event SQL Plus will use as a break column cannot have a table or view appended to it To achieve this you can alias the column in the SQL statement COMPUTE prints the computed value and 8 42 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COMPUTE restarts the computation when the event occurs that is when the value of the expression changes a new ROW is fetched or the end of the report is reached If multiple COMPUTE commands reference the same column in the ON clause only the last COMPUTE command applies To reference a SQL SELECT expression or function reference in an ON clause place the expression or function reference in quotes Column names and aliases do not need quotes Enter COMPUTE without clauses to list all COMPUTE definitions Usage Notes In order for the computations to occur the following conditions must all be true
179. ce HOST HOST Purpose Executes a host operating system command without leaving SQL Plus Syntax HO ST command Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause command Represents a host operating system command Enter HOST without command to display an operating system prompt You can then enter multiple operating system commands For information on returning to SQL Plus refer to the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Note Operating system commands entered from a SQL Plus session using the HOST command do not effect the current SQL Plus session For example setting an operating system environment variable does not effect the current SOL Plus session it only effects SQL Plus sessions started subsequently You can suppress access to the HOST command For more information about suppressing the HOST command see Appendix E Security Usage Notes With some operating systems you can use a VMS UNIX or another character instead of HOST See the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for details You may not have access to the HOST command depending on your operating system See the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system or ask your DBA for more information SQL Plus removes the SQLTERMINATOR a semicolon by default before the HOST command
180. change in a report such as suppressing display of duplicate values for a given column a skipping a line each time a given column value changes printing COMPUTEd figures each time a given column value changes or at the end of the report see also the COMPUTE command Also lists the current BREAK definition Syntax BRE AK ON report_element action action where report_element Requires the following syntax column expr ROW REPORT action Requires the following syntax SKI P n SKI P PAGE NODUP LICATES DUP LICATE n Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause ON column action action When you include action s specifies action s for SQL Plus to take whenever a break occurs in the specified column called the break col umn column cannot have a table or view appended to it To achieve this you can alias the column in the SQL statement A break is one of three events a change in the value of a column or expression the out put of a row or the end of a report When you omit action s BREAK ON column suppresses printing of duplicate values in column and marks a place in the report where SQL Plus will perform the computation you specify in a corresponding COMPUTE command You can specify ON column one or more times If you specify multiple ON clauses as in Command Reference 8 19 BREAK SQL gt BREAK ON DEPTNO
181. clause 4 12 8 19 ON expr clause 8 20 ON REPORT clause 4 19 8 21 ON ROW clause 4 13 8 21 printing grand and sub summaries 4 20 printing summary lines at ends of reports 4 19 removing definition 8 28 SKIP clause 4 13 8 21 SKIP PAGE clause 4 13 4 14 8 22 specifying multiple break columns 4 14 8 19 storing current date in variable for titles 4 30 suppressing duplicate values 4 12 used in conjunction with COMPUTE 4 15 8 19 8 21 8 43 used in conjunction with SET COLSEP 8 103 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 8 147 break definition listing current 4 15 8 22 removing current 4 15 8 28 break group GL 3 break hierarchy GL 3 break order GL 3 break report GL 3 BREAKS clause 4 15 8 28 browser web 4 38 BTITLE clause 8 124 BTITLE command 4 22 8 24 GL 24 aligning title elements 8 141 BOLD clause 8 141 CENTER clause 8 141 COL clause 8 141 FORMAT clause 8 142 indenting titles 8 141 LEFT clause 8 141 OFF clause 8 141 old form F 3 printing blank lines before bottom title 4 25 referencing column value variable 8 36 RIGHT clause 8 141 SKIP clause 8 141 suppressing current definition 8 141 TAB clause 8 141 TTITLE command 8 24 buffer 2 9 GL 4 GL 21 appending text to a line in 3 6 8 12 delete a single line 3 2 delete the current line 3 2 delete the last line 3 2 deleting a range of lines 3 2 8 54 deleting a single line 8 54 deleting alllines 3 2 8 28 8 54 deleting lines fr
182. cond space becomes the first appended character To append a semicolon to the line enter SQL gt APPEND SQL Plus appends the first semicolon to the line and interprets the second as the terminator for the APPEND command 8 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ARCHIVE LOG ARCHIVE LOG Purpose Starts or stops automatic archiving of online redo log files manually explicitly archives specified redo log files or displays information about redo log files Syntax ARCHIVE LOG LIST STOP START NEXT ALL integer TO destination Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause LIST Requests a display that shows the range of redo log files to be archived the current log file group s sequence number and the current archive destination specified by either the optional command text or by the ini tialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST If you are using both ARCHIVELOG mode and automatic archiving the display might appear like SQL gt ARCHIVE LOG LIST Database log mode Archive Mode Automatic archival Enabled Archive destination vobs oracle dbs arch Oldest online log sequence 221 Next log sequence to archive 222 Current log sequence 222 Since the log sequence number of the current log group and the next log group to archive are the same automatic archival has archived all log groups up to the current one If you are using ARCHIVELOG but h
183. continue lines in long SQL Plus commands The TABLE option to set table WIDTH and BORDER attributes a The COLUMN command to set ENTMAP OFF for the DNAME column to enable the correct formation of HTML hyperlinks This makes sure that any HTML special characters such as quotes and angle brackets are not replaced by their equivalent entities amp quot amp amp amp lt and amp gt a The use of quotes and concatenation characters in the SELECT statement to create hyperlinks by concatenating string and variable elements View the report html source in your web browser or in a text editor to see that the table cells for the Department column contain fully formed hyperlinks as shown lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt Department Report lt title gt lt STYLE type text css gt lt BODY background yellow gt lt STYLE gt lt META Name generator content SQOL Plus 8 1 7 gt lt head gt 4 40 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Creating Web Reports lt body text ff00ff gt lt p gt lt table width 50 border 5 gt lt tr gt lt th gt Department lt th gt lt th gt Location lt th gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt a href http oracle com ACCOUNTING htm1 gt ACCOUNTING lt a gt lt td gt lt td gt NEW YORK lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt a href http oracle com RESEARCH htmL gt lt td gt DALLAS lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt a href http or
184. current definition 4 28 8 141 TAB clause 8 141 tuning 3 36 type column GL 24 qe NDEFINE command 3 22 8 144 and DEFINE command 8 52 NDERLINE variable 4 3 8 112 NTIL CANCEL clause 8 83 NTIL CHANGE clause 8 83 NTIL CONTROLEFILE clause 8 84 NTIL TIME clause 8 83 PDATE command disabling E 6 USER clause 8 125 user profile 3 19 LOGIN SQL 7 10 See also site profile user variables 3 21 GL 24 defining 3 21 8 52 deleting 3 22 8 144 displaying in headers and footers 8 91 U U U U U U Index 21 displaying in titles 8 140 in ACCEPT command 3 28 8 10 listing definition of one 3 21 8 52 listing definitions of all 3 21 8 52 USERID GL 24 username 1 6 GL 23 GL 24 connecting under different 6 2 8 47 in CONNECT command 6 2 6 3 8 47 in COPY command 6 5 6 7 6 9 in SQLPLUS command 2 3 6 4 7 9 userprofile GLOGIN SQL 7 10 USING BACKUP CONTROL FILE clause 8 84 USING clause 6 6 8 51 V V SESSION virtual table 8 99 V SQLAREA virtual table 8 100 VARCHAR columns changing format 4 6 default format 4 6 8 32 VARCHAR datatype GL 24 VARCHARZ2 clause VARIABLE command 8 145 VARCHAR2 columns changing format 4 6 8 32 default format 4 6 VARCHARZ2 datatype GL 25 VARIABLE command 8 145 CHAR clause 8 145 CLOB clause 8 146 NCHAR clause 8 145 NCLOB clause 8 146 NUMBER clause 8 145 REFCURSOR clause 8 146 VARCHAR clause 8 145 variable clause 8 145 variables GL 22 GL
185. current line number SQL PNO is the current page number SQL RELEASE is the current Oracle release number SQL CODFE is the current error code and SQL USER is the current user name Command Reference 8 91 REPHEADER To print one of these values reference the appropriate variable in the report header or footer You can format variable with the FORMAT clause OFF Turns the report header or footer off suppresses its display without affecting its definition COL n Indents to column n of the current line backward if column n has been passed Column in this context means print position not table col umn S KIP n Skips to the start of a new line n times if you omit n one time if you enter zero for n backward to the start of the current line TAB n Skips forward n columns backward if you enter a negative value for n Column in this context means print position not table column LE FT CE NTER R IGHT Left align center and right align data on the current line respectively SQL Plus aligns following data items as a group up to the end of the printspec or the next LEFT CENTER RIGHT or COL command CEN TER and RIGHT use the SET LINESIZE value to calculate the position of the data item that follows BOLD Prints data in bold print SQL Plus represents bold print on your termi nal by repeating the data on three consecutive lines On some operat ing systems SQL Plus may instruct your printer to print bolded
186. cuted multiple times using the same or a different REFCURSOR bind variable SQL gt EXECUTE PL SQL proce src dept_fn dure successfully completed SQL gt PRINT rc DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON Tracing Statements You can automatically get a report on the execution path used by the SQL optimizer and the state ment execution statistics The report is generated after successful SQL DML that is SELECT DELETE UPDATE and INSERT statements It is useful for monitoring and tuning the performance of these statements Controlling the Report You can control the report by setting the AUTOTRACE system variable SET AUTOTRACE OFF No AUTOTRACE report is generated This is the default 3 36 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Tracing Statements SET AUTOTRACE ON EXPLAIN The AUTOTRACE report shows only the optimizer execution path SET AUTOTRACE ON The AUTOTRACE report shows only the SQL STATISTICS statement execution statistics SET AUTOTRACE ON The AUTOTRACE report includes both the optimizer execution path and the SQL statement execution statistics SET AUTOTRACE TRACEONLY Like SET AUTOTRACE ON but suppresses the printing of the user s query output if any To use this feature you must have the PLUSTRACE role granted to you and a PLAN_TA
187. d Tuning for Performance for more information on parallel and distributed operations The second section of this report consists of three columns displayed in the following order Column Name Description ID_PLUS_EXP Shows the line number of each execution step OTHER_TAG PLUS_EXP Describes the function of the SQL statement in the OTHER_PLUS_EXP column OTHER_PLUS_EXP Shows the text of the query for the parallel server or remote database The format of the columns may be altered with the COLUMN command The default formats can be found in the site profile for example glogin sq Note You must have Oracle7 Release 7 3 or greater to view the second section of this report Example 3 24 Tracing Statements With Parallel Query Option To trace a parallel query running the parallel query option SQL gt CREATE TABLE D2_T1 UNIQUE1 BER PARALLEL gt DEGREE 6 Table created SQL gt CREATE TABLE D2_T2 UNIQUE1 NUMBER PARALLEL gt degree 6 Table created SQL gt CREATE UNIQUE INDEX D2_I_UNIQUE1 ON D2_T1 UNIQUE1 Index created Manipulating Commands 3 41 Tracing Statements SQL gt SET LONG 500 LONGCH SQL gt set autotrace on E UNKSIZE 500 PLAIN SQL gt select index b d2_i_uniquel use_nl b ordered gt count a uniquel 2 from d2 t2 a G2 1 3 w
188. d by variable to list the value and type of variable Enter DEFINE with no clauses to list the values and types of all user variables Usage Notes DEFINEd variables retain their values until one of the following events occurs a you enter anew DEFINE command referencing the variable you enter an UNDEFINE command referencing the variable you enter an ACCEPT command referencing the variable a you reference the variable in the NEW_VALUE or OLD_VALUE clause of the COLUMN command and reference the column in a subsequent SQL SELECT command a you EXIT SQL Plus Whenever you run a stored query or command file SOL Plus substitutes the value of variable for each substitution variable referencing variable in the form amp variable or 8 52 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DEFINE amp amp variable SQL Plus will not prompt you for the value of variable in this session until you UNDEFINE variable Note that you can use DEFINE to define the variable EDITOR which establishes the host system editor invoked by the SQL Plus EDIT command If you continue the value of a DEFINEd variable on multiple lines using the SQL Plus command continuation character SQL Plus replaces each continuation character and carriage return you enter with a space in the resulting variable For example SQL Plus interprets SQL gt DEFINE TEXT ONE gt TWO gt THREE as SQL gt DEFINE TEXT ONE TWO THRE
189. d enter Return SQL Plus displays the prompt DOC gt in place of SQL gt until you end the documentation The pound character on a line by itself ends the documentation If you have set DOCUMENT to OFF SQL Plus suppresses the display of the block of documentation created by the DOCUMENT command See SET DOCUMENT later in this appendix Purpose Advances spooled output n lines beyond the beginning of the next page Syntax NEWPAGE 1 n Usage Notes Refer to the NEWPAGE variable of the SET command in Chapter 8 for information on the current method for advancing spooled output SET BUFFER Purpose Makes the specified buffer the current buffer Syntax SET BUF FER buffer SQL Usage Notes Initially the SQL buffer is the current buffer SQL Plus does not require the use of multiple buffers the SQL buffer alone should meet your needs F 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET DOCUMENT If the buffer name you enter does not already exist SET BUFFER defines creates and names the buffer SQL Plus deletes the buffer and its contents when you exit SOL Plus Running a query automatically makes the SQL buffer the current buffer To copy text from one buffer to another use the GET and SAVE commands To clear text from the current buffer use CLEAR BUFFER To clear text from the SQL buffer while using a different buffer use CLEAR SQL SET CLOSECURSOR Purpose Sets the cursor usage b
190. d prompt After you enter PL SQL mode in this way type the remainder of your PL SQL subprogram a You type a SQL command such as CREATE FUNCTION that creates a stored procedure After you enter PL SQL mode in this way type the stored procedure you want to create SQL Plus treats PL SQL subprograms in the same manner as SQL commands except that a semicolon or a blank line does not terminate and execute a block Terminate PL SQL subprograms by entering a period by itself on a new line SQL Plus stores the subprograms you enter at the SQL Plus command prompt in the SQL buffer Execute the current subprogram by issuing a RUN or slash command Likewise to execute a SQL CREATE command that creates a stored procedure you must also enter RUN or slash A semicolon will not execute these SOL commands as it does other SQL commands SQL Plus sends the complete PL SQL subprogram to Oracle for processing as it does SQL commands 2 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Entering and Executing Commands You might enter and execute a PL SQL subprogram as follows ES SQL gt DECLARE 2 x NUMBER 100 3 BEGIN 4 FOR i IN 1 10 LOOP 5 IF MOD i 2 0 THEN 6 INSERT INTO temp VALU 7 ELSE 8 INSERT INTO temp VALU 9 END IF 10 x x 100 11 END LOOP 12 END 13 SQL gt ES i is even i x i is even ly
191. d the registered name using the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO READ_MODULE proce dure ON registers command files invoked by the or START com mands OFF disables registering of command files Instead the current value of text is registered Text specifies the text to register when no command file is being run or when APPINFO is OFF The default for text is SQL Plus If you enter multiple words for text you must enclose them in quotes The maximum length for text is limited by the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package The registered name has the format nn xfilename where nn is the depth level of command file x is lt when the command file name is trun cated otherwise it is blank and filename is the command file name possibly truncated to the length allowed by the DBMS_ APPLICATION_INFO package interface Note To use this feature you must have access to the DBMS_ APPLICATION_INFO package Run DBMSUTIL SQL this name may vary depending on your operating system as SYS to create the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package DBMSUTIL SQL is part of the Oracle8i database server product For more information on the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package see the Oracle8i Designing and Tuning for Performance manual ARRAY SIZE 15 n Sets the number of rows called a batch that SQL Plus will fetch from the database at one time Valid values are 1 to 5000 A large value increases the efficiency of queries and subqueries that fetch many rows
192. damaged database is in ARCHIVELOG mode it is a candidate for either complete media recovery or incomplete media recovery operations To begin media recovery operations use the RECOVER command For more information about using the RECOVER command see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 In order to begin recovery operations you must have DBA privileges To recover the database up to a specified time using a control backup file enter SQL gt RI ECOVI ER DATABASE UNTIL TIME gt USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE 1998 11 23 12 47 30 To recover two offline tablespaces enter SQL gt F ECOVI ER TABL ESPACE tsl ts2 Make sure that the tablespaces you are interested in recovering have been taken offline before proceeding with recovery for those tablespaces Database Administration 5 5 Database Recovery 5 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 6 Accessing SQL Databases This chapter explains how to access databases through SQL Plus and discusses the following topics a Connecting to the Default Database a Connecting to a Remote Database a Copying Data from One Database to Another a Copying Data between Tables on One Database Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the example shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the sample tables described in Chapter 1 Accessing SQL Databases 6 1 Connecting to the Default Database
193. display the output that is DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_ LINE of stored procedures or PL SQL blocks in SQL Plus OFF sup presses the output of DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE ON displays the output SIZE sets the number of bytes of the output that can be buffered within the Oracle8i database server The default for n is 2000 n cannot be less than 2000 or greater than 1 000 000 When WRAPPED is enabled SQL Plus wraps the server output within the line size specified by SET LINESIZE beginning new lines when required When WORD_WRAPPED is enabled each line of server output is wrapped within the line size specified by SET LINESIZE Lines are bro ken on word boundaries SQL Plus left justifies each line skipping all leading whitespace When TRUNCATED is enabled each line of server output is truncated to the line size specified by SET LINESIZE For each FORMAT every server output line begins on a new output line For more information on DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE see your Oracle8i Application Developer s Guide Fundamentals SHIFT INOUT VIS IBLE INV ISIBLE Allows correct alignment for terminals that display shift characters The SET SHIFTINOUT command is useful for terminals which display shift characters together with data for example IBM 3270 terminals You can only use this command with shift sensitive character sets for exam ple JA16DBCS Use VISIBLE for terminals that display shift characters as a visible char acter for example a s
194. displays and prints a formfeed character to begin a new page On most types of computer screens the formfeed character clears the screen and moves the cursor to the beginning of the Formatting Query Results 4 31 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions first line When you print a report the formfeed character makes the printer move to the top of a new sheet of paper even if the overall page length is less than that of the paper If you set NEWPAGE to NONE SQL Plus does not print a blank line or formfeed between report pages To set the number of lines on a page use the PAGESIZE variable of the SET command SET PAGESIZE number_of_lines You may wish to reduce the linesize to center a title properly over your output or you may want to increase linesize for printing on wide paper You can change the line width using the LINESIZE variable of the SET command SET LINESIZE number_of_characters Example 4 24 Setting Page Dimensions To set the page size to 66 lines clear the screen or advance the printer to a new sheet of paper at the start of each page and set the linesize to 32 enter the following commands SQL gt SET PAGESIZE 66 SQL gt SE EWPAGE 0 SQL gt S INESIZE 32 Now enter and run the following commands to see the results SQL gt TTITLE CENTER ACME WIDGET PERSONNEL REPORT SKIP 1 gt CENTER 10 JAN 99 SKIP 2 SQL gt COLUM
195. e SQL gt EXECUTE n 1 The following EXECUTE command runs a PL SQL statement that references a stored procedure SQL gt R ECUTE gt ID EMP_MANAGEMENT HIRE BLAKE MANAGER KING 2990 SALES Note that the value returned by the stored procedure is being placed in a bind variable ID For information on how to create a bind variable see the VARIABLE command in this chapter 8 66 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference EXIT EXIT Purpose Terminates SQL Plus and returns control to the operating system Syntax EXIT QUIT SUCCESS FATLURE WARNING n variable BindVariable COMMIT ROLLBACK Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause EXIT QUIT Can be used interchangeably QUIT is a synonym for EXIT SUCCESS Exits normally FAILURE Exits with a return code indicating failure WARNING Exits with a return code indicating warning COMMIT Saves pending changes to the database before exiting n Represents an integer you specify as the return code variable Represents a user defined or system variable but not a bind variable such as SQL SQLCODE EXIT variable exits with the value of variable as the return code BindVariable Represents a variable created in SQL Plus with the VARIABLE com mand and then referenced in PL SQL or other subpro
196. e 8 134 statement SQL GL 21 statistics 3 38 STD function 4 16 STOP clause 8 14 8 138 Index 19 STORE command 3 20 8 137 SET clause 8 137 stored functions 3 33 stored procedures creating 2 8 string GL 21 Structured Query Language GL 20 substitution variables 3 22 GL 22 GL 25 appending characters immediately after 3 24 avoiding unnecessary prompts for value 3 24 concatenation character 8 103 DEFINE command 3 24 8 52 prefixing 8 103 F 2 restrictions 3 26 single and double ampersands 3 24 system variables used with 3 26 undefined 3 23 where and how to use 3 22 subtotal GL 22 SUFFIX variable 8 111 used with at sign command 8 5 used with EDIT command 8 64 used with GET command 8 69 used with SAVE command 8 96 used with START command 8 131 SUM function 4 16 summary GL 22 summary lines GL 22 computing and printing 4 15 8 41 computing and printing at ends of reports 4 19 computing same type on different columns 4 20 printing grand and sub summaries totals 4 20 printing multiple on same break column 4 21 syntax GL 22 conventions 1 3 COPY command 6 5 syntax rules SQL commands 2 7 SQL Plus commands 2 12 SYSDATE 4 31 SYSDBA GL 22 SYSDBA clause 8 48 SYSOPER GL 22 Index 20 SYSOPER clause 7 9 8 48 system administrator GL 22 system editor GL 22 System Global Area GL 23 SYSTEM username GL 23 system variables 2 13 8 112 GL 23 changing current settings
197. e DML DUAL table A standard Oracle database table named DUAL which contains exactly one row The DUAL table is useful for applications that require a small dummy table the data is irrelevant to guarantee a known result such as true editor A program that creates or modifies files end user The person for whom a system is being developed for example an airline reservations clerk is an end user of an airline reservations system See also SOL Plus error message A message from a computer program for example SQL Plus informing you of a potential problem preventing program or command execution expression A formula such as SALARY COMMISSION used to calculate a new value from existing values An expression can be made up of column names functions operators and constants Formulas are found in commands or SQL statements extension On some operating systems the second part of the full file specification Several standard file extensions are used to indicate the type or purpose of the file as in file extensions of SQL LOG LIS EXE BAT and DIR Called file type on some operating systems file A collection of data treated as a unit such as a list document index note set of procedures and so on Generally used to refer to data stored on magnetic tapes or disks See also filename extension and file type filename The name component of a file specification A filename is assigned by either the
198. e statement as a SQL statement until after the input processing has joined the lines together and removed the hyphen For example entering the following will return an error SQL gt select 200 gt 100 from dual 2 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Entering and Executing Commands select 200 100 from dual ERROR at line 1 ORA 00923 FROM keyword not found where expected To ensure that the statement is interpreted correctly reposition the hyphen from the end of the first line to the beginning of the second line Ending a SQL Plus Command You do not need to end a SQL Plus command with a semicolon When you finish entering the command you can just press Return If you wish however you can enter a semicolon at the end of a SQL Plus command Variables that Affect Running Commands The SQL Plus command SET controls many variables called system variables the settings of which affect the way SQL Plus runs your commands System variables control a variety of conditions within SQL Plus including default column widths for your output whether SQL Plus displays the number of records selected by a command and your page size System variables are also called SET command variables The examples in this Guide are based on running SQL Plus with the system variables at their default settings Depending on the settings of your system variables your output may appear slightly different than the output shown in the example
199. e Log Writer LGWR local database The database that SQL Plus connects to when you start SQOL Plus ordinarily a database on your host computer Also called a default database See also remote database log in or log on To perform a sequence of actions at a terminal that establishes a user s communication with the operating system and sets up default characteristics for the user s terminal session log off or log out To terminate interactive communication with the operating system and end a terminal session Log Writer LGWR A background process used by an Oracle instance LGWR writes redo log entries to disk Redo log data is generated in the redo log buffer of the system global area As transactions commit and the log buffer fills LGWR writes redo log entries into an online redo log file logon string A user specified command line used to run an application that is connected to either a local or remote database The logon string either explicitly includes a connect identifier or implicitly uses a default connect identifier LONG datatype One of the standard Oracle datatypes A LONG column can contain any printable characters such as A 3 amp or a blank and can have any length from 0 to 2 gigabytes MARKUP Refers to the SET MARKUP clause or the SQLPLUS MARKUP clause that permits SQL Plus output to be generated in HTML format for delivery on the Internet SQL Plus output generated in HTML can be viewed
200. e SET SPACE 0 and SET COLSEP commands have the same effect This command is obsoleted by SET COLSEP but you can still use it for backward compatibility You may prefer to use COLSEP because the SHOW command recognizes COLSEP and does not recognize SPACE SET TRUNCATE Purpose Controls whether SQL Plus truncates or wraps a data item that is too long for the current line width Syntax SET TRU NCATE ON OFF Usage Notes ON functions in the same manner as SET WRAP OFF and vice versa You may prefer to use WRAP because the SHOW command recognizes WRAP and does not recognize TRUNCATE SHOW LABEL Purpose Shows the security level for the current session Syntax SHO W LABE TTITLE old form Purpose Displays a title at the top of each report page Syntax TTI TLE text Obsolete SQL Plus Commands F 7 TTITLE old form Usage Notes The old form of TTITLE offers formatting features more limited than those of the new form but provides compatibility with UFI a predecessor of SQL Plus The old form defines the top title as a line with the date left aligned and the page number right aligned followed by a line with centered text and then a blank line The text you enter defines the title TTITLE will display SQL Plus centers text based on the size of a line as determined by SET LINESIZE A separator character begins a new line two line separator characters in a row insert a blank line Yo
201. e default database in parallel mode and open the database enter SQL gt STARTUP PARALLEL SQL gt STARTUP PARALLEL OPEN database To restart an instance that went down in parallel mode and may not yet have been recovered by other instances use the RETRY option SQL gt STARTUP PARALLEL RETRY To shutdown the current instance immediately restart it without mounting or opening and allow only database administrators to connect enter SQL gt STARTUP FORCE RESTRICT NOMOUNT To start an instance using the parameter file TESTPARM without mounting the database enter SQL gt STARTUP PFILE testparm NOMOUNT To shutdown a particular database immediately restart and open it in parallel mode allow access only to database administrators and use the parameter file MYINIT ORA enter SQL gt STARTUP FORCE RESTRICT PFILE myinit ora SHARED OPEN database Command Reference 8 135 STARTUP To startup an instance and mount but not open a database enter SQL gt CONNECT as SYSDBA Connected to an idle instance SQL gt STARTUP MOUNT ORACLE instance started Total System Global Area 7629732 bytes Fixed Size 60324 bytes Variable Size 6627328 bytes Database Buffers 409600 bytes Redo Buffers 532480 bytes 8 136 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference STORE STORE Purpose Saves attributes of the current SQL Plus environment in a host opera
202. e either available to the instance for recording database activity or are filled and waiting to be archived or reused 2 A set of two or more online redo log files that record all committed changes made to the database open database A database that has been mounted and opened by an instance and is available for access by users If a database is open users can access the information it contains See also mounted database operating system The system software that manages a computer s resources performing basic tasks such as allocating memory and allowing computer components to communicate Glossary 15 Glossary 16 Oracle Server The relational database management system RDBMS sold by Oracle Corporation Components of Oracle Server include the kernel and various utilities for use by DBAs and database users output Results of a report after it is run Output can be displayed on a screen stored ina file or printed on paper output file File to which the computer transfers data packages A method of encapsulating and storing related procedures functions and other package constructs together as a unit in the database While packages provide the database administrator or application developer organizational benefits they also offer increased functionality and database performance page A screen of displayed data or a sheet of printed data in a report parallel server Some hardware architectures for example
203. e it means you can append a new line to the end of the buffer without removing a semicolon Editing the Current Line The SQL Plus CHANGE command allows you to edit the current line Various actions determine which line is the current line a LIST a given line to make it the current line Manipulating Commands 3 3 Editing Commands a When you LIST or RUN the command in the buffer the last line of the command becomes the current line Note that using the slash command to run the command in the buffer does not affect the current line If you get an error message the line containing the error automatically becomes the current line Example 3 2 Making an Error in Command Entry Suppose you try to select the DEPTNO column but mistakenly enter it as DPTNO Enter the following command purposely misspelling DEPTNO in the first line SQL gt SELECT DPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE DEPTNO 10 You see this message on your screen SELECT DPTNO ENAME SAL ERROR at line 1 ORA 00904 invalid column name Examine the error message it indicates an invalid column name in line 1 of the query The asterisk shows the point of error the mistyped column DPTNO Instead of re entering the entire command you can correct the mistake by editing the command in the buffer The line containing the error is now the current line Use the CHANGE command to
204. e last line of the page The amount of space between the last row of the report and the bottom title depends on the overall page size the number of lines occupied by the top title and the number of rows in a given page In the above example the top title occupies three more lines than the top title in the previous example You will learn to set the number of lines per page later in this chapter To always print n blank lines before the bottom title use the SKIP n clause at the beginning of the BTITLE command For example to skip one line before the bottom title in the example above you could enter the following command BTITLE SKIP 1 CENTER COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Formatting Query Results 4 25 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Indenting a Title Element You can use the COL clause in TTITLE or BTITLE to indent the title element a specific number of spaces For example COL 1 places the following values in the first character position and so is equivalent to LEFT or an indent of zero COL 15 places the title element in the 15th character position indenting it 14 spaces Example 4 20 indenting a Title Element To print the company name left aligned with the report name indented five spaces on the next line enter SQL gt TTITLE LEFT ACME WIDGET SKIP 1 gt COL 6 SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT SKIP 2 Now rerun the current quer
205. e local or remote CLOB datatype A standard Oracle datatype The CLOB datatype is used to store single byte character large object data and can store up to 4 gigabytes of character data column A vertical space in a database table that represents a particular domain of data A column has a column name and a specific datatype For example in a table of employee information all of the employees dates of hire would constitute one column A record group column represents a database column column expression An expression in a SELECT statement that defines which database column s are retrieved It may be a column name or a valid SQL expression referencing a column name column heading A heading created for each column appearing in a report command An instruction to or request of a program application operating system or other software to perform a particular task Commands may be single words or may require additional phrases variously called arguments options parameters and qualifiers Unlike statements commands execute as soon as you enter them ACCEPT CLEAR and COPY are examples of commands in SQL Plus fcommand file A file containing a sequence of commands that you can otherwise enter interactively The file is saved for convenience and re execution Command files are often called by operating system specific names In SQL Plus you can execute the command file with the START or commands command line
206. e name is taken from the initialization parameter DB_LNAME OPEN Mounts and opens the specified database NOMOUNT Causes the database not to be mounted upon instance startup Cannot be used with SHARED EXCLUSIVE PARALLEL MOUNT or OPEN RECOVER Specifies that media recovery should be performed if necessary before starting the instance STARTUP RECOVER has the same effect as issu ing the RECOVER DATABASE command and starting an instance Only complete recovery is possible with the RECOVER option Recovery proceeds if necessary as if AUTORECOVERY is set to ON regardless of whether or not AUTORECOVERY is enabled If a redo log file is not found in the expected location recovery continues as if AUTORECOVERY is disabled by prompting you with the suggested location and name of the subsequent log files that need to be applied 8 134 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference STARTUP Usage Notes You must be connected to a database as SYSOPER or SYSDBA You cannot be connected via a multi threaded server STARTUP with no arguments is equivalent to STARTUP OPEN STARTUP OPEN RECOVER mounts and opens the database even when recovery fails Examples To start an instance using the standard parameter file mount the default database in exclusive mode and open the database enter SQL gt STARTUP or enter SQL gt STARTUP EXCLUSIVE OPEN database To start an instance using the standard parameter file mount th
207. e number First create a variable MGRVAR to hold the value of the current manager s employee number SQL gt COLUMN MGR NEW_VALUE MGRVAR NOPRINT Because you will display the managers employee numbers in the title you do not want them to print as part of the detail The NOPRINT clause you entered above tells SQL Plus not to print the column MGR Next include a label and the value in your page title enter the proper BREAK command and suppress the bottom title from the last example SQL gt TTITLE LEFT Manager MGRVAR SKIP 2 SQL gt BREAK ON MGR SKIP PAGE SQL gt BTITLE OFF Finally enter and run the following query SQL gt SELECT MGR ENAME SAL DEPTNO 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE MGR IN 7698 7839 4 ORDER BY MGR SQL Plus displays the following output Manager 7698 Formatting Query Results 4 29 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions ENAME SAL DEPTNO ALLEI 1600 30 WARD 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ARTIN 1250 30 JAMES 950 30 lanager 7839 ENAME SAL DEPTNO JONES 2975 20 BLAKE 2850 30 CLARK 2450 10 8 rows selected If you want to print the value of a column at the bottom of the page you can use the COLUMN command in the following form COLUMN column_name OLD_VALUI E variable_name SQL Plus prints the bottom title as part of the process of breaking
208. e of the SET command in this chapter 8 64 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference EDIT Note The default file AFIEDT BUF may have a different name on some operating systems If you do not specify a filename and the buffer is empty EDIT returns an error message To leave the editing session and return to SOL Plus terminate the editing session in the way customary for the text editor When you leave the editor SQL Plus loads the contents of the file into the buffer Example To edit the file REPORT with the extension SQL using your host operating system text editor enter SQL gt EDIT R EPORT Command Reference 8 65 EXECUTE EXECUTE Purpose Executes a single PL SQL statement The EXECUTE command is often useful when you want to execute a PL SQL statement that references a stored procedure For more information on PL SQL see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference Syntax EXEC UTE statement Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause statement Represents a PL SQL statement Usage Notes If your EXECUTE command cannot fit on one line because of the PL SQL statement use the SQL Plus continuation character a hyphen as shown in the example below The length of the command and the PL SQL statement cannot exceed the length defined by SET LINESIZE Examples The following EXECUTE command assigns a value to a bind variabl
209. e sign whichever is greater If you do not explicitly use FORMAT then the column s width will always be at least the value of SET NUMWIDTH SQL Plus normally displays numbers with as many digits as are required for accuracy up to a standard display width determined by the value of the NUMWIDTH variable of the SET command normally 10 If a number is larger than the value of SET NUMWIDTH SQL Plus rounds the number up or down to the maximum number of characters allowed You can choose a different format for any NUMBER column by using a format model in a COLUMN command A format model is a representation of the way you want the numbers in the column to appear using 9 s to represent digits 4 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Formatting Columns Changing the Default Display The COLUMN command identifies the column you want to format and the model you want to use as shown below COLUMN column_name FORMAT model Use format models to add commas dollar signs angle brackets around negative values and or leading zeros to numbers in a given column You can also round the values to a given number of decimal places display minus signs to the right of negative values instead of to the left and display values in exponential notation To use more than one format model for a single column combine the desired models in one COLUMN command see Example 4 4 For a complete list of format models and further details see the COLU
210. e the SQL SET ROLE and SET TRANSACTION commands Disabling the SQL Plus START command will also disable the SQL Plus and commands You can also disable the following SQL commands ALTER ANALYZE AUDIT CONNECT Security E 5 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table a CREATE a DELETE a DROP a GRANT a INSERT a LOCK a NOAUDIT a RENAME a REVOKE a SELECT a SET ROLE a SET TRANSACTION a TRUNCATE a UPDATE You can also disable the following PL SQL commands a BEGIN a DECLARE Note Disabling BEGIN and DECLARE does not prevent the use of the SQL Plus EXECUTE command EXECUTE must be disabled separately Disabling SET ROLE From SQL Plus users can submit any SQL command In certain situations this can cause security problems Unless you take proper precautions a user could use SET ROLE to access privileges obtained via an application role With these privileges they might issue SQL statements from SQL Plus that could wrongly change database tables To prevent application users from accessing application roles in SQL Plus you can use PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE to disable the SET ROLE command This allows a SQL Plus user only those privileges associated with the roles enabled when they E 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Roles Roles started SQL Plus For more information about the creation and usage of user roles see your OracleSi SQL Reference and Oracle8i Administrator s Guide Disabli
211. e titles more closely around the data You can accomplish these changes by adding some clauses to the TTITLE command and by resetting the system variable LINESIZE as the following example shows You can format report headers and footers in the same way as BTITLE and TTITLE using the REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands 4 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Example 4 19 Positioning Title Elements To redisplay the personnel report with a repositioned top title enter the following commands SQL gt TTITLE CENTER ACME WIDGET SKIP 1 gt CENTER SKIP 1 LEFT PERSONNEL REPORT gt RIGHT SALES DEPARTMENT SKIP 2 SQL gt SE LINESIZE 60 SQL gt SQL Plus displays the results ACME WIDGET PERSONNEL REPORT SALES DEPARTMENT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ALLE 1600 30 BLAKE 2850 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected The LEFT RIGHT and CENTER clauses place the following values at the beginning end and center of the line The SKIP clause tells SQL Plus to move down one or more lines Note that there is no longer any space between the last row of the results and the bottom title The last line of the bottom title prints on th
212. eases HEAD text The HEAD text option allows you to specify content for the lt HEAD gt tag By default text is lt TITLE gt SQL Plus Report lt TITLE gt If text includes spaces it must be enclosed in quotes SQL Plus does not test this free text entry for HTML validity You must ensure that the text you enter is valid for the HTML lt HEAD gt tag This gives you the flexi bility to customize output for your browser or special needs BODY text The BODY text option allows you to specify attributes for the lt BODY gt tag By default there are no attributes If text includes spaces it must be enclosed in quotes SQL Plus does not test this free text entry for HTML 7 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command validity You must ensure that the text you enter is valid for the HTML lt BODY gt tag This gives you the flexibility to customize output for your browser or special needs TABLE text The TABLE text option allows you to enter attributes for the lt TABLE gt tag You can use TABLE text to set HTML lt TABLE gt tag attributes such as BORDER CELLPADDING CELLSPACING and WIDTH By default the lt TABLE gt WIDTH attribute is set to 90 and the BORDER attribute is set to 1 If text includes spaces it must be enclosed in quotes SQL Plus does not test this free text entry for HTML validity You must ensure that the text you enter is valid for the HTML lt TABLE gt
213. ect to the DOD FAR Supplement are commercial computer software and use duplication and disclosure of the Programs including documentation shall be subject to the licensing restrictions set forth in the applicable Oracle license agreement Otherwise Programs delivered subject to the Federal Acquisition Regulations are restricted computer software and use duplication and disclosure of the Programs shall be subject to the restrictions in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights June 1987 Oracle Corporation 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 The Programs are not intended for use in any nuclear aviation mass transit medical or other inherently dangerous applications It shall be the licensee s responsibility to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of such applications if the Programs are used for such purposes and Oracle Corporation disclaims liability for any damages caused by such use of the Programs Oracle is a registered trademark and JDeveloper Oracle Designer Oracle Developer Oracle Discoverer Oracle7 Oracle8 Oracle8i Oracle Media Objects Oracle Mobile Agents Oracle Application Server PL SQL Oracle Programmer SQL Forms Net8 and SQL Plus are trademarks or registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners Contents Send US Your Comments o 0 oiiccccccccccccccccccscsesscscse
214. ed query to see the results SQL gt ENAI SAL COMM ALLEN 1600 300 4 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines WARD 1250 500 MARTIN 1250 1400 TURNER 1500 0 HARIRI RK sum 5600 2200 You can also print multiple summary lines on the same break column To do so include the function for each summary line in the COMPUTE command as follows COMPUTE function LABEL label_name function LABEL label_name function LABEL label_name OF column ON break_column If you include multiple columns after OFF and before ON COMPUTE calculates and prints values for each column you specify Example 4 15 Computing Multiple Summary Lines on the Same Break Column To compute the average and sum of salaries for the sales department first enter the following BREAK and COMPUTE commands SQL gt BREAK ON DEPTNO SQL gt COMPUTE AVG SUM OF SAL ON DEPTNO Now enter and run the following query SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE DEPTNO 30 4 ORDER BY DEPTINO SAL SQL Plus displays the results DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 TURNER 1500 ALLE 1600 BLAKE 2850 gee ea ee AT OO one Oe avg 1566 6667 sum 9400 6 rows selected Formatting Query Results 4
215. edia recovery on a datafile the database can remain open and mounted with the damaged datafiles offline unless the file is part of the SYSTEM tablespace Before using the RECOVER command you must have restored copies of the damaged datafile s from a previous backup Be sure you can access all archived and online redo log files dating back to when that backup was made When another log file is required during recovery a prompt suggests the names of files that are needed The name is derived from the values specified in the initialization parameters LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST and LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT You should restore copies of the archived redo log files needed for recovery to the destination specified in LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST if necessary You can override the initialization parameters by setting the LOGSOURCE variable with the SET LOGSOURCE command During recovery you can accept the suggested log name by pressing return cancel recovery by entering CANCEL instead of a log name or enter AUTO at the prompt for automatic file selection without further prompting If you have enabled autorecovery that is SET AUTORECOVERY ON recovery proceeds without prompting you with filenames Status messages are displayed when each log file is applied When normal media recovery is done a completion status is returned 8 86 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER Examples To recover the entire database enter SQL gt RECOVER DATABASE
216. eful when you want to perform a task such as listing existing host operating system files To run a host operating system command enter the SQL Plus command HOST followed by the host operating system command For example this SQL Plus command runs a host command DIRECTORY SQL SQL gt HOST DIRECTORY SOL When the host command finishes running the SOL Plus command prompt appears again Note Operating system commands entered from a SQL Plus session using the HOST command do not effect the current SOL Plus session You can suppress access to the HOST command For more information about suppressing the HOST command see Appendix E Security Getting Help While you use SQL Plus you may find that you need to list column definitions for a table or start and stop the display that scrolls by You may also need to interpret error messages you receive when you enter a command incorrectly or when there is a problem with Oracle or SQL Plus The following sections describe how to get help for those situations Listing a Table Definition To see the definitions of each column in a given table use the SQL Plus DESCRIBE command Example 2 6 Using the DESCRIBE Command To list the column definitions of the three columns in the sample table DEPT enter SQL gt DESCRIBE DEPT 2 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Getting Help The following output results Name
217. egins with a blank separate the word APPEND from the first character of the text by two blanks one to separate APPEND from the text and one to go into the buffer with the text Example 3 5 Appending Text to a Line To append a space and the clause DESC to line 4 of the current query first list line 4 SQL gt LIST 4 4 ORDER BY SAL Next enter the following command be sure to type two spaces between APPEND and DESC 3 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Editing Commands SQL gt APPEND DESC 4 ORDER BY SAL DESC Use RUN to verify and re run the query SOL Plus lists the modified command and then runs it 1 select deptno ename sal 2 from emo 3 where deptno 10 4 order by sal desc DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 KING 5000 10 CLARK 2450 10 MILLER 1300 Deleting Lines To delete lines in the buffer use the DEL command 1 Use the LIST command or just the line numbers to list the lines you want to delete 2 Enter DEL with an optional clause Suppose you want to delete the current line to the last line inclusive Use the DEL command as shown below SQL gt DEL LAST DEL makes the following line of the buffer if any the current line For more information see the DEL command in Chapter 8 Editing Commands with a System Editor Your computer s host operating system may have one or more text editors that you can use to create and edit host system files Text ed
218. ehavior Syntax SET CLOSECUR SOR ON OFF Usage Notes On or OFF sets whether or not the cursor will close and reopen after each SQL statement This feature may be useful in some circumstances to release resources in the database server SET DOCUMENT Purpose Displays or suppresses blocks of documentation created by the DOCUMENT command Syntax SET DOC UMENT ON OFF Usage Notes SET DOCUMENT ON causes blocks of documentation to be echoed to the screen Set DOCUMENT OFF suppresses the display of blocks of documentation See DOCUMENT in this appendix for information on the DOCUMENT command Obsolete SQL Plus Commands F 5 SET MAXDATA SET MAXDATA SET SCAN SET SPACE Purpose Sets the maximum total row width that SQL Plus can process Syntax SET MAXD ATA n Usage Notes In SQL Plus the maximum row width is unlimited Any values you set using SET MAXDATA are ignored by SQL Plus Purpose Controls scanning for the presence of substitution variables and parameters OFF suppresses processing of substitution variables and parameters ON allows normal processing Syntax SET SCAN ON OFF Usage Notes ON functions in the same manner as SET DEFINE ON Purpose Sets the number of spaces between columns in output The maximum value of n is 10 Syntax SET SPACE 1 n F 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference TTITLE old form Usage Notes Th
219. em error occurs If you do not enter the WHENEVER SQLERROR command the default behavior of SQL Plus is to continue and take no action when a SQL error occurs Command Reference 8 151 WHENEVER OSERROR Examples The commands in the following command file cause SQL Plus to exit and COMMIT any pending changes if a failure occurs when writing to the output file SQL gt WHENEVER OSERROR EXIT SQL gt START no_such_file OS Message No such file or directory Disconnected from Oracle8 8 152 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference WHENEVER SQLERROR WHENEVER SQLERROR Purpose Exits SQL Plus if a SQL command or PL SQL block generates an error Syntax WHENEVER SOLERROR EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n variable BindVariable COMMIT ROLLBACK CONTINUE COMMIT ROLLBACK NONE Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n variable BindVariable CONTINUE COMMIT ROLLBACK NONE Directs SQL Plus to exit as soon as it detects a SQL command or PL SQL block error but after printing the error message SQL Plus will not exit on a SQL Plus error The EXIT clause of WHENEVER SQLERROR follows the same syntax as the EXIT command See EXIT in this chapter for details Turns off the EXIT option Directs SQL Plus to execute a COMMIT before exiting or continuing and save
220. ement You may also wish to use an explicit COLUMN FORMAT command to adjust the column width When you use SQL functions like TO_CHAR Oracle automatically allows for a very wide column To change the width of a DATE column to n use the COLUMN com mand with FORMAT An If you specify a width shorter than the col umn heading the heading is truncated NUMBER Columns To change a NUMBER column s width use FOR MAT followed by an element as specified in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Number Formats Element Example s Description 9 9999 Number of 9 s specifies number of significant digits returned Blanks are displayed for leading zeroes A zero 0 is displayed for a value of zero 0 0999 Displays a leading zero or a value of zero in this position as 9990 9999 Prefixes value with dollar sign B B9999 Displays a zero value as blank regardless of 0 s in the format model MI 9999MI Displays after a negative value For a positive value a trailing space is displayed S 9999 Returns for positive values and for negative values in this position PR 9999PR Displays a negative value in lt angle brackets gt For a positive value a leading and trailing space is displayed D 99D99 Displays the decimal character in this position separating the integral and fractional parts of a number G 96999 Displays the group separator in this position Command Reference 8 33 COLUMN Table 8 1 Number Formats Element Example s Descripti
221. ence Glossary account An authorized user of an operating system or a product such as Oracle database server or Oracle Forms Depending on the operating system may be referred to as ID User ID login and so on Accounts are often created and controlled by a system administrator alias In SQL a temporary name assigned to a table view column or value within a SQL statement used to refer to that item later in the same statement or in associated SOL Plus commands alignment The way in which data is positioned in a field It may be positioned to the left right center flush left flush right or flush center of the defined width of a field anonymous block A PL SQL program unit that has no name and does not require the explicit presence of the BEGIN and END keywords to enclose the executable statements archived redo log Recovery structure where online redo log files are archived before being reused ARCHIVELOG Redo log mode where the filled online redo log files are archived before they are reused in the cycle In ARCHIVELOG mode the database can be completely recovered from both instance and disk failure The database can also be backed up while it is open and available for use However additional administrative Glossary 1 Glossary 2 operations are required to maintain the archived redo log See also archived redo log argument A data item following the command file name in a START command The argumen
222. ence in Chapter 8 The SQL Buffer The area where SQL Plus stores your most recently entered SQL command or PL SQL block is called the SQL buffer The command or block remains there until you enter another Thus if you want to edit or re run the current SQL command or PL SQL block you may do so without re entering it For more information about editing or re running a command or block stored in the buffer see the section Running Command Files in Chapter 3 SQL Plus does not store the semicolon or the slash you type to execute a command in the SQL buffer Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 9 Entering and Executing Commands Note SQL Plus commands are not stored in the SQL buffer Executing the Current SQL Command or PL SQL Block from the Command Prompt You can run or re run the current SQL command or PL SQL block by entering the RUN command or the slash command at the command prompt The RUN command lists the SQL command or PL SQL block in the buffer before executing the command or block the slash command simply runs the SQL command or PL SQL block Running PL SQL Blocks You can also use PL SQL subprograms called blocks to manipulate data in the database See your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for information on individual PL SQL statements To enter a PL SQL subprogram in SQL Plus you need to be in PL SQL mode You are placed in PL SQL mode when a You type DECLARE or BEGIN at the SQL Plus comman
223. enter a name for every column you are copying Accessing SQL Databases 6 5 Copying Data from One Database to Another Note To enable the copying of data between Oracle and non Oracle databases NUMBER columns are changed to DECIMAL columns in the destination table Hence if you are copying between Oracle databases a NUMBER column with no precision will be changed to a DECIMAL 38 column When copying between Oracle databases you should use SQL commands CREATE TABLE AS and INSERT or you should ensure that your columns have a precision specified The USING clause specifies a query that names the source table and specifies the data that COPY copies to the destination table You can use any form of the SQL SELECT command to select the data that the COPY command copies Here is an example of a COPY command that copies only two columns from the source table and copies only those rows in which the value of DEPTNO is 30 SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER BOSTONDB gt REPLACE EMPCOPY2 gt USING SELECT ENAME SAL gt FROM EMPCOPY gt WHERE DEPTNO 30 You may find it easier to enter and edit long COPY commands in command files rather than trying to enter them directly at the command prompt Controlling Treatment of the Destination Table You control the treatment of the destination table by entering one of four control clauses REPLACE CREATE INS
224. eplaced with FROM EMP el 8 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CHANGE Note that entering a line number followed by a string will replace the line regardless of what text follows the line number For example SQL gt 2 c old new will change the second line of the buffer to be 2 c old new Command Reference 8 27 CLEAR CLEAR Purpose Resets or erases the current value or setting for the specified option Syntax CL EAR option where option represents one of the following clauses BRE AKS BUFF ER COL UMNS COMP UTES SCR EEN SQL TIMI NG Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause BRE AKS Removes the break definition set by the BREAK command BUFF ER Clears text from the buffer CLEAR BUFFER has the same effect as CLEAR SQL unless you are using multiple buffers see the SET BUFFER command in Appendix F COL UMNS Resets column display attributes set by the COLUMN command to default settings for all columns To reset display attributes for a single column use the CLEAR clause of the COLUMN command CLEAR COLUMNS also clears the ATTRIBUTEs for that column COMP UTES Removes all COMPUTE definitions set by the COMPUTE command SCR EEN Clears your screen 8 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CLEAR SQL Clears the text from SQL buffer CLEAR SQL has the same effect
225. er 6 Accessing Databases tells you how to connect to default and remote databases and how to copy data between databases and between tables on the same database PART Il Reference Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Glossary Starting SOL Plus and Getting Help explains how to access SQL Plus from the operating system prompt and how to access online help Command Reference provides a summary of SQL Plus commands and detailed descriptions of each SQL Plus command in alphabetical order COPY Command Messages and Codes lists copy command error messages their causes and appropriate actions for error recovery Release 8 1 7 Enhancements describes enhancements to SOL Plus in release 8 1 7 SOL Plus Limits lists the maximum values for elements of SOL Plus SQL Command List lists the major SQL commands and clauses Security explains how to restrict access to certain SQL Plus and SQL commands Obsolete SQL Plus Commands provides information on Obsolete SOL Plus commands Glossary defines technical terms associated with Oracle and SQL Plus XV Related Documents Related documentation includes the following publications xvi SQL Plus Accessibility Guide for Windows SQL Plus Quick Reference PL SQL User s Guide and Reference Oracle8i SQL Reference Oracle amp i Concepts OracleSi Administrator s Guide Oracle8i Backup and Recovery
226. er file to be used while starting up the instance If PFILE is not specified then the default STARTUP parame ter file is used The default file used is platform specific For example the default file is ORACLE_HOME dbs init ORACLE_SID ora on UNIX and ORACLE HOME database initORCL ora on Windows EXCLUSIVE Signifies that the database can only be mounted and opened by the cur rent instance it cannot be opened simultaneously by multiple instances Cannot be used with SHARED PARALLEL or NOMOUNT If no mounting option is specified EXCLUSIVE is assigned by default Command Reference 8 133 STARTUP PARALLEL Must be specified if the database is to be mounted by multiple instances concurrently Cannot be used with EXCLUSIVE or NOMOUNT Invalid if the initialization parameter SINGLE_PROCESS is set to TRUE SHARED Synonym for PARALLEL RETRY Specifies that opening the database should be attempted every five sec onds if the instance is busy being recovered by another instance When an instance is being recovered by another instance the down instance cannot open the database until recovery is complete If the database cannot be opened for any other reason RETRY does not attempt to open the database again This option is only available for instances operating in PARALLEL mode MOUNT dbname Mounts a database but does not open it dbname is the name of the database to mount or open If no database name is specified the databas
227. erence RECOVER the file is not found SQL Plus prompts you for a filename displaying a generated filename as a suggestion If you specify neither AUTOMATIC nor LOGFILE SQL Plus prompts you for a filename displaying the generated filename as a suggestion You can then accept the generated filename or replace it with a fully qualified filename If you know the archived filename differs from what Oracle would generate you can save time by using the LOGFILE clause FROM location STANDBY DATABASE Specifies the location from which the archived redo log file group is read The value of location must be a fully specified file location follow ing the conventions of your operating system If you omit this parame ter SQL Plus assumes the archived redo log file group is in the location specified by the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST or LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_1 Recovers the standby database using the control file and archived redo log files copied from the primary database The standby database must be mounted but not open Recovers the entire database UNTIL CANCEL Specifies an incomplete cancel based recovery Recovery proceeds by prompting you with the suggested filenames of archived redo log files and recovery completes when you specify CANCEL instead of a file name UNTIL CHANGE integer Specifies an incomplete change based recovery integer is the number of the System Change Number SCN following the last ch
228. erence SET In multi line rows the column separator does not print between col umns that begin on different lines The column separator does not appear on blank lines produced by BREAK SKIP n and does not over write the record separator See SET RECSEP in this chapter for more information COM PATIBILITY V7 V8 NATIVE Specifies the version of Oracle to which you are currently connected Set COMPATIBILITY to V7 for Oracle7 or V8 for Oracle8 and Oracle8i Set COMPATIBILITY to NATIVE if you wish the database to determine the setting for example if connected to Oracle8 or Oracle8i compatibil ity would default to V8 COMPATIBILITY must be correctly set for the version of Oracle to which you are connected otherwise you will be unable to run any SOL commands Note You can set COMPATIBILITY to V7 when connected to Oracle8i This enables you to run Oracle7 SQL against Oracle8i CON CAT c ON OFF Sets the character you can use to terminate a substitution variable refer ence if you wish to immediately follow the variable with a character that SQL Plus would otherwise interpret as a part of the substitution variable name SQL Plus resets the value of CONCAT to a period when you switch CONCAT on COPYC OMMIT 0 n Controls the number of batches after which the COPY command com mits changes to the database COPY commits rows to the destination database each time it copies n row batches Valid values are zero
229. erence SET SQL gt appinfo is ON and set to SOL Plus To change the default text enter SQL gt SI SQL gt S ET APPI This is SQL Plus HOW APP INFO SQL gt appinfo is ON and set to This is SQL Plus To make sure that registration has taken place enter SQL gt VARIABLI SQL gt VAI RIABLI ry Bi SQL gt EXI ECUT SQL gt PRINT MOD MOD MOD VARCHAR2 50 ACT VARCHAR2 40 E DBMS APPLICATION _INFO READ MODULE MOD ACT This is SQL Plus AUTORECOVERY To set the recovery mode to AUTOMATIC enter To specify a TTITLE and format a column on the same line enter TLE LEFT SALARTIES COLUMN SAL FORMAT 9 999 SQL gt SET AUTORECOVERY ON SQL gt RECOVER DATABASE CMDSEP SQL gt SET SEP SQL gt TTI SQL gt SELECT ENAME SAL FROM 2 WHERE JOB CLERK r Command Reference 8 113 SET The following output results SALARTES EINAME SAL SMITH 800 ADAMS 1 100 JAMES 950 MILLER 1 300 COLSEP To set the column separator to enter SQL gt SET COLSEP SQL gt SELECT ENAME JOB DEPTNO 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE DEPINO 20 The following output results ENAME JOB DEPTNO SMITH CLERK 20 JONES MANAGER 20 SCO
230. erence Release 8 1 7 Part No A82950 01 Oracle Corporation welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document Your input is an important part of the information used for revision Did you find any errors Is the information clearly presented Do you need more information If so where Are the examples correct Do you need more examples What features did you like most If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement please indicate the document title and part number and the chapter section and page number if available You can send com ments to us in the following ways Electronic mail sqlplus us oracle com FAX 61 3 9690 0043 Attention SQL Plus Documentation Manager Postal service SQL Plus Documentation Manager Australian Product Development Center Oracle Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 324 St Kilda Road Melbourne VIC 3004 Australia If you would like a reply please give your name address telephone number and optionally elec tronic mail address If you have problems with the software please contact your local Oracle Support Services xi xii Preface The SQL Plus pronounced sequel plus User s Guide and Reference introduces the SQL Plus program and its uses It also provides a detailed description of each SOL Plus command xiii Intended Audience Structure xiv This Guide addresses business and technical profession
231. es To create stored procedures you use SQL CREATE commands The following SQL CREATE commands are used to create stored procedures a CREATE FUNCTION a CREATE LIBRARY 2 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Entering and Executing Commands a CREATE PACKAGE a CREATE PACKAGE BODY a CREATE PROCEDURE a CREATE TRIGGER a CREATE TYPE Entering any of these commands places you in PL SQL mode where you can enter your PL SQL subprogram For more information see the section Running PL SQL Blocks in this chapter When you are done typing your PL SQL subprogram enter a period on a line by itself to terminate PL SQL mode To run the SQL command and create the stored procedure you must enter RUN or slash A semicolon will not execute these CREATE commands When you use CREATE to create a stored procedure a message appears if there are compilation errors To view these errors you use SHOW ERRORS For example SQL gt SHOW ERRORS PROCEDURE ASSIGNVL For more information about the SHOW command see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 To execute a PL SQL statement that references a stored procedure you can use the EXECUTE command EXECUTE runs the PL SQL statement that you enter immediately after the command For example SQL gt EXECUTE ID EMP_MANAGEMENT GET_ID BLAKE For more information about the EXECUTE command see the Command Refer
232. es see the PRINT com mand in this chapter AUTORECOVERY ON OFF ON sets the RECOVER command to automatically apply the default filenames of archived redo log files needed during recovery No interac tion is needed when AUTORECOVERY is set to ON provided the nec essary files are in the expected locations with the expected names The filenames used when AUTORECOVERY is ON are derived from the values of the initialization parameters LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST and LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT OFF the default option requires that you enter the filenames manually or accept the suggested default filename given AUTOT RACE ON OFF TRACE ONLY EXP LAIN STAT ISTICS Displays a report on the execution of successful SQL DML statements SELECT INSERT UPDATE or DELETE The report can include execu tion statistics and the query execution path OFF does not display a trace report ON displays a trace report TRA CEONLY displays a trace report but does not print query data if any EXPLAIN shows the query execution path by performing an EXPLAIN PLAN STATISTICS displays SQL statement statistics Information Command Reference 8 101 SET about EXPLAIN PLAN is documented in the Oracle8i SQL Reference manual Using ON or TRACEONLY with no explicit options defaults to EXPLAIN STATISTICS The TRACEONLY option may be useful to suppress the query data of large queries If STATISTICS is specified SQL Plus still fetches the query data from the server
233. es in SQL Plus or reference them in other PL SQL subprograms that you run in SOL Plus Creating Bind Variables You create bind variables in SQL Plus with the VARIABLE command For example VARIABLE ret_val BER This command creates a bind variable named ret_val with a datatype of NUMBER For more information see the VARIABLE command in Chapter 8 To list all of the bind variables created in a session type VARIABLE without any arguments Referencing Bind Variables You reference bind variables in PL SQL by typing a colon followed immediately by the name of the variable For example ret_val 1 To change this bind variable in SQL Plus you must enter a PL SQL block For example SQL gt begin 2 ret_val 4 3 end 4 PL SQL procedure successfully completed This command assigns a value to the bind variable named ret_val Displaying Bind Variables To display the value of a bind variable in SQL Plus you use the SQL Plus PRINT command For example SQL gt print ret_val 3 32 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables This command displays a bind variable named ret_val For more information about displaying bind variables see the PRINT command in the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Example 3 17 Creating Referencing and Displaying Bind Variables To declare a local bind variable named id with a datatype of NUMBER enter SQL gt VARIABLE id NUMBER
234. essiesesssssensieresstsntussentestenennententenennententensennennnntennest 4 2 Formatting NUMBER Column ssnin isisa a aiai iae eaei iakin 4 4 Formatting Dat typeSssbnpsnienassian eaa a asea e Tn ns 4 6 Copying Column Display Attributes ss ssssseessssisessestestessistestestestestnsnestesninsissesnsenieneenesneese 4 8 Listing and Resetting Column Display Attributes 0 ccccccessecessnesesesescseeseseseseeecseeeens 4 8 Suppressing and Restoring Column Display Attributes 0 0cc ccc cece cece ceeeeenetenenens 4 9 Printing a Line of Characters after Wrapped Column Values cccccscseceeeeteeeees 4 9 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines 0cc ccc cette eeeeees 4 11 Suppressing Duplicate Values in Break Columns 0 ccccecccccsseeeceeeeececeeeeseecececessneneseeens 4 12 Inserting Space when a Break Column s Value Changes ccccccssseseeesesessseseseseneneeseees 4 13 Inserting Space after Every ROW ccccceccccccseseeesseeseececeeesseecesesesesseeseseseseseseseseseseneseseseseeees 4 13 Using Multiple Spacing Techniques cccccccccssesecesseescscscssseseececssssssseececssesessseseseseseesenens 4 14 Listing and Removing Break Definitions 0 cccccc cece ecceeeececeeseeeseeceneeeseseseseneseneasesees 4 15 Computing Summary Lines when a Break Column s Value Changes cccccsseeeeees 4 15 Computing Summary Lines at the End of the Report cece ceeeeeeseeeeeteneeeeees 4 19 Computing
235. et of two or more redo log files The set of redo log files for a database is collectively referred to as the database s redo log The redo log is used to record changes made to data If for example there is a database failure the redo log is used to recover the database To protect against a failure involving the redo log itself Oracle allows a mirrored redo log so that two or more copies of the redo log can be maintained on different disks ARCHIVELOG Mode Operating a database in ARCHIVELOG mode enables the archiving of the online redo log The ARCHIVE LOG command permits a complete recovery from disk failure as well as instance failure because all changes made to the database are permanently saved in an archived redo log For more information about redo log files and database archiving modes see the Oracle amp i Concepts manual For information about using the ARCHIVE LOG command see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 To automatically begin archiving enter SQL gt ARCHIVE LOG START To list the details of the current log file being archived enter SQL gt ARCHIVE LOG LIST SQL Plus displays results similar to the following Database log mode Archive Mode Automatic archival Enabled Archive destination vobs oracle dbs arch Oldest online log sequence 221 Next log sequence to archive 222 Current log sequence 222 5 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Database Recovery Database Recovery If a
236. etting specified in the MARKUP command a Ifyou use a title in your output then SQL Plus starts a new HTML table for output rows that appear after the title Your browser may format column widths of each table differently depending on the width of data in each column a SET COLSEP and RECSEP only produce output in HTML reports when PREFORMAT is ON Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help 7 7 Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command RESTRICT Option R ESTRICT 1 2 3 Allows you to disable certain commands that interact with the operat ing system This is similar to disabling the same commands in the Prod uct User Profile PUP table However commands disabled with the RESTRICT option are disabled even if there is no connection to a server and remain disabled until SQL Plus terminates If no RESTRICT option is active than all commands can be used unless disabled in the PUP table If RESTRICT 3 is used then LOGIN SQL is not read GLOGIN SQL is read but restricted commands used will fail Table 7 1 shows the commands disabled in each restriction level Table 7 1 Commands Disabled by Restriction Level Command Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 EDIT disabled disabled disabled GET disabled HOST disabled disabled disabled SAVE disabled disabled SPOOL disabled disabled START disabled STORE disabled disabled SILENT Option S ILENT Suppresses all SQL Plus information and prompt messages including the command
237. execute SQL commands and PL SQL blocks and to perform many additional tasks as well Through SQL Plus you can Basic Concepts enter edit store retrieve and run SOL commands and PL SQL blocks format perform calculations on store print and create web output of query results list column definitions for any table access and copy data between SQL databases send messages to and accept responses from an end user perform database administration The following definitions explain concepts central to SQL Plus command An instruction you give SQL Plus or Oracle block A group of SOL and PL SQL commands related to one another through procedural logic table The basic unit of storage in Oracle query A SQL command specifically a SQL SELECT command that retrieves information from one or more tables query results The data retrieved by a query report Query results formatted by you through SQL Plus commands Who Can Use SQL Plus The SQL Plus SOL and PL SQL command languages are powerful enough to serve the needs of users with some database experience yet straightforward enough for new users who are just learning to work with Oracle 1 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using this Guide The design of the SOL Plus command language makes it easy to use For example to give a column labelled ENAME in the database the clearer heading Employee you might enter the following command COLUMN ENAME HEADING E
238. expand the file STATS to include the minimum sum and average of the number column You may have noticed that SQL Plus prompted you twice for the value of GROUP_COL and once for the value of NUMBER_COL in Example 3 12 and that each GROUP_COL or NUMBER_COL had a single ampersand in front of it If you were to add three more functions using a single ampersand before each to the command file SOL Plus would prompt you a total of four times for the value of the number column You can avoid being re prompted for the group and number columns by adding a second ampersand in front of each GROUP_COL and NUMBER_COL in STATS SQL Plus automatically DEFINEs any substitution variable preceded by two ampersands but does not DEFINE those preceded by only one ampersand When you have DEFINEd a variable SQL Plus substitutes the value of variable for each substitution variable referencing variable in the form amp variable or amp amp variable SQL Plus will not prompt you for the value of variable in this session until you UNDEFINE variable Example 3 13 Using Double Ampersands To expand the command file STATS using double ampersands and then run the file first suppress the display of each line before and after substitution 3 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Writing Interactive Commands SQL gt S VERIFY OFF Now retrieve and edit STATS by entering the following commands SQL gt GET STATS
239. formation Manipulating Commands 3 17 Saving Commands for Later Use Modifying Command Files You can modify an existing command file in two ways a using the EDIT command a using GET the SQL Plus editing commands and SAVE To edit an existing command file with the EDIT command follow the word EDIT with the name of the file For example to edit an existing file named PROFIT that has the extension SQL enter the following command SQL gt EDIT PROFIT Remember that EDIT assumes the file extension SQL if you do not specify one To edit an existing file using GET the SOL Plus editing commands and SAVE first retrieve the file with GET then edit the file with the SQL Plus editing commands and finally save the file with the SAVE command Note that if you want to replace the contents of an existing command file with the command or block in the buffer you must use the SAVE command and follow the filename with the word REPLACE For example SQL gt GET MYREPORT 1 SELECT FROM EMP SQL gt C ENAME JOB 1 SELECT ENAME JOB FROM EMP SQL gt SAVE MYREPORT REPLACE Wrote file MYREPORT If you want to append the contents of the buffer to the end of an existing command file use the SAVE command and follow the filename with the word APPEND SQL gt SAVE file_name APPEND Exiting from a Command File with a Return Code
240. g chapters and appendices are covered in this section a Starting SOL Plus and Getting Help a Command Reference l Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help This chapter explains how to access SQL Plus from the operating system prompt and discusses the following topics a Starting SOL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command Getting Help Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help 7 1 Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command You use the SQLPLUS command at the operating system prompt to start SQL Plus SQLPLUS Options Logon Start where Options has the following syntax M ARKUP markup_option R ESTRICT 1 2 3 S ILENT and markup_option has the following syntax HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FORMAT ON OFF Logon has the following syntax username password connect_identifier AS SYSOPER SYSDBA NOLOG Start has the following syntax file_name ext arg You have the option of entering logon If you do not specify logon and do specify start SQL Plus assumes that the first line of the command file contains a valid logon If neither start nor logon are specified SOL Plus prompts for logon information The following sections contain descriptions of SQLPLUS command terms Options HELP Option Displays the usage and syntax for the SQLPLUS command
241. g examples show that the WHENEVER SQLERROR command does not have any effect on SQL Plus commands but does on SQL commands and PL SQL blocks SQL gt WHENEVER SOLERROR EXIT SOQL SQLCODE SQL gt COLUMN ENAME HEADIING EMPLOYEE NAME Unknown COLUMN option HEADIING SQL gt show non_existed_option Unknown SHOW option NON_EXISTED_OPTION SQL gt get non_existed_file sql 8 154 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference WHENEVER SQLERROR Unable to open NON_EXISTED_FILE SQL The following PL SQL block error causes SQL Plus to exit and return the SQL error code SQL gt WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SOQL SQLCODE SQL gt BEGIN 2 select column_does_not_exiSt from dual 3 end 4 select column_does_not_exiSt from dual RROR at line 2 RA 06550 line 2 column 10 LS 00201 identifier COLUMN_DOES NOT_EXIST must be declared RA 06550 line 2 column 3 L SQL SQL Statement ignored ea O vow Disconnected from Oracle Command Reference 8 155 WHENEVER SQLERROR 8 156 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference A COPY Command Messages and Codes This appendix lists error messages generated by the COPY command For error messages generated by Oracle refer to the Oracle8i Error Messages manual COPY Command Messages and Codes A 1 CPY0002 Il
242. g for the DNAME column to allow HTML hyperlinks to be correctly created in this column of the output data COLUMN DNAME HEADING Department ENTMAP OFF COLUMN LOC HEADING Location SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON enables SQL Plus to write HTML to a spool file The following SPOOL command triggers the writing of the lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt tags to the named file SPOOL report htm1 After the SPOOL command anything entered or displayed on standard output is written to the spool file report html Enter a SQL query SELECT lt A HREF http oracle com DNAME html gt DNAME lt A gt DNAME LOC Formatting Query Results 4 39 Creating Web Reports FROM DEPT ORDER BY DEPTNO Enter the SPOOL OFF command SPOOL OFF The lt BODY gt and lt HTML gt tags are appended to the spool file report html before it is closed The output from report sq is a file report html This is a standalone web page that can be loaded into a web browser Open report html in your web browser It should appear something like the following XX Department Report Netscape File Edit View Go Communicator Help 3 Back Reload Home Search Netscape Print Security 7 A Bookmarks Af Location file 7 FI ch4_egs report html TETA The SQL Plus command in this example contains several items of usage worth noting a The hyphen used to
243. gged on as scott tiger and want to change the password to tigertiger SQL gt passw Changing password for scott Old password tiger New password tigertiger Retype new password tigertiger Password changed Suppose you are logged on as a DBA and want to change the password for user usera currently identified by passa to passusera SQL gt passw usera Changing password for usera New password passusera Retype new password passusera Password changed Command Reference 8 77 PAUSE PAUSE Purpose Displays an empty line followed by a line containing text then waits for the user to press Return or displays two empty lines and waits for the user s response Syntax PAU SE text Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the clause or term text Represents the text you wish to display Enter PAUSE followed by no text to display two empty lines Usage Notes Because PAUSE always waits for the user s response it is best to use a message that tells the user explicitly to press Return PAUSE reads input from the terminal if a terminal is available even when you have designated the source of the command input as a file For information on pausing between pages of a report see the PAUSE variable of the SET command later in this chapter Example To print Adjust paper and press RETURN to continue and to have SQL Plus wait for the user to press Return you might include the fol
244. grams Bind Variable exits the subprogram and returns you to SQL Plus ROLLBACK Executes a ROLLBACK statement and abandons pending changes to the database before exiting EXIT with no clauses commits and exits with a value of SUCCESS Command Reference 8 67 EXIT Usage Notes EXIT allows you to specify an operating system return code This allows you to run SQL Plus command files in batch mode and to detect programmatically the occurrence of an unexpected event The manner of detection is operating system specific See the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for details The key words SUCCESS WARNING and FAILURE represent operating system dependent values On some systems WARNING and FAILURE may be indistinguishable Note SUCCESS FAILURE and WARNING are not reserved words The range of operating system return codes is also restricted on some operating systems This limits the portability of EXIT n and EXIT variable between platforms For example on UNIX there is only one byte of storage for return codes therefore the range for return codes is limited to zero to 255 If you make a syntax error in the EXIT options or use a non numeric variable SQL Plus performs an EXIT FAILURE COMMIT For information on exiting conditionally see the WHENEVER SQLERROR and WHENEVER OSERROR commands later in this chapter Example The following example commits all uncommitted t
245. gt tag or to an HTML table The default is OFF so out put is written to a HTML table by default You can turn PREFORMAT ON and OFF as required during a session Notes To produce report output using the HTML lt PRE gt tag you must set PREFORMAT ON For example SQLPLUS M HTML ON PREFORMAT ON SET MARKUP HTML ON PREFORMAT ON MARKUP Usage Notes Existing scripts that do not explicitly set PREFORMAT ON will generate output in HTML tables If you want output in HTML lt PRE gt tags you must set PREFORMAT ON Some SQL Plus commands have different behavior when output is directed to an HTML table Commands originally intended to format paper reports may have different meaning for reports intended for web tables a PAGESIZE is the number of rows in an HTML table not the number of lines Each row may contain multiple lines The TTITLE BTITLE and column headings are repeated every PAGESIZE rows a LINESIZE may have an effect on data if wrapping is on or for very long data Depending on data size they may be generated on separate lines which a browser may interpret as a space character a TTITLE and BTITLE content is output to three line positions left center and right and the maximum line width is preset to 90 of the browser window These elements may not align with the main output as expected due to the way they are handled for web output Entity mapping in TTITLE and BTITLE is the same as the general ENTMAP s
246. hat previously entered BREAK commands will not affect queries you run in a given file Computing Summary Lines when a Break Column s Value Changes If you organize the rows of a report into subsets with the BREAK command you can perform various computations on the rows in each subset You do this with the Formatting Query Results 4 15 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines functions of the SOQL Plus COMPUTE command Use the BREAK and COMPUTE commands together in the following forms BREAK ON break_column COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column column column ON break_column You can include multiple break columns and actions such as skipping lines in the BREAK command as long as the column you name after ON in the COMPUTE command also appears after ON in the BREAK command To include multiple break columns and actions in BREAK when using it in conjunction with COMPUTE use these commands in the following forms BREAK ON break_column_l1 SKIP PAGE ON break_column_2 SKIP 1 COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column column column ON break_column_2 The COMPUTE command has no effect without a corresponding BREAK command You can COMPUTE on NUMBER columns and in certain cases on all types of columns For more information about the COMPUTE command see the Command Reference in Chapter 8 The following table lists compute functions and their effects Table 4 1 C
247. he buffer Syntax C HANGE sepchar old sepchar new sepchar Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause sepchar old new myn Represents any non alphanumeric character such as or Use a sep char that does not appear in old or new You can omit the space between CHANGE and the first sepchar Represents the text you wish to change CHANGE ignores case in searching for old For example CHANGE aq aw will find the first occurrence of aq AQ aQ or Aq and change it to aw SQL Plus inserts the new text exactly as you specify it mom If old is prefixed with it matches everything up to and including the first occurrence of old If it is suffixed with it matches the first occurrence of old and everything that follows on that line If it contains an embedded it matches everything from the preceding part of old through the following part of old Represents the text with which you wish to replace old If you omit new and optionally the second and third sepchars CHANGE deletes old from the current line of the buffer Usage Notes CHANGE changes the first occurrence of the existing specified text on the current line of the buffer to the new specified text The current line is marked with an asterisk in the LIST output Command Reference 8 25 CHANGE You can also use CHANGE to modify a line in the buffer that has gener
248. he specified database Like any database connection if you log on or connect as a user whose account has expired SQL Plus prompts you to change your password before you can connect If an account is locked a message is displayed and connection as this user is not permitted until the account is unlocked by your DBA When you connect to a remote database in this manner you can use the complete range of SQL and SQL Plus commands and PL SQL blocks on the database The exact string you enter for the service name depends upon the Net8 protocol your computer uses For more information see CONNECT in Chapter 8 and the Net8 manual appropriate for your protocol or contact your DBA Accessing SQL Databases 6 3 Copying Data from One Database to Another Connecting to a Remote Database as You Start SQL Plus To connect to a remote database when you start SQL Plus include the Net8 service name in your SQLPLUS command in one of the following forms a SQLPLUS SCOTT connect_identifier a SQLPLUS SCOTT TIGER connect_identifier You must use a username and password valid for the remote database and substitute the appropriate service name for the remote database SQL Plus prompts you for username and password as needed starts SQL Plus and connects you to the specified database This is the database used until you CONNECT to another database DISCONNECT or leave SOL Plus Like any database connection if you log on or connect as a user whose acc
249. here a uniquel b SQL Plus displays the fol Execution Plan b uniquel lowing output 0 SELECT STATEME Optimizer CHOOSE Cost 1 Card 263 Bytes 5786 1 0 SORT AGGREGATE 1 NESTED LOOPS Cost 1 Card 263 Bytes 5785 208200 3 2 TABLE ACCESS FULL OF D2_T2 208200 4 2 INDEX UNIQUE SCAN OF D2_I_UNIQUE1 UNIQUE 208200 2 PARALLEL TO SERIAL SELECT ORDERED NO EXPAND USE_NL A2 INDEX A2 PIV_SSF COUNT A1 CO FROM SELECT ROWID A3 A3 UNIQUE1 FROM D AND 2 Al D2_T1 A2 WHERE Al 2_T2 A3 WHERE ROWID BETWEEN 1 CO A2 UNIQUE1 3 PARALLEL COMBINED WITH PAREN 4 PARALLEL COMBINED WITH PAREN Line 0 of the Execution Plan shows the cost based optimizer estimates the number of rows at 263 taking 5786 bytes The total cost of the statement is 1 Lines 2 3 and 4 are marked with asterisks denoting parallel operations For example the NESTED LOOPS step on line 2 is a PARALLEL_TO_SERIAL operation PARALLEL_TO_SERIAL operations execute a SQL statement to produce output serially Line 2 also shows that the parallel query server had the identifier Q8200 3 42 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 4 Formatting Query Results This chapter explains how to forma
250. his context means print position not table col umn n Skips to the start of a new line n times if you omit n one time if you enter zero for n backward to the start of the current line Skips forward n columns backward if you enter a negative value for n Column in this context means print position not table column LE FT CE NTER R IGHT BOLD Left align center and right align data on the current line respectively SQL Plus aligns following data items as a group up to the end of the printspec or the next LEFT CENTER RIGHT or COL command CEN TER and RIGHT use the SET LINESIZE value to calculate the position of the data item that follows Prints data in bold print SQL Plus represents bold print on your termi nal by repeating the data on three consecutive lines On some operat ing systems SOL Plus may instruct your printer to print bolded text on three consecutive lines instead of bold Command Reference 8 141 TTITLE FORMAT text Specifies a format model that determines the format of following data items up to the next FORMAT clause or the end of the command The format model must be a text constant such as A10 or 999 See the COL UMN FORMAT command for more information on formatting and valid format models If the datatype of the format model does not match the datatype of a given data item the FORMAT clause has no effect on that item If no appropriate FORMAT model precedes a given data ite
251. host operating system text editor on the contents of the specified file or on the contents of the buffer EXECUTE 8 66 Executes a single PL SQL statement EXIT 8 67 Terminates SQL Plus and returns control to the operating system GET 8 69 Loads a host operating system file into the SQL buffer HELP 8 70 Accesses the SQL Plus help system HOST 8 71 Executes a host operating system command without leaving SQL Plus INPUT 8 73 Adds one or more new lines after the current line in the buffer LIST 8 75 Lists one or more lines of the SQL buffer PASSWORD 8 77 Allows a password to be changed without echoing the password on an input device PAUSE 8 78 Displays the specified text then waits for the user to press Return PRINT 8 79 Displays the current value of a bind variable PROMPT 8 80 Sends the specified message to the user s screen QUIT 8 67 Terminates SQL Plus and returns control to the operating system QUIT is identical to EXIT RECOVER 8 82 Performs media recovery on one or more tablespaces one or more datafiles or the entire database REMARK 8 88 Begins a comment in a command file REPFOOTER 8 89 Places and formats a specified report footer at the bottom of each report or lists the current REPFOOTER definition REPHEADER 8 91 Places and formats a specified report header at the top of each report or lists the current REPHEADER definition RU 8 95 Lists and executes the SQL command or PL SQL block currently stored i
252. iately follow the variable or parameter by default the period For more information about system variables see the SET command in the Command Reference in Chapter 8 3 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Writing Interactive Commands Passing Parameters through the START Command You can bypass the prompts for values associated with substitution variables by passing values to parameters in a command file through the START command You do this by placing an ampersand amp followed by a numeral in the command file in place of a substitution variable Each time you run this command file START replaces each amp 1 in the file with the first value called an argument after START filename then replaces each amp 2 with the second value and so forth For example you could include the following commands in a command file called MYFILE SELECT FROM EMP WHERE JOB amp 1 AND SAL amp 2 In the following START command SQL Plus would substitute CLERK for amp 1 and 7900 for amp 2 in the command file MYFILE SQL gt START MYFILE CLERK 7900 When you use arguments with the START command SQL Plus DEFINEs each parameter in the command file with the value of the appropriate argument Example 3 14 Passing Parameters through START To create anew command file based on SALES that takes a parameter specifying the job to be displayed enter
253. ieves a command file and runs the command s it contains Use START to run a command file containing SQL commands PL SQL blocks and or SQL Plus commands Follow the START command with the name of the file START file_name If the file has the extension SQL you need not add the period and the extension SQL to the filename Example 3 9 Running a Command File To retrieve and run the command stored in SALES SQL enter SQL gt START SALES SQL Plus runs the commands in the file SALES and displays the results of the commands on your screen formatting the query results according to the SQL Plus commands in the file EMPNO SALESMAN SALARY COMMISSION 7499 ALLEN 1 600 300 7521 WARD 1 250 500 7654 MARTIN 1 250 1 400 7844 TURNER 1 500 0 To see the commands as SQL Plus enters them you can set the ECHO variable of the SET command to ON The ECHO variable controls the listing of the commands in command files run with the START and commands Setting the ECHO variable to OFF suppresses the listing You can also use the at sign command to run a command file SQL gt SALE n The command lists and runs the commands in the specified command file in the same manner as START SET ECHO affects the command as it affects the START command START and leave the last SQL command or PL SQL block in the command file in the buffer 3 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Co
254. ification if you use a default logon Ina default logon SQL Plus typically attempts to log you in using the user name OPS name where name is your operating system username Note that the prefix OPS can be set to any other string of text For exam ple you may wish to change the settings in your INIT ORA parameters file to LOGONname or USERIDname See the Oracle8i Administrator s Guide for information about operating system authentication AS SYSOPER SYSDBA The AS clause allows privileged connections by users who have been granted SYSOPER or SYSDBA system privileges You can also use either of these privileged connections with and NOLOG If you use this option you need to quote the command arguments on many operating systems for example SQLPLUS AS SYSDBA SQLPLUS SYSTEM MANAGER AS SYSOPER Starting SQL Plus and Getting Help 7 9 Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command Start NOLOG Establishes no initial connection to Oracle Before issuing any SQL com mands you must issue a CONNECT command to establish a valid logon Use NOLOG when you want to have a SQL Plus command file prompt for the username password or database specification The first line of this command file is not assumed to contain a logon file_name ext arg Specifies the name of a command file and arguments to run SQL Plus passes the arguments to the command file as if executing the file using the SQL Plus START comm
255. ify the COPY command making sure that the number of col umns in the column list agrees with the number in the destination table COPY Command Messages and Codes A 3 A 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference B Release 8 1 7 Enhancements SQL Plus Release 8 1 7 provides a number of enhancements over previous releases of SQL Plus This appendix describes the enhancements for SQL Plus Release 8 1 7 and earlier releases Release 8 1 7 Enhancements B 1 SQL Plus Release 8 1 7 Enhancements SQL Plus Release 8 1 7 Enhancements SQL Plus Release 8 1 7 gives you the following additional capabilities SQLPLUS MARKUP and SET MARKUP Changes In this release you can use MARKUP HTML ON to produce HTML output in either the lt PRE gt tag or in an HTML table Output to a table uses standard HTML lt TABLE gt lt TR gt and lt TD gt tags to automatically encode the rows and columns resulting from a query Output to an HTML table is now the default behavior when the HTML option is set ON You can generate output using HTML lt PRE gt tags by setting PREFORMAT ON For more information about the SQLPLUS and SET commands see Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command in Chapter 7 and the SET command in Chapter 8 TABLE text TABLE text is anew MARKUP option which allows you to enter attributes for the HTML lt TABLE gt tag You can use this option to set lt TABLE gt tag attributes such as BORDER CELLPADDING CELLSPACING and WIDTH
256. iles recovering 8 82 database name at startup 8 133 Index 7 databases and RECOVERY command 8 82 connecting to default 6 2 8 47 connecting to remote 6 3 8 47 copying data between 6 4 8 49 copying data between tables ona single 6 9 disconnecting without leaving SQL Plus 6 2 8 63 mounting 5 3 opening 5 3 recovering 5 5 8 82 shutting down 5 2 5 3 starting 5 2 DATAFILE clause 8 84 datatype GL9 LONG GL 13 NCHAR GL 14 NCLOB GL 14 NUMBER GL 14 NVARCHAR2 GL 15 RAW GL 18 VARCHAR GL 24 VARCHAR2 GL 25 DATE datatype GL9 date Julian GL 12 DATE clause 8 10 DATE columns changing format 4 6 8 33 8 39 default format 4 6 date storing current in variable for titles 4 30 8 35 8 38 DB2 8 103 DBA 5 2 GL 7 DBA mode 8 133 DBA privilege 8 133 DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package 8 99 DCL GL 8 DDL GL 8 DECLARE command disabling E 6 DECLARE command PL SQL 2 10 default GL 9 database GL 9 Index 8 DEFAULT clause 8 11 DEFINE command 3 21 8 52 GL 24 and host system editor 3 8 8 53 CHAR values 8 52 substitution variables 3 24 8 52 DEFINE variable 3 26 8 103 DEL command 3 2 3 7 8 54 using an asterisk 3 2 8 54 DELETE command disabling E 6 DEMOBLD 1 7 DEMODROP 1 7 DEPT table 1 5 DESCRIBE command SQL Plus 2 16 8 56 connect_identifier 8 56 PL SQL properties listed by 8 57 table properties listed by 8 56 directory GL 9 DISABLED keyword disabling commands E 4 d
257. information about PL SQL see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE without arguments displays a list of all the variables declared in the session VARIABLE followed only by a variable name lists that variable Syntax VAR IABLE variable NUMBER CHAR CHAR n NCHAR NCHAR n VARCHAR2 n NVARCHAR2 n CLOB NCLOB REFCURSOR Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause variable Represents the name of the bind variable you wish to create NUMBER Creates a variable of type NUMBER with a fixed length CHAR Creates a variable of type CHAR character with a length of one CHAR n Creates a variable of type CHAR with a maximum length of n up to 2000 NCHAR Creates a variable of type NCHAR national character with a length of one NCHAR n Creates a variable of type NCHAR with a maximum length of n up to 2000 VARCHAR2 n Creates a variable of type VARCHAR2 with a maximum length of n up to 4000 Command Reference 8 145 VARIABLE NVARCHAR2 n Creates a a variable of type NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING with a maximum length of n up to 4000 CLOB Creates a variable of type CLOB NCLOB Creates a variable of type NCLOB REFCURSOR Creates a variable of type REF CURSOR Usage Notes Bind variables may be used as parameters to stored procedures or may be directly referenced in anonymous PL SQL blocks To display the value of a bind
258. ing ERROR at line 1 ORA 00911 invalid character SQL Plus expects no text after statement terminators on the same line and is unable to recognize the comment 3 Do not put statement termination characters on the same line after comments in a SQL statement or a PL SQL block For example SQL gt select 2 comment comment ERROR at line 2 ORA 00923 FROM keyword not found where expected The semicolon is interpreted as a statement terminator and SQL Plus submits the partially formed SQL command to the server for processing resulting in an error 4 Do not use ampersand characters amp in comments in a SQL statement or PL SQL block For example SQL gt select from this amp that dept Enter value for that old 1 select from this amp that dept new 1 select from this dept DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON 3 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Commands for Later Use SQL Plus interprets text after the ampersand character amp as a substitution variable and prompts for the value of the variable You can SET DEFINE OFF to prevent scanning for the substitution character For more information on substitution and termination characters see DEFINE SQLTERMINATOR and SQLBLANKLINES in the SET command in Chapter 8 Retrieving Comma
259. ing line continuation characters and spacing Command options are concatenated in normal entry Command Reference 8 117 SET z SQL gt SI KUP HTML ON SPOOL ON HEAD lt TITLE gt Employee List lt title gt lt STYLE TYPE TEXT CSS gt lt BODY background yellow gt lt STYLE gt SQL amp gt SET ECHO OFF SQL gt SPOOL EMPLOYEE HTML lt TITLE gt EMPLOYEE LIST lt TITLE gt lt STYLE TYPE TEXT CSS gt lt BODY background yellow lt META NAME GENERATOR CONTENT SOL Plus 8 1 7 gt SQL amp GT SELECT DEPTNO DNAME FROM DEPT lt TABLE BORDER 1 WIDTH 90 gt lt TH gt lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD ALIGN RIGHT gt 10 lt TD gt lt TD gt ACCOUNTING lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD ALIGN RIGHT gt 20 lt TD gt lt TD gt RESEARCH lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD ALIGN RIGHT gt 30 lt TD gt 8 118 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET lt TD gt SALES lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TR gt lt TD ALIGN RIGHT gt 40 lt TD gt lt TD gt OPERATIONS lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TABLE gt lt P gt SQL amp GT EXIT lt BR gt lt BODY gt
260. ing or the width of the FORMAT plus one space for the sign whichever is greater If you do not explic itly use FORMAT then the column s width will always be at least the value of SET NUMWIDTH SQL Plus may round your NUMBER data to fit your format or field width 8 34 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN If a value cannot fit within the column width SQL Plus indicates over flow by displaying a pound sign in place of each digit the width allows If a positive value is extremely large and a numeric overflow occurs when rounding a number then the infinity sign replaces the value Likewise if a negative value is extremely small and a numeric over flow occurs when rounding a number then the negative infinity sign replaces the value HEA DING text Defines a column heading If you do not use a HEADING clause the column s heading defaults to column or expr If text contains blanks or punctuation characters you must enclose it with single or double quotes Each occurrence of the HEADSEP character by default begins a new line For example COLUMN ENAME HEADING Employee Name would produce a two line column heading See the HEADSEP variable of the SET command in this chapter for information on changing the HEADSEP character JUS TIFY L EFT C ENTER C ENTRE R IGHT Aligns the heading If you do not use a JUSTIFY clause headings for NUMBER columns default to
261. ing retrieval position 8 107 setting retrieval size 8 107 NCLOB datatype GL 14 negative infinity sign 8 35 Index 12 Net8 GL 14 GL 21 connect identifier 8 47 protocol 6 3 network GL 14 NEW_VALUE clause 4 29 8 35 storing current date in variable for titles 4 30 8 35 8 38 EWLINE clause 8 35 EWPAGE command F 2 F 4 EWPAGE variable 4 31 8 107 EXT clause 8 14 LS_DATE_FORMAT 8 10 8 39 OAUDIT command disabling E 6 OLIST clause 8 69 OLOG 7 10 NOLOG option 7 10 NOMOUNT clause 8 134 NONE clause WHENEVER OSERROR 8 151 WHENEVER SQLERROR 8 153 OPARALLEL clause 8 86 OPRINT clause 4 17 4 29 8 36 OPROMPT clause 8 11 ORMAL mode 8 128 ULL clause 8 36 ULL value GL 14 ull values setting text displayed 8 36 8 107 ULL variable 8 107 UMBER clause 3 30 8 10 VARIABLE command 8 145 UMBER columns changing format 4 4 8 33 default format 4 4 8 34 NUMBER datatype GL 14 number formats 45 0 45 9 45 comma 4 5 setting default 8 108 NUMBER function 4 16 NUMFORMAT clause in LOGIN SQL 3 19 N N N N N N N N SZZZZZZ Z LZ NUMFORMAT variable 8 108 NUMWIDTH variable 8 108 effect on NUMBER column format 4 4 8 34 NVARCHAR2 columns changing format 4 6 8 32 default format 4 6 8 32 NVARCHAR datatype GL 15 O object GL 15 object type GL 15 object relational model GL 15 objects describing 8 104 obsolete commands BTITLE F 3 COLUMN command D
262. ion When you include action s specifies action s for SQL Plus to take when a SQL SELECT command returns a row The ROW break becomes the innermost break regardless of where you specify it in the BREAK command You should always specify an action when you BREAK on a row ON REPORT action Marks a place in the report where SQL Plus will perform the computa tion you specify in a corresponding COMPUTE command Use BREAK ON REPORT in conjunction with COMPUTE to print grand totals or other grand computed values The REPORT break becomes the outermost break regardless of where you specify it in the BREAK command Note that SQL Plus will not skip a page at the end of a report so you cannot use BREAK ON REPORT SKIP PAGE Refer to the following list for a description of each action SKI P n Skips n lines before printing the row where the break occurred Command Reference 8 21 BREAK SKI P PAGE Skips the number of lines that are defined to be a page before printing the row where the break occurred The number of lines per page can be set via the PAGESIZE clause of the SET command Note that PAGE SIZE only changes the number of lines that SQL Plus considers to be a page Therefore SKIP PAGE may not always cause a physical page break unless you have also specified NEWPAGE 0 Note also that if there is a break after the last row of data to be printed in a report SQL Plus will not skip the page NODUP LICATES Prints bla
263. ion for HTML files This allows you to easily identify the type of your output files and also allows web browsers to 4 38 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Creating Web Reports identify and correctly display your HTML files If no extension is specified the default SOL Plus file extension lst is used You use SPOOL OFF or EXIT to append final HTML tags to the spool file and then close it If you enter another SPOOL filename command the current spool file is closed as for SPOOL OFF or EXIT and a new HTML spool file with the specified name is created You can use the SET MARKUP command to enable or disable HTML output as required Example 4 26 Creating a Standalone Web Report in an Interactive Session You can create HTML output in an interactive SQL Plus session using the SET MARKUP command You can include an embedded style sheet or any other valid text in the HTML lt HEAD gt tag Open a SQL Plus session and enter the following SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON PREFORMAT OFF ENTMAP ON HEAD lt TITLE gt Department Report lt TITLE gt lt STYLE type text css gt lt BODY background yellow gt lt STYLE gt BODY TEXT FFOOFF TABLE WIDTH 50 BORDER 5 You use the COLUMN command to control column output The following COLUMN commands create new heading names for the SQL query output The first command also turns off entity mappin
264. irst three messages displayed by COPY show the values of SET command variables that affect the COPY operation The most important one is LONG which limits the length of a LONG column s value LONG is a datatype similar to CHAR If the source table contains a LONG column COPY truncates values in that column to the length specified by the system variable LONG The variable ARRAYSIZE limits the number of rows that SQL Plus fetches from the database at one time This number of rows makes up a batch The variable COPYCOMMIT sets the number of batches after which COPY commits changes to the database If you set COPYCOMMIT to zero COPY commits changes only after all batches are copied For more information on the variables of the SET command including how to change their settings see the SET command in Chapter 8 After listing the three system variables and their values COPY tells you if a table was dropped created or updated during the copy Then COPY lists the number of rows selected inserted and committed Specifying Another User s Table You can refer to another user s table ina COPY command by qualifying the table name with the username just as you would in your local database or in a query with a database link For example to make a local copy of a table named DEPT owned by the username ADAMS on the database associated with the Net8 connect identifier BOSTONDB you would enter SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER BOSTONDB
265. is SQL gt REM Could have used the BLOCKTERMINATOR default is T SQL gt SELECT 2 3 FRO Command Reference 8 121 SET The following output results D X SQLCONTINUE To set the SQL Plus command continuation prompt to an exclamation point followed by a space enter SQL gt SET SQLCONTINUE SQL Plus will prompt for continuation as follows SQL gt ITLE YEARLY INCOME RIGHT SQL PNO SKIP 2 CENTER PC DIVISION SQL gt SUFFIX To change the default command file extension from the default SQL to UFI enter SQL gt SET SUFFIX UFI If you then enter SQL gt GET EXAMPLE SQL Plus will look for a file named EXAMPLE with an extension of UFI instead of EXAMPLE with an extension of SQL 8 122 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHOW SHOW Purpose Shows the value of a SQL Plus system variable or the current SQL Plus environment Syntax SHO W option where option represents one of the following terms or clauses system_variable ALL BTI TLE ERR ORS FUNCTION PROCEDURE PACKAGE PACKAGE BODY TRIGGER VIEW TYPE TYPE BODY schema name NO ARAMETERS parameter_name Ni ae Y L ER EPH EADER J W wW W Hy Q Q SPOO L SQLCODE T
266. isabling PL SQL commands E 6 SQL commands E 4 SQL Plus commands E 4 DISCONNECT command 6 2 8 63 dismounted database GL 9 display format GL 9 width GL 10 DML GL 8 DOCUMENT command Obsolete commands DOCUMENT F 2 obsolete commands DOCUMENT F 3 REMARK as newer version of F 4 DOCUMENT variable F 2 F 5 DROP command disabling E 6 DUAL table GL 10 DUPLICATES clause 8 22 E ECHO variable 3 16 8 104 EDIT command 3 7 8 64 creating command files with 3 11 defining EDITOR 3 8 8 64 disabling E 5 modifying command files 3 18 8 64 setting default filename 8 104 EDITFILE variable 8 104 editor GL 10 EMBEDDED variable 8 104 EMP table 1 5 empty line displaying 8 78 end user GL 10 Enhancement list Release 8 1 B 3 B 4 enhancement list release 8 1 B 2 entities HTML 4 47 ENTMAP 7 5 ENTMAP clause 4 47 7 5 8 31 error message GL 10 error messages interpreting 2 18 errors making line containing current 3 4 escape characters definition of 8 104 ESCAPE variable 3 26 8 104 example embedded CGI report 4 42 interactive HTML report 4 39 4 41 EXCLUSIVE clause 8 133 EXECUTE command 8 66 disabling E 5 executing a CREATE command 2 8 execution statistics including in report 8 101 EXIT clause WHENEVER OSERROR 8 151 WHENEVER SQLERROR 8 153 EXIT command 2 4 8 67 BindVariable clause 8 67 COMMIT clause 8 67 disabling E 5 FAILURE clause 8 67 inacommand file 8 132 ROLLBACK clause
267. itors perform the same general functions as the SQL Plus editing commands but you may find them more familiar You can run your host operating system s default text editor without leaving SQL Plus by entering the EDIT command SQL gt EDIT Manipulating Commands 3 7 Saving Commands for Later Use EDIT loads the contents of the buffer into your system s default text editor You can then edit the text with the text editor s commands When you tell the text editor to save edited text and then exit the text is loaded back into the buffer To load the buffer contents into a text editor other than the default use the SOL Plus DEFINE command to define a variable EDITOR to hold the name of the editor For example to define the editor to be used by EDIT as EDT enter the following command SQL gt DEFINE _EDITOR EDT You can also define the editor to be used by EDIT in your user or site profile See Setting Up Your SQL Plus Environment later in this chapter and the DEFINE and EDIT commands in Chapter 8 for more information Saving Commands for Later Use Through SQL Plus you can store one or more commands in a file called a command file After you create a command file you can retrieve edit and run it Use command files to save commands for use over time especially complex commands or PL SQL blocks Storing Commands in Command Files You can store one or more SQL commands PL SQL blocks and SOL
268. ive timer by STARTing additional timers before STOPping the first SQL Plus nests each new timer within the preced ing one The timer most recently STARTed becomes the current timer SHOW Lists the current timer s name and timing data STOP Lists the current timer s name and timing data then deletes the timer If any other timers are active the next most recently STARTed timer becomes the current timer Enter TIMING with no clauses to list the number of active timers Usage Notes You can use this data to do a performance analysis on any commands or blocks run during the period For information about the data TIMING displays see the Oracle installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system Refer to SET TIMING ON for information on automatically displaying timing data after each SQL command or PL SQL block you run To delete all timers use the CLEAR TIMING command 8 138 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference TIMING Examples To create a timer named SQL_TIMER enter SQL gt TIMING START SQL TI ER To list the current timer s title and accumulated time enter SQL gt TIMING SHOW To list the current timer s title and accumulated time and to remove the timer enter SQL gt TIMING STOP Command Reference 8 139 TTITLE TTITLE Purpose Places and formats a specified title at the top of each report page or lists the current TTITLE definition The old form of TTITL
269. known Nulls are not equal to any specific value even to each other Comparisons with nulls are always false NULL value The absence of a value NUMBER datatype A standard Oracle datatype A NUMBER column can contain a number with or without a decimal point and a sign and can have from 1 to 105 decimal digits only 38 digits are significant NVARCHAR2 datatype A standard Oracle datatype The NVARCHAR2 datatype specifies a variable length NCHAR string NVARCHAR2 width specifications refer to the number of characters if the national character set is fixed width and to the number of bytes if the national character set is varying width The maximum column size allowed is 4000 bytes object An object is an instance of an object type In Oracle8 objects can be persistent i e stored in the database or transient i e PL SQL or Oracle Call Interface OCD variables See also object type object relational model A database model that combines the key aspects of the relational and object data models into a single system Oracle8 is an object relational database system object type A user defined type that models a structure and behavior of an object Equivalent to the concept of a class in different programming languages In Oracle8 object types have public interfaces with attributes and methods Object types are also known as abstract data types online redo log 1 Redo log files that have not been archived but ar
270. lace one blank line between departments enter the following command SQL gt BREAK ON DEPTINO SKIP 1 Now rerun the query SQL gt SQL Plus displays the results DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 CLARK 2450 ILLER 1300 20 SMITH 00 ADAMS 1100 30 ALLE 1600 JAMES 950 TURNER 1500 WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 9 rows selected Inserting Space after Every Row You may wish to insert blank lines or a blank page after every row To skip n lines after every row use BREAK in the following form BREAK ON ROW SKIP n Formatting Query Results 4 13 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines To skip a page after every row use BREAK ON ROW SKIP PAGE Note SKIP PAGE does not cause a physical page break unless you have also specified NEWPAGE 0 Using Multiple Spacing Techniques Suppose you have more than one column in your ORDER BY clause and wish to insert space when each column s value changes Each BREAK command you enter replaces the previous one Thus if you want to use different spacing techniques in one report or insert space after the value changes in more than one ordered column you must specify multiple columns and actions in a single BREAK command Example 4 11 Combining Spacing Techniques First add another column to the current query SQL gt L 1 SELECT DEPINO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL lt 2500 4 ORDER
271. last PL SQL block and once upon reaching the slash at the end of the file Placing Comments in Command Files You can enter comments in a command file in three ways a using the SQL Plus REMARK command for single line comments a using the SQL comment delimiters for single of multi line comments a using ANSI ISO American National Standards Institute International Standards Organization comments for single line comments For further information about using comments in command files see Notes on Placing Comments later in this chapter Manipulating Commands 3 11 Saving Commands for Later Use Using the REMARK Command Use the REMARK command on a line by itself in the command file followed by comments on the same line To continue the comments on additional lines enter additional REMARK commands Do not place a REMARK command between different lines of a single SQL command REMARK Commissions report REMARK to be run monthly COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN COLUMN SAL HEADING SALARY FORMAT 99 999 COLUMN CO HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 99 990 REMARK Includes only salesmen LEC H PNO ENAME SAL COM FROM EMP WHERE JOB SALESMAN Using Enter the SQL comment delimiters on separate lines in your command file on the same line as a SQL command or on a line in a PL SQL block The co
272. le COPY command SQL gt COPY FROM SCOTT TIGER BOSTONDB gt TO TODD FOX CHICAGODB gt CREATE NEWDEPT DNUMBER DNAME CITY gt USING SELECT FROM DEPT To specify a database in the FROM or TO clause you must have a valid username and password for the local and remote database s and know the appropriate Net8 service name s COPY obeys Oracle security so the username you specify must have been granted access to tables for you to have access to tables For information on what databases are available to you contact your DBA When you copy to your local database from a remote database you can omit the TO clause When you copy to a remote database from your local database you can omit the FROM clause When you copy between remote databases you must include both clauses However including both clauses benefits the readability of your scripts The COPY command behaves differently based on whether the destination table already exists and on the action clause you enter CREATE in the example above For more information see the section Controlling Treatment of the Destination Table later in this chapter By default the copied columns have the same names in the destination table that they have in the source table If you want to give new names to the columns in the destination table enter the new names in parentheses after the destination table name If you enter any column names you must
273. lected by the query If you do not specify any columns the copied columns will have the same names in the destination table as they had in the source if COPY creates destination_table 8 50 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COPY USING query Specifies a SQL query SELECT command determining which rows and columns COPY copies Usage Notes To enable the copying of data between Oracle and non Oracle databases NUMBER columns are changed to DECIMAL columns in the destination table Hence if you are copying between Oracle databases a NUMBER column with no precision will be changed to a DECIMAL 38 column When copying between Oracle databases you should use SQL commands CREATE TABLE AS and INSERT or you should ensure that your columns have a precision specified The SQL Plus SET variable LONG limits the length of LONG columns that you copy If any LONG columns contain data longer than the value of LONG COPY truncates the data SQL Plus performs a commit at the end of each successful COPY If you set the SQL Plus SET variable COPYCOMMIT to a positive value n SQL Plus performs a commit after copying every n batches of records The SQL Plus SET variable ARRAYSIZE determines the size of a batch Some operating environments require that service names be placed in double quotes Examples The following command copies the entire EMP table to a table named WESTEMP Note that the tables are located in two different databases If WE
274. legal or missing APPEND CREATE INSERT or REPLACE option Cause An internal COPY function has invoked COPY with a create option flag value that is out of range Action Please contact your Oracle Worldwide Customer Support Services rep resentative CPY0003 Internal Error logical host number out of range Cause An internal COPY function has been invoked with a logical host number value that is out of range Action Please contact your Oracle Worldwide Customer Support Services rep resentative CPY0004 Source and destination table and column names don t match Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists at least one column name in the destination table does not match the corresponding column name in the optional column name list or in the SELECT command Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the column names and their respective order in the destination table match the column names and column order in the optional column list or in the SELECT command CPY0005 Source and destination column attributes don t match Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists at least one column in the destination table does not have the same datatype as the corresponding column in the SELECT command Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the datatypes for items being selected agree with the destination You can use TO_DATE TO_ CHAR and TO_NUMBER to make conversions
275. lier versions of some SQL Plus commands While these older commands still function within SQL Plus they are no longer supported It is recommended that you use the alternative SQL Plus commands listed in the following table Obsolete SQL Plus Commands F 1 SQL Plus Obsolete Command Alternatives SQL Plus Obsolete Command Alternatives Obsolete Alternative Description of Alternative Command Command Command BTITLE BTITLE Places and formats a title at the bottom of each old form on page 8 24 report page or lists the current BTITLE definition COLUMN DEFAULT COLUMN CLEAR Resets column display attributes to default values on page 8 31 DOCUMENT REMARK Places a comment which SQL Plus does not on page 8 88 interpret as a command NEWPAGE SET NEWPAGE Sets the number of blank lines to be printed from on page 8 107 _ the top of each page to the top title SET BUFFER EDIT Enables the editing of the SQL Plus command on page 8 64 buffer or the contents of a saved file Use the SOL Plus SAVE GET and START commands to create and use external files SET CLOSECURSOR none Obsolete SET DOCUMENT none Obsolete SET MAXDATA none Obsolete SET SCAN SET DEFINE Sets the character used to prefix substitution on page 8 103 variables SET SPACE SET COLSEP Sets the text to be printed between SELECTed on p
276. lines of a SQL com mand or PL SQL block ON sets the prompt to be the line number OFF sets the prompt to the value of SQLPROMPT SQLPRE FIX lc Sets the SQL Plus prefix character While you are entering a SQL com mand or PL SQL block you can enter a SQL Plus command on a sepa rate line prefixed by the SQL Plus prefix character SQL Plus will execute the command immediately without affecting the SQL com mand or PL SQL block that you are entering The prefix character must be a non alphanumeric character SQLP ROMPT SQL gt text Sets the SQL Plus command prompt SQLT ERMINATOR c ON OFF Sets the character used to end and execute SQL commands to c It can not be an alphanumeric character or a whitespace OFF means that SQL Plus recognizes no command terminator you terminate a SQL 8 110 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET command by entering an empty line If SQLBLANKLINES is set ON you must use the BLOCKTERMINATOR to terminate a SQL command ON resets the terminator to the default semicolon SUF FIX SQL text Sets the default file extension that SOL Plus uses in commands that refer to command files SUFFIX does not control extensions for spool files TAB ON OFF Determines how SQL Plus formats white space in terminal output OFF uses spaces to format white space in the output ON uses the TAB char acter TAB settings are every eight characters The default value for TAB is system dependent T
277. long expression to display the result in a dollar format and to display lt NULL gt for null values you might enter SQL gt COLUMN SAL COMM BONUS EXPENSES INS TAX ALIAS NET SQL gt COLUMN NET FORMAT 9 999 999 99 NULL lt NULL gt Command Reference 8 37 COLUMN Note that the example divides this column specification into two commands The first defines the alias NET and the second uses NET to define the format Also note that in the first command you must enter the expression exactly as you entered it or will enter it in the SELECT command Otherwise SQL Plus cannot match the COLUMN command to the appropriate column To wrap long values in a column named REMARKS you can enter SQL gt COLUMN REMARKS FORMAT A20 WRAP For example CUSTOMER DATE QUANTITY REMARKS 123 25 AUG 86 144 This order must be s hipped by air freigh t to ORD If you replace WRAP with WORD_WRAP REMARKS looks like this CUSTOMER DATE QUANTITY REMARKS 123 25 AUG 86 144 This order must be shipped by air freight to ORD If you specify TRUNCATE REMARKS looks like this CUSTOMER DATE QUANTITY REMARKS 123 25 AUG 86 144 This order must be s In order to print the current date and the name of each job in the top title enter the following For details on creating a date variable see Displaying the Current Date in Titles under Defining Page
278. lowing PAUSE command in a command file SET PAUSE OFF PAUSE Adjust paper and press RETURN to continue SELECT 8 78 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PRINT PRINT Purpose Displays the current value of bind variables For more information on bind variables see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference Syntax PRI NT variable Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the clause or term variable Represents the names of the bind variables whose values you wish to display Enter PRINT with no variables to print all bind variables Usage Notes Bind variables are created using the VARIABLE command For more information and examples see the VARIABLE command in this chapter You can control the formatting of the PRINT output just as you would query output For more information see the formatting techniques described in Chapter 4 To automatically display bind variables referenced in a successful PL SQL block or used in an EXECUTE command use the AUTOPRINT clause of the SET command For more information see the SET command in this chapter Example The following example illustrates a PRINT command SQL gt VARIABLE n NUMBER SQL gt BEGIN Command Reference 8 79 PROMPT PROMPT Purpose Sends the specified message or a blank line to the user s screen Syntax PRO MPT text Terms and Clauses Refer to
279. lready using your computer you need not log off or reset it Simply exit from the program you are using if any You should see one or more characters at the left side of the screen This is the operating system s command prompt which signals that the operating system is ready to accept a command In this Guide the operating system s prompt will be represented by a dollar sign Your computer s operating system prompt may be different Enter the command SQLPLUS and press Return This is an operating system command that starts SQL Plus SQLPLUS Note Some operating systems expect you to enter commands in lowercase letters If your system expects lowercase enter the SQLPLUS command in lowercase SQL Plus displays its version number the current date and copyright information and prompts you for your username the text displayed on your system may differ slightly SQL Plus Release 8 1 7 0 0 0 Production on Thu Aug 3 16 29 01 2000 c Copyright 2000 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved Enter user name Enter your username and press Return SOL Plus displays the prompt Enter password Enter your password and press Return again For your protection your password does not appear on the screen Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 3 Getting Started The process of entering your username and password is called logging in SQL Plus displays the version of Oracle to which you connected and the
280. lt HTML gt Disconnected from Oracle8i Enterprise Edition Release 8 1 7 0 0 Production With the Partitioning option JServer Release 8 1 7 0 0 Production The previous SQL Plus session spools the HTML output to the spool file employee html This file is a standalone web page as follows File Edit View Go Communicator Help Back fowsd Reload Home Seach Netscape Print Securty Stop 7 Bookmarks 4 Location file C AWork 817GenUGR Im employee html lt Document Done Command Reference 8 119 SET SERVEROUTPUT To enable the display of text within a PL SQL block using DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_ LINE enter SQL gt SET SERVEROUTPUT ON The following example shows what happens when you execute an anonymous procedure with SET SERVEROUTPUT ON SQL gt BEGIN 2 DBMS _OUTPUT PUT_LINE Task is complete 3 END 4 Task is complete PL SQL procedure successfully completed The following example shows what happens when you create a trigger with SET SERVEROUTPUT ON SQL gt CREATE TRIGGER SERVER_TRIG BEFORE INSERT OR UPDATE gt OR DELETE 2 ON SERVER_TAB 3 BEGIN 4 DBMS OUTPUT PUT_LINE Task is complete 5 END 6 uf Trigger created SQL gt INSERT INTO SERVER_TAB VALUES TEXT Task is complete 1 row created To set the output to WORD_WRAPPED ente
281. lt td gt lt td gt lt input type password name password size 10 align left gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt Connect string lt td gt lt td gt lt input type text name db size 10 align left gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt Report to run lt td gt lt td gt lt input type text name script value emp sql size 40 gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt input type submit value Run it gt amp nbsp lt input type reset value Reset Form gt lt td gt lt td gt nbsp lt td gt Formatting Query Results 4 43 Creating Web Reports lt tr gt lt table gt lt form gt lt body gt lt html gt Perl Script for CGI Example In this example the CGI script is a Perl script but it could be a shell script a Java class or any other language supported by your web server Create the following Perl CGI script and save it as sqlscript pl in the cgi bin directory of your web server Set up the SQL Plus environment SENV ORACLE SID P817 Your SID goes here SENV ORACLE_HOME oracle 817 Your Oracle Home directory goes here SENV TNS_ADMIN var opt oracle Splusexe SENV ORACLE_HOME bin sqlplus Extract parameters and values from data entered through the web browser Si lt gt Qin split amp i foreach i 0 in key
282. lumns 4 7 when truncated for DATE columns 4 7 when truncated for NUMBER columns 4 4 column separator 8 102 F 2 columns assigning aliases 8 31 computing summary lines 4 16 8 41 copying display attributes 4 8 8 18 8 35 copying values between tables 6 4 6 9 8 49 displaying values in bottom titles 4 30 8 36 displaying values in top titles 4 29 8 35 formatting CHAR VARCHAR LONG and DATE 8 32 formatting in reports 4 2 8 30 formatting MLSLABEL RAW MLSLABEL ROWLABEL 8 32 formatting NUMBER 4 4 8 33 listing display attributes for all 4 9 8 30 listing display attributes for one 4 8 8 30 names in destination table when copying 6 5 8 50 printing line after values that overflow 4 9 8 108 resetting a column to default display 4 9 8 31 F 2 resetting all columns to default display 4 9 8 28 restoring display attributes 4 9 8 18 8 37 setting printing to off or on 4 29 8 36 starting new lines 8 35 storing values in variables 4 29 8 35 suppressing display attributes 4 9 8 18 8 37 truncating display for all when value overflows 4 7 8 112 truncating display for one when value overflows 4 7 8 37 wrapping display for all when value overflows 4 7 8 112 wrapping display for one when value overflows 4 7 8 37 wrapping whole words for one 4 10 COLUMNS clause 4 9 8 28 comma number format 4 5 command GL 5 command file extension 8 96 8 111 8 137 command files 3
283. m SQL Plus prints NUMBER values according to the format specified by SET NUMFORMAT or if you have not used SET NUMFORMAT the default format SQL Plus prints DATE values according to the default format Refer to the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command in this chap ter for more information on default formats Enter TTITLE with no clauses to list the current TTITLE definition Usage Notes If you do not enter a printspec clause before the first occurrence of text TTITLE left justifies the text SOL Plus interprets TTITLE in the new form if a valid printspec clause LEFT SKIP COL and so on immediately follows the command name See COLUMN NEW_VALUE for information on printing column and DATE values in the top title You can use any number of constants and variables in a printspec SQL Plus displays the constants and variables in the order you specify them positioning and formatting each constant or variable as specified by the printspec clauses that precede it The length of the title you specify with TTITLE cannot exceed 2400 characters The continuation character a hyphen will not be recognized inside a single quoted title text string To be recognized the continuation character must appear outside the quotes as follows SQL gt TTITLE CENTER Summary Report for gt the Month of May 8 142 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference TTITLE Examples To define Monthly Analysis as the top
284. m privileges The SET command now has an AUTORECOVERY clause The AUTORECOVERY clause specifies whether default archived redo log files are to be used during recovery The SET command now has a DESCRIBE clause The DESCRIBE clause specifies the depth or level to which objects can be described The SET command now has an INSTANCE clause The INSTANCE clause changes the default instance for your session to the specified instance The SET command now has a LOGSOURCE clause The LOGSOURCE clause specifies the location from which archive logs are retrieved during recovery The SET command now has a SQLBLANKLINES clause The SQLBLANKLINES clause allows and preserves blank lines within any SQL command The SHOW command now has a PARAMETERS clause The PARAMETERS clause displays the current values for one or more initialization parameters The SHOW command now has an SGA clause The SGA clause displays information about the current instance s System Global Area B 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference C SQL Plus Limits Table C 1 on the following page lists the limit or maximum value of each of the SQL Plus elements shown The limits shown are valid for most operating systems SQL Plus Limits C 1 Table C 1 SQL Plus Limits Item Limit filename length username length user variable name length user variable value length command line length length of a LONG value entered through SQL Plus LINESIZ
285. me ext Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause file_name ext Represents the file you wish to edit typically a command file Enter EDIT with no filename to edit the contents of the SOL buffer with the host operating system text editor Usage Notes If you omit the file extension SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command in this chapter If you specify a filename SQL Plus searches for the file in the current working directory If SQL Plus cannot find the file in the current working directory it creates a file with the specified name The user variable EDITOR contains the name of the text editor invoked by EDIT You can change the text editor by changing the value of EDITOR See DEFINE for information about changing the value of a user variable If EDITOR is undefined EDIT attempts to invoke the default host operating system editor EDIT alone places the contents of the SQL buffer in a file by default named AFIEDT BUF in your current working directory and invokes the text editor on the contents of the file If the file AFIEDT BUF already exists it is overwritten with the contents of the buffer You can change the default filename by using the SET EDITFILE command For more information about setting a default filename for the EDIT command see the EDITFILE variabl
286. miter 3 12 hyphen clause 7 2 continuing a long SQL Plus command 2 12 8 1 period 2 10 slash command default logon 7 9 8 47 entered at buffer line number prompt 2 8 8 9 entered at command prompt 2 10 8 9 executing current PL SQL block 2 10 executing current SQL command 2 10 similar to RUN 2 10 8 9 8 95 usage 8 9 pound sign 8 35 number format 4 5 amp ampersand substitution variables 3 22 asterisk in DEL command 3 2 8 54 in LIST command 3 2 8 75 comment delimiters 3 12 colon bind variables 3 31 BindVariable clause EXIT command 8 67 semicolon 2 6 at sign command 3 16 3 20 8 5 command arguments 8 5 command file 3 16 8 5 in CONNECT command 6 3 8 47 in COPY command 6 5 8 49 in SQLPLUS command 3 17 6 4 7 2 passing parameters to a command file 8 5 Index similar to START 3 16 8 6 8 132 double at sign command 3 20 8 7 command file 8 7 similar to START 8 7 8 132 Backspace key 2 2 Cancel key 2 2 2 15 Interrupt key 2 2 Pause key 2 2 2 17 Resume key 2 2 Return key 2 2 _EDITOR in EDIT command 3 8 8 64 infinity sign 8 35 negative infinity sign 8 35 0 number format 4 5 9 number format 4 5 A ABORT mode 8 128 ACCEPT command 3 28 8 10 and DEFINE command 8 52 CHAR clause 8 10 customizing prompts for value 3 30 DATE clause 8 10 DEFAULT clause 8 11 FORMAT clause 8 10 HIDE clause 8 11 N
287. mmands for Later Use Running a Command File as You Start SQL Plus To run a command file as you start SQL Plus use one of the following four options Follow the SQLPLUS command with your username a slash your password a space and the name of the file SQLPLUS SCOTT TIGER SALES SOL Plus starts and runs the command file Follow the SQLPLUS command and your username with a space and the name of the file SQLPLUS SCOTT SALE n SQL Plus prompts you for your password starts and runs the command file Include your username as the first line of the file Follow the SQLPLUS command with and the filename SQL Plus prompts for your password starts and runs the file Include your username a slash and your password as the first line of the file Follow the SOQLPLUS command with and the filename SQL Plus starts and runs the file Nesting Command Files To run a series of command files in sequence first create a command file containing several START commands each followed by the name of a command file in the sequence Then run the command file containing the START commands For example you could include the following START commands in a command file named SALESRPT TERE Q1SALE Q2SALE NUNTUN Q3SALE Q4SALES YRENDSLS Note The command may be useful in this example See the double at sign command in Chapter 8 for more in
288. mments can span multiple lines but cannot be nested within one another Commissions report to be run monthly COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN COLUMN SAL HEADING SALARY FORMAT 99 999 COLUMN CO HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 99 990 SELECT EMPNO ENAME SAL COMM FRO WHERE JOB SALESMAN Includes only salesmen If you enter a SQL comment directly at the command prompt SQL Plus does not store the comment in the buffer Using You can use ANSI ISO style comments within SQL statements PL SQL blocks or SQL Plus commands Since there is no ending delimiter the comment cannot span multiple lines For PL SQL and SQL enter the comment after a command ona line or on a line by itself Commissions report to be run monthly DECLARE block for reporting monthly sales 3 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Commands for Later Use For SQL Plus commands you can only include style comments if they are on a line by themselves For example these comments are legal set maximum width for LONG to 777 SET LONG 777 set the heading for ENAME to be SALESMAN COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN These comments are illegal SET LONG 777 set maximum width for LONG to 777 SET set maximum width for LONG to 777 LONG 777 If you en
289. n PRINT turns the printing of the column on NUL L text Controls the text SQL Plus displays for null values in the given col umn The default is a white space SET NULL controls the text dis played for all null values for all columns unless overridden for a specific column by the NULL clause of the COLUMN command When a NULL value is SELECTed a variable s type will always become CHAR so the SET NULL text can be stored in it OLD_V ALUE variable Specifies a variable to hold a column value You can reference the vari able in BIITLE commands Use OLD_VALUE to display column values in the bottom title You must include the column in a BREAK com mand with the SKIP PAGE action OLD_VALUE is useful for master detail reports in which there is a new master record for each page For master detail reporting you must also include the column in the ORDER BY clause For information on displaying a column value in the top title see COL UMN NEW_VALUE For more information on referencing variables in titles see the TTITLE command later in this chapter 8 36 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN ON OFF Controls the status of display attributes for a column OFF disables the attributes for a column without affecting the attributes definition ON reinstates the attributes WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED Specifies how SQL Plus will treat a datatype or DATE string that is too wide for a column WRAPPED wraps the s
290. n also set a header and footer for each report The REPHEADER command defines the report header the REPFOOTER command defines the report footer A TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER or REPFOOTER command consists of the command name followed by one or more clauses specifying a position or format and a CHAR value you wish to place in that position or give that format You can include multiple sets of clauses and CHAR values 4 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions I T T B REPHEAD REPFOOT E position_clause s char value position_clause s char_value E position_clause s char value position_clause s char_value ER position_clause s char_value position_clause s char_value ER position_clause s char value position_clause s char value For descriptions of all TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER and REPFOOTER clauses see the TTITLE and REPHEADER commands in Chapter 8 Example 4 17 Placing a Top and Bottom Title on a Page To put titles at the top and bottom of each page of a report enter SQL gt TTITLE C ER gt ACME WIDGET SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT SQL gt BTITLE CENTER COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Now run the current query SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following output A
291. n be disabled when there is no connection to a server and remain disabled until SQL Plus terminates The SQLPLUS command now has a MARKUP option MARKUP allows the use of server side CGI scripts to create HTML reports for access on the web You can use the SQLPLUS MARKUP command to create web reports from existing SQL scripts SQLPLUS MARKUP options have the same effect as the new SET MARKUP command options The SET command now has a MARKUP clause During a SQL Plus session SET MARKUP allows the interactive creation of HTML reports for access on the web SHOW MARKUP displays the status of MARKUP options Release 8 1 7 Enhancements B 3 SQL Plus Release 8 1 5 Enhancements SQL Plus Release 8 1 5 Enhancements There is anew command named STARTUP The STARTUP command starts an Oracle instance with the options to mount and open a database There is anew command named SHUTDOWN The SHUTDOWN command shuts down an Oracle instance that is currently running It also optionally closes and dismounts a database There is anew command named RECOVER The RECOVER command performs media recovery on tablespaces datafiles or the entire database There is anew command named ARCHIVE LOG The ARCHIVE LOG command allows redo log files to be archived It also displays information about redo log files The CONNECT command now has an AS clause The AS clause allows privileged connections by users who have been granted SYSOPER or SYSDBA syste
292. n the SQL buffer Command Reference 8 3 SQL Plus Command Summary Command Page Description SAVE 8 96 Saves the contents of the SOL buffer in a host operating system file a command file SET 8 98 Sets a system variable to alter the SQL Plus environment for your current session SHOW 8 123 Shows the value of a SQL Plus system variable or the current SOL Plus environment SHUTDOWN 8 128 Shuts down a currently running Oracle instance SPOOL 8 130 Stores query results in an operating system file and optionally sends the file to a printer STAR 8 131 Executes the contents of the specified command file STARTUP 8 133 Starts an Oracle instance and optionally mounts and opens a database STORE 8 137 Saves attributes of the current SQL Plus environment in a host operating system file a command file TIMING 8 138 Records timing data for an elapsed period of time lists the current timer s title and timing data or lists the number of active timers TITLE 8 140 Places and formats a specified title at the top of each report page or lists the current TTITLE definition UNDEF IN 8 144 Deletes one or more user variables that you defined either explicitly with the DEFINE command or implicitly with an argument to the START command VARIABLE 8 145 Declares a bind variable that can be referenced in PL SQL WHENEVER OSERROR 8 151 Exits SQL Plus if an
293. name and password SQL Plus prompts you for them If you enter a slash or simply enter Return to the prompt for username SQL Plus logs you in using a default logon see below If you omit only password SQL Plus prompts you for password When prompting SQL Plus does not display password on your terminal screen See the PASSWORD command in this chapter for information about changing your password connect_identifier Consists of a Net8 connect identifier The exact syntax depends upon the Net8 communications protocol your Oracle installation uses For more information refer to the Net8 manual appropriate for your proto col or contact your DBA SQL Plus does not prompt for a service name but uses your default database if you do not include a specification Represents a default logon using operating system authentication You cannot enter a connect_identifier if you use a default logon In a default logon SQL Plus typically attempts to log you in using the username OPS name where name is your operating system username See the Oracle8i Administrator s Guide for information about operating system authentication Command Reference 8 47 CONNECT AS SYSOPER SYSDBA The AS clause allows privileged connections by users who have been granted SYSOPER or SYSDBA system privileges You can use either of these privileged connections with the default logon For information about system privileges see the Oracle8i Administrator
294. nd Files If you want to place the contents of a command file in the buffer you must retrieve the command from the file in which it is stored You can retrieve a command file using the SQL Plus command GET Just as you can save a query from the buffer to a file with the SAVE command you can retrieve a query from a file to the buffer with the GET command SQL gt GET file _name When appropriate to the operating system SQL Plus adds a period and the extension SQL to the filename unless you type a period at the end of the filename followed by a different extension Example 3 8 Retrieving a Command File Suppose you need to retrieve the SALES file in a later session You can retrieve the file by entering the GET command To retrieve the file SALES enter SQL gt GET SALES 1 COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN 2 COLUMN SAL HEADING SALARY FORMAT 99 999 3 COLUMN COMM HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 99 990 4 SELECT EMPNO ENAME SAL COMM 5 FRO P 6 WHERE JOB SALESMAN 7 SQL Plus retrieves the contents of the file SALES with the extension SQL into the SQL buffer and lists it on the screen Then you can edit the command further If the file did not contain SQL Plus commands you could also execute it with the RUN command Manipulating Commands 3 15 Saving Commands for Later Use Running Command Files The START command retr
295. nd Variables a Tracing Statements Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the examples shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the sample tables described in Chapter 1 Manipulating Commands 3 1 Editing Commands Editing Commands Because SQL Plus does not store SQL Plus commands in the buffer you edit a SQL Plus command entered directly to the command prompt by using Backspace or by re entering the command You can use a number of SQL Plus commands to edit the SQL command or PL SQL block currently stored in the buffer Alternatively you can use a host operating system editor to edit the buffer contents Table 3 1 lists the SQL Plus commands that allow you to examine or change the command in the buffer without re entering the command Table 3 1 SQL Plus Editing Commands Command Abbreviation Purpose APPEND text CHANGE old new CHANGE text CLEAR BUFFER DEL DEL n DEL DEL n DEL LAST DEL mn DEL n INPU INPUT text LIST LIST n LIST 3 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference A text C old new C text CL BUFF adds text at the end of a line changes old to new ina line deletes text from a line deletes all lines deletes the current line deletes line n deletes the current line deletes line n through the current line deletes the last line deletes a range of lines m to n delete
296. nd reference you must precede the parameter name with a colon bind variable A variable in a SQL statement that must be replaced with a valid value or the address of a value in order for the statement to successfully execute bit The smallest unit of data A bit only has two possible values 0 or 1 Bits can be combined into groups of eight called bytes each byte represents a single character of data See also byte block In PL SQL a group of SQL and PL SQL commands related to each other through procedural logic body A report region that contains the bulk of the report text graphics data and computations break An event such as a change in the value of an expression that occurs while SQL Plus processes a query or report You can direct SQL Plus to perform various operations such as printing subtotals whenever specified breaks occur break column A column in a report that causes a break when its value changes and for which the user has defined break operations break group A group containing one or more break columns break hierarchy The order in which SQL Plus checks for the occurrence of breaks and triggers the corresponding break operations break order Indicates the order in which to display a break column s data Valid options are Ascending and Descending break report A report that divides rows of a table into sets based on a common value in the break column Glossary 3 Glossary 4
297. nd the system ID of the database on the host system Data Control Language DCL The category of SQL statements that control access to the data and to the database Examples are the GRANT and REVOKE statements Occasionally DCL statements are grouped with DML statements Data Definition Language DDL The category of SQL statements that define or delete database objects such as tables or views Examples are the CREATE ALTER and DROP statements data dictionary A comprehensive set of tables and views automatically created and updated by the Oracle database server which contains administrative information about users data storage and privileges It is installed when Oracle is initially installed and is a central source of information for the Oracle database server itself and for all users of Oracle The tables are automatically maintained by Oracle It is sometimes referred to as the catalog Data Manipulation Language DML The category of SQL statements that query and update the database data Common DML statements are SELECT INSERT UPDATE and DELETE Occasionally DCL statements are grouped with DML statements data security The mechanisms that control the access and use of the database at the object level For example data security includes access to a specific schema object and the specific types of actions allowed for each user on the object for example user SCOTT can issue SELECT and INSERT statements but not DELETE st
298. nds are called expressions predicates or clauses See also SOL statement string Any sequence of words or characters on a line Glossary 21 Glossary 22 substitution variable In SQL Plus a variable name or numeral preceded by one or two ampersands amp Substitution variables are used in a command file to represent values to be provided when the command file is run subtotal In a report a total of values in a number column taken over a group of rows that have the same value in a break field See also summary summary Summaries or summary columns are used to compute subtotals grand totals running totals and other summarizations of the data in a report summary line A line in a report containing totals averages maximums or other computed values You create summary lines through the BREAK and COMPUTE commands syntax The orderly system by which commands qualifiers and parameters are combined to form valid command strings SYS username See also SYSTEM username SYSDBA Privilege that contains all system privileges with the ADMIN OPTION and the SYSOPER system privilege See also SYSOPER SYSOPER Privilege that allows a DBA to perform operations such as STARTUP SHUTDOWN ARCHIVE LOG and RECOVER See also SYSDBA system administrator A person responsible for operation and maintenance of the operating system of a computer system editor The text editor provided by the operating system System Global A
299. ng Roles To disable a role for a given user insert a row in PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE containing the user s username in the Userid column ROLES in the Attribute column and the role name in the Char_Value column Note When you enter PUBLIC or for the Userid column you disable the role for all users You should only use or PUBLIC for roles which are granted to PUBLIC If you try to disable a role that has not been granted to a user none of the roles for that user are disabled The Scope Numeric_Value and Date_Value columns should contain NULL For example PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUMBERIC CHAR DATE VALUE VALUE VALUE SOL Plus SCOTT ROLES ROLE1 SOL Plus PUBLIC ROLES ROLE2 During login these table rows are translated into the command SET ROLE ALL EXCEPT ROLE1 ROLE2 To ensure that the user does not use the SET ROLE command to change their roles after login you can disable the SET ROLE command See Disabling SET ROLE earlier in this appendix To re enable roles delete the row containing the restriction To provide for the security of your database tables in Oracle8i using SQL commands you can create and control access to roles By creating a role and then controlling who has access to it you can ensure that only certain users have access to particular database privileges Security E 7 SQLPLUS RESTRICT
300. nks rather than the value of a break column when the value is a duplicate of the column s value in the preceding row DUP LICATES Prints the value of a break column in every selected row Enter BREAK with no clauses to list the current break definition Usage Notes Each new BREAK command you enter replaces the preceding one To remove the BREAK command use CLEAR BREAKS Example To produce a report that prints duplicate job values prints the average of SAL and inserts one blank line when the value of JOB changes and additionally prints the sum of SAL and inserts another blank line when the value of DEPTNO changes you could enter the following commands The example selects departments 10 and 30 and the jobs of clerk and salesman only SQL gt BREAK ON DEPTNO SKIP 1 ON JOB SKIP 1 DUPLICATE SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DEPTNO SQL gt COMPUTE AVG OF SAL ON JOB SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL FROM EMP 2 WHERE JOB IN CLERK SALESMAN 3 AND DEPTNO IN 10 30 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO JOB n 8 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BREAK The following output results DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 10 CLERK ILLER 1300 krk REE O e ee avg 1300 KERRE O a sum 1300 30 CLERK JAMES 950 POITIER J 1A O ll avg 950 DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL
301. nodup Now enter the following COMPUTE command and run the current query SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DEPTNO SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following output DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 10 CLERK ILLER 1300 MANAGER CLARK 2450 KHIR RAK MIRE ir rr sum 3750 DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 20 CLERK SMITH 800 ADAMS 1100 WHERRAERRER BRIERE ri sum 1900 DEPTNO JOB ENAME SAL 30 CLERK JAMES 950 SALESMAN ALLEN 1600 Formatting Query Results 4 17 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines TURNER 1500 WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 Met M IK te RT RI TORINO RI ie ees sum 6550 9 rows selected To compute the sum of salaries for departments 10 and 20 without printing the compute label SQL gt COLUMN DUMMY NOPRINT SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DUMMY SQL gt BREAK ON DUMMY SKIP 1 SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO DUMMY DEPTNO ENAME SAL 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE DEPTNO lt 20 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO am T SQL Plus displays the following output DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 KING 5000 10 CLARK 2450 10 MILLER 1300 8750 20 JONES 2975 20 FORD 3000 20 SMITH 800 20 SCOTT 3000 20 ADAMS 1100 10875 8 rows selected To compute the salaries at the end of the report SQL gt COLUMN DUMMY NOPRINT SQL gt COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DUM
302. ns and has all privileges on PRODUCT_USER_ PROFILE When SYSTEM logs in SQL Plus does not read PRODUCT_USER_ PROFILE Therefore no restrictions apply to user SYSTEM Other Oracle usernames should have only SELECT access to this table which allows a view of restrictions of that username and those restrictions assigned to PUBLIC The command file PUPBLD when run grants SELECT access on PRODUCT_USER_ PROFILE to PUBLIC Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands To disable a SQL or SQL Plus command for a given user insert a row containing the user s username in the Userid column the command name in the Attribute column and DISABLED in the Char_Value column The Scope Numeric_Value and Date_Value columns should contain NULL For example PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUMBERIC CHAR DATE VALUE VALUE VALUE SQL Plus SCOTT HOST DISABLED E 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table SOL Plus INSERT DISABLED SQL Plus UPDATE DISABLED SQL Plus DELETE DISABLED To re enable commands delete the row containing the restriction You can disable the following SQL Plus commands COPY EDIT EXECUTE EXIT GET HOST or your operating system s alias for HOST such as on VMS and on UNIX QUIT PASSWORD RUN SAVE SET see note below SPOOL START Note Disabling the SQL Plus SET command will also disabl
303. nt session such as a the display width for NUMBER data a the display width for LONG data a enabling or disabling the printing of column headings a the number of lines per page Syntax SET system_variable value where system_variable and value represent one of the following clauses APPI NFO ON OFF text ARRAY SIZE 15 n AUTO COMMIT ON OFF IMM EDIATE n AUTOP RINT ON OFF AUTORECOVERY ON OFF AUTOT RACE ON OFF TRACE ONLY EXP LAIN STAT ISTICS BLO CKTERMINATOR c SIEP c ON OFF COLSEP _ text COM PATIBILITY V7 V8 NATIVE ON OFF COPYC OMMIT 0 n o COPYTYPECHECK ON OFF EF TINE amp c OFF SCRIBE DEPTH 1 n ALL LINENUM ON OFF INDENT ON OFF CHO ON OFF EDITF ILE file_name ext EMB EDDED ON OFF ESC APE c ON OFF FEED BACK 6 n ON OFF FLAGGER OFF ENTRY INTERMED IATE FULL FLU SH ON OFF H H EA DING ON OFF EADS EP c ON OFF INSTANCE instance_path LOCAL LIN ESIZE 80 n oa 8 98 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET OBOF FSET n 1 OGSOURCE pathname LONG 80 n LONGC HUNKSIZE 80 n ARK UP HIML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF
304. nter SQL gt SET INSTANCE PROD1 To set the instance back to the default or local enter SQL gt SE INSTANC E local You must disconnect from any connected instances to change the instance 8 116 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET LOBOFFSET To set the starting position from which a CLOB column s data is retrieved to the 22nd position enter SQL gt SET LOBOFFSET 22 The CLOB data will wrap on your screen SQL Plus will not truncate until the 23rd character LOGSOURCE To set the default location of log files for recovery to the directory usr oracle81 dbs arch enter SQL gt SET LOGSOURCE usr oracle81 dbs arch SQL gt RECOVER DATABASE LONG To set the maximum number of characters to fetch for displaying and copying LONG values to 500 enter SQL gt SET LONG 500 The LONG data will wrap on your screen SQL Plus will not truncate until the 501st character LONGCHUNKSIZE To set the size of the increments in which SOL Plus retrieves LONG values to 100 characters enter SQL gt SET LONGCHUNKSIZE 100 The LONG data will be retrieved in increments of 100 characters until the entire value is retrieved or the value of SET LONG is reached whichever is the smaller MARKUP The following is a log of an interactive session to output HTML marked up text to a spool file Note The SET MARKUP example command is laid out for readability us
305. om 3 7 8 54 deleting the current line 8 54 deleting the last line 8 54 executing contents 2 10 8 9 8 95 inserting new line in 3 5 8 73 listing a range of lines 3 3 8 75 listing a single line 3 2 8 75 listing all lines 3 2 8 75 listing contents 3 3 8 75 listing the current line 3 2 8 75 listing the last line 3 3 8 75 loading into host system editor 3 8 8 64 saving contents 3 8 8 96 BUFFER clause 3 2 3 10 8 28 BUFFER variable F 4 byte GL 4 Index 3 C CANCEL clause 8 84 CENTER clause 4 25 8 92 8 141 CGI scripts 4 42 GL 6 CHANGE command 3 2 3 3 8 25 CHAR clause 8 10 VARIABLE command 8 145 CHAR columns changing format 4 6 8 32 default format 4 6 8 32 CHAR datatype GL 4 character GL 4 character string GL 4 clause GL 4 CLEAR clause 4 9 8 31 in ATTRIBUTE command 8 18 CLEAR command 8 28 BREAKS clause 4 15 8 28 BUFFER clause 3 2 3 10 8 28 COLUMNS clause 4 9 8 28 COMPUTES clause 8 28 SCREEN clause 3 31 8 28 SQL clause 8 29 TIMING clause 8 29 client GL 4 CLOB clause VARIABLE command 8 146 CLOB columns changing format 4 6 8 32 default format 8 32 setting maximum width 8 107 setting retrieval position 8 107 setting retrieval size 8 107 CLOB datatype GL 4 CLOSECURSOR variable F 2 F 5 CMDSEP variable 8 102 COL clause 4 26 8 92 8 141 colons bind variables 3 31 COLSEP variable 8 102 column GL 5 format GL 24 width GL 25 COLUMN command 4 2
306. ommand DEFINEs the parameters with the values of the argu ments if you run the command file again in this session you can enter new arguments or omit the arguments to use the current values For more information on using parameters refer to the subsection Passing Parameters through the START Command under Writing Interactive Commands in Chapter 3 Command Reference 8 5 at sign Usage Notes You can include in a command file any command you would normally enter interactively typically SQL SQL Plus commands or PL SQL blocks An EXIT or QUIT command used in a command file terminates SQL Plus The command functions similarly to START If the START command is disabled see Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands in Appendix E this will also disable the command See START in this chapter for information on the START command SQL Plus removes the SQLTERMINATOR a semicolon by default before the command is issued A workaround for this is to add another SQLTERMINATOR See the SQLTERMINATOR variable of the SET command in this chapter for more information Examples To run a command file named PRINTRPT with the extension SQL enter SQL gt PRINTRPT To run a command file named WKRPT with the extension ORY enter SQL gt WKRPT ORY 8 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference double at sign double at sign Purpose Runs a command file This command is identical to the
307. ommand to re run the most recent query from Example 2 3 SQL Plus reprocesses the query and displays the results SQL gt RUN 1 SELECT EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL 2 FROM EMP WHERE SAL lt 2400 EMPNO ENAI JOB SALARY 7369 SMITH CLERK 800 7499 ALLE SALESMAN 1 600 7521 WARD SALESMAN 1 250 7654 ARTIN SALESMAN 1 250 7844 TURNER SALESMAN 1 500 7876 ADAMS CLERK 1 100 7900 JAMES CLERK 800 7934 MILLER CLERK 1 300 The COLUMN command formatted the column SAL with a dollar sign and a comma and gave it a new heading The RUN command then re ran the query of Example 2 3 which was stored in the buffer SQL Plus does not store SQL Plus commands in the SQL buffer Understanding SQL Plus Command Syntax SQL Plus commands have a different syntax from SQL commands or PL SQL blocks Continuing a Long SQL Plus Command on Additional Lines You can continue a long SQL Plus command by typing a hyphen at the end of the line and pressing Return If you wish you can type a space before typing the hyphen SQL Plus displays a right angle bracket gt as a prompt for each additional line For example SQL gt COLUMN SAL FORMAT 99 999 gt HEADING SALARY Since SQL Plus identifies the hyphen as a continuation character entering a hyphen within a SQL statement will be ignored by SQL Plus SOL Plus will not identify th
308. ompute Functions Function Effect SUM Computes the sum of the values in the column MINIMUM Computes the minimum value in the column MAXIMUM Computes the maximum value in the column AVG Computes the average of the values in the column STD Computes the standard deviation of the values in the column VARIANCE Computes the variance of the values in the column COUNT Computes the number of non null values in the column NUMBER Computes the number of rows in the column The function you specify in the COMPUTE command applies to all columns you enter after OF and before ON The computed values print on a separate line when the value of the ordered column changes 4 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Labels for ON REPORT and ON ROW computations appear in the first column otherwise they appear in the column specified in the ON clause You can change the compute label by using COMPUTE LABEL If you do not define a label for the computed value SQL Plus prints the unabbreviated function keyword The compute label can be suppressed by using the NOPRINT option of the COLUMN command on the break column See the COMPUTE command in Chapter 8 for more details Example 4 12 Computing and Printing Subtotals To compute the total of SAL by department first list the current BREAK definition SQL gt BREAK break on DEPTNO skip 0 page nodup on JOB skip 1
309. on C C999 L L999 comma 9 999 period 99 99 V 999V99 EEEE 9 999EEEF RNorrn RN DATE DATE Displays the ISO currency symbol in this position Displays the local currency symbol in this position Displays a comma in this position Displays a period decimal point in this position separating the integral and fractional parts of a number Multiplies value by 10 where n is number of 9 s after V Displays value in scientific notation format must contain exactly four E s Displays upper or lowercase Roman numerals Value can be an integer between 1 and 3999 Displays value as a date in MM DD YY format used to format NUMBER columns that represent Julian dates The MI and PR format elements can only appear in the last position of a number format model The S format element can only appear in the first or last position If a number format model does not contain the MI S or PR format ele ments negative return values automatically contain a leading negative sign and positive values automatically contain a leading space A number format model can contain only a single decimal character D or period but it can contain multiple group separators G or com mas A group separator or comma cannot appear to the right of a decimal character or period in a number format model SQL Plus formats NUMBER data right justified A NUMBER column s width equals the width of the head
310. operating system command generates an error WHENEVER SQLERROR 8 153 Exits SQL Plus if a SQL command or PL SQL block generates an error 8 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference at sign at sign Purpose Runs the specified command file Syntax file_name ext arg Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause file_name ext arg Represents the command file you wish to run If you omit ext SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For infor mation on changing the default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command in this chapter When you enter file_name ext SQL Plus searches for a file with the filename and extension you specify in the current default directory If SQL Plus does not find such a file SQL Plus will search a sys tem dependent path to find the file Some operating systems may not support the path search See the Oracle installation and user s man ual s provided for your operating system for specific information related to your operating system environment Represent data items you wish to pass to parameters in the command file If you enter one or more arguments SQL Plus substitutes the val ues into the parameters amp 1 amp 2 and so forth in the command file The first argument replaces each occurrence of amp 1 the second replaces each occurrence of amp 2 and so forth The c
311. ormatting will change in a report or lists the current break definition BTITLE 8 24 Places and formats a specified title at the bottom of each report page or lists the current BTITLE definition CHANGE 8 25 Changes text on the current line in the buffer CLEAR 8 28 Resets or erases the current clause or setting for the specified option such as BREAKS or COLUMNS COLUMN 8 30 Specifies display characteristics for a given column or lists the current display characteristics for a single column or for all columns COMPUTE 8 41 Calculates and prints summary lines using various standard computations on subsets of selected rows or lists all COMPUTE definitions CONNECT 8 47 Connects a given user to Oracle COPY 8 49 Copies results from a query to a table in a local or remote database DEFINE 8 52 Specifies a user variable and assigns it a CHAR value or lists the value and variable type of a single variable or all variables DEL 8 54 Deletes one or more lines of the buffer 8 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Command Summary Command Page Description DESCRIBE 8 56 Lists the column definitions for the specified table view or synonym or the specifications for the specified function or procedure DISCONNECT 8 63 Commits pending changes to the database and logs the current user off Oracle but does not exit SOL Plus EDIT 8 64 Invokes a
312. ount has expired SQL Plus prompts you to change your password before you can connect If an account is locked a message is displayed and connection as this user is not permitted until the account is unlocked by your DBA Once again you can manipulate tables in the remote database directly after you connect in this manner Note Do not confuse the symbol of the connect identifier with the command used to run a command file Copying Data from One Database to Another Use the SQL Plus COPY command to copy data between databases and between tables on the same database With the COPY command you can copy data between databases in the following ways copy data from a remote database to your local database copy data from your local default database to a remote database on most systems copy data from one remote database to another remote database on most systems 6 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Copying Data from One Database to Another Note In general the COPY command was designed to be used for copying data between Oracle and non Oracle databases You should use SQL commands CREATE TABLE AS and INSERT to copy data between Oracle databases Understanding COPY Command Syntax You enter the COPY command in the following form SQL gt COPY FROM database TO database action gt destination_table column_name column_name gt column name USING query Here is a samp
313. pace or a colon INVISIBLE is the opposite and does not display any shift characters SHOW MODE ON OFF Controls whether SQL Plus lists the old and new settings of aSQL Plus system variable when you change the setting with SET ON lists the set tings OFF suppresses the listing SHOWMODE ON has the same behavior as the obsolete SHOWMODE BOTH Command Reference 8 109 SET SQLBL ANKLINES ON OFF Controls whether SQL Plus allows blank lines within a SQL command ON interprets blank lines and new lines as part of a SQL command OFF the default value does not allow blank lines or new lines in a SQL command Enter the BLOCKTERMINATOR to stop SOL command entry without running the SQL command Enter the SQLTERMINATOR character to stop SQL command entry and run the SQL statement SOLC ASE MIX ED LO WER UP PER Converts the case of SQL commands and PL SQL blocks just prior to execution SQL Plus converts all text within the command including quoted literals and identifiers If SQLCASE equals UPPER all text is converted to uppercase If SQLCASE equals LOWER all text is con verted to lowercase and if SQLCASE equals MIXED all text is unchanged SQLCASE does not change the SQL buffer itself SQLCO NTINUE gt text Sets the character sequence SQL Plus displays as a prompt after you continue a SQL Plus command on an additional line using a hyphen SQLN UMBER ON OFF Sets the prompt for the second and subsequent
314. pleted Now print the bind variable SQL gt PRINT odcv DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON The procedure can be executed multiple times using the same or a different REFCURSOR bind variable SQL gt VARIABILI E pcv F FCURSOR SQL gt EXECUTE dept_rpt pcv PL SQL procedure successfully completed SQL gt PRINT pcv DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALE CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON Example 3 20 Using REFCURSOR Variables in Stored Functions Create a stored function containing an OPEN FOR SELECT statement SQL gt CREATE OR F gt YA OB WD amp cv_types PLACE FUNCTION dept_fn RETURN DeptCurTyp IS resultset cv_types DeptCurTyp W fl EGI ND OPEN resultset FOR SELECT FROM DEPT RETURN resultset Manipulating Commands 3 35 Tracing Statements Function created Execute the function SQL gt VARIABLE rc REFCURSOR SQL gt EXECUTE rc dept_fn PL SQL procedure successfully completed Now print the bind variable SQL gt PRINT rc DEPTNO DNAME LOC 10 ACCOUNTING NEW YORK 20 RESEARCH DALLAS 30 SALES CHICAGO 40 OPERATIONS BOSTON The function can be exe
315. preparing network communications as outlined in the Net8 documentation configuration files Files that are used to identify and characterize the components of a network Configuration is largely a process of naming network components and identifying relationships among those components connect To identify yourself to Oracle by entering your username and password in order to gain access to the database In SQL Plus the CONNECT command allows you to log off Oracle and then log back on with a specified username connect identifier The set of parameters including a protocol that Net8 uses to connect to a specific Oracle instance on the network current line In an editor such as the SQL Plus editor the line in the current buffer that editing commands will currently affect database A set of operating system files treated as a unit in which an Oracle database server stores a set of data dictionary tables and user tables A database requires three types of files database files redo log files and control files database administrator DBA 1 A person responsible for the operation and maintenance of an Oracle database server or a database application The database administrator monitors its use in order to customize it to meet the needs of the local community of users 2 An Oracle username that has been given DBA privileges and can perform database administration functions Usually the two meanings coincide There may be
316. print t the following output results T Departmental Salary Bill report each month This report contains confidential information For more information on creating CLOB columns see your OracleSi SQL Reference 8 150 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference WHENEVER OSERROR WHENEVER OSERROR Purpose Exits SQL Plus if an operating system error occurs such as a file I O error Syntax WHENEVER OSERROR EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE n variable BindVariable COMMIT ROLLBACK CONTINUE COMMIT ROLLBACK NONE Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE n variable BindVariable Directs SQL Plus to exit as soon as an operating system error is detected You can also specify that SQL Plus return a success or failure code the operating system failure code or a number or variable of your choice See EXIT in this chapter for details CONTINUE Turns off the EXIT option COMMIT Directs SQL Plus to execute a COMMIT before exiting or continuing and save pending changes to the database ROLLBACK Directs SQL Plus to execute a ROLLBACK before exiting or continuing and abandon pending changes to the database NONE Directs SQL Plus to take no action before continuing Usage Notes If you do not enter the WHENEVER OSERROR command the default behavior of SQL Plus is to continue and take no action when an operating syst
317. pter 8 for more information about these commands SQLPLUS MARKUP HTML ON is useful when embedding SQL Plus in program scripts On starting it outputs the HTML and BODY tags before executing any commands All subsequent output is in HTML until SQL Plus terminates The SILENT and RESTRICT command line options may be effectively used in conjunction with MARKUP to suppress the display of SQL Plus prompt and banner information and to restrict the use of some commands SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON generates complete HTML pages for each subsequently spooled file The HTML tags in a spool file are closed when SPOOL OFF is executed or SQL Plus exits You can use SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL OFF to generate HTML output suitable for embedding in an existing web page HTML output generated this way has no lt HTML gt or lt BODY gt tags Creating Web Reports Interactively You use the SET MARKUP command interactively during a SQL Plus session to write HTML to a spool file The output can be viewed in a web browser SET MARKUP only specifies that SQL Plus output will be HTML encoded it does not create or begin writing to an output file You must use SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON to enable the spooling of HTML output You then use the SQL Plus SPOOL command to create and name a spool file and to begin writing HMTL output to it When creating a HTML file it is important and convenient to specify a html file extension which is the standard file extens
318. r SQL gt CLEAR BUFFER Next use INPUT to enter the command be sure not to type a semicolon at the end of the command SQL gt INPUT 1 COLUMN ENAME HEADING SALESMAN 2 COLUMN SAL HEADING SALARY FORMAT 99 999 3 COLUMN COMM HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 99 990 4 SELECT EMPNO ENAME SAL COMM 5 FROM EMP 6 WHERE JOB SALESMAN gt The zero at the end of the format model for the column COMM tells SQL Plus to display a zero instead of a blank when the value of COMM is zero for a given row Format models and the COLUMN command are described in more detail in Chapter 4 and in the Oracle 8i SQL Reference Manual Now use the SAVE command to store your query in a file called SALES with the extension SQL SQL gt SAVE SALES Created file SALES Note that you do not type a semicolon at the end of the query if you did include a semicolon SQL Plus would attempt to run the buffer contents The SQL Plus commands in the buffer would produce an error because SQL Plus expects to find only SQL commands in the buffer You will learn how to run a command file later in this chapter To input more than one SQL command leave out the semicolons on all the SQL commands Then use APPEND to add a semicolon to all but the last command SAVE appends a slash to the end of the file automatically this slash tells SQL Plus to run the last
319. r SQL gt SET SERVEROUTPUT ON FORMAT WORD_WRAPPED SQL gt SET LINESIZE 20 SQL gt BEGIN 2 DBMS _OUTPUT PUT_LINE If there is nothing left to do 3 DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE shall we continue with plan B 4 end Be ff If there is nothing left to do shall we continue with plan B 8 120 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET To set the output to TRUNCATED enter SQL gt SET SERVEROUTPUT ON FORMAT TRUNCATED SQL gt SET LINESIZE 20 SQL gt BEGIN 2 DBMS _OUTPUT PUT_LINE If there is nothing left to do 3 DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE shall we continue with plan B 4 END 5 If there is nothing shall we continue wi SHIFTINOUT To enable the display of shift characters enter SQL gt SET SHIFTINOUT VISIBLE SQL gt SELECT ENAME JOB FROM EMP The following output results ENAME JOB JJOO AABBCC AA abc DDEE e where shift character uppercase multibyte character lowercase singlebyte character Note This example illustrates that the columns are aligned correctly The data used in this example is an illustration only and does not represent real data SQLBLANKLINES To preserve blank lines in a SQL statement enter SQL gt SET SQLBLANKLINES ON SQL gt REM Using the SOQLTERMINATOR default
320. r s standard default printer Enter SPOOL with no clauses to list the current spooling status Usage Notes To spool output generated by commands in a command file without displaying the output on the screen use SET TERMOUT OFF SET TERMOUT OFF does not affect output from commands run interactively Examples To record your displayed output in a file named DIARY using the default file extension enter SQL gt SPOOL DIARY To stop spooling and print the file on your default printer enter SQL gt SPOOL OUT 8 130 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference START START Purpose Executes the contents of the specified command file Syntax STA RT file_name ext arg Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause file_name ext Represents the command file you wish to execute The file can contain any command that you can run interactively If you do not specify an extension SQL Plus assumes the default com mand file extension normally SQL For information on changing this default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command in this chapter When you enter START file_name ext SQL Plus searches for a file with the filename and extension you specify in the current default directory If SQL Plus does not find such a file SQL Plus will search a sys tem dependent path to find the file Some operating systems may not support the path search Consult the Oracle
321. r the next line of your command Type the semicolon and press Return again to run the command Note You cannot enter a comment on the same line after a semicolon For more information about placing comments see Placing Comments in Command Files in Chapter 3 A slash on a line by itself also tells SQL Plus that you wish to run the command Press Return at the end of the last line of the command SQL Plus prompts you with another line number Type a slash and press Return again SQL Plus will execute the command and store it in the buffer see the section The SQL Buffer below for details A blank line in a SQL statement tells SQL Plus that you have finished entering the command but do not want to run it yet Press Return at the end of the last line of the command SQL Plus prompts you with another line number Note You can change the way blank lines appear and behave in SQL statements using the SET SQLBLANKLINES command For more information about changing blank line behavior see the SET command in Chapter 8 Press Return again SQL Plus now prompts you with the SQL Plus command prompt SQL Plus does not execute the command but stores it in the SQL buffer see the section The SQL Buffer below for details If you subsequently enter another SQL command SQL Plus overwrites the previous command in the buffer Creating Stored Procedures Stored procedures are PL SQL functions packages or procedur
322. ral language extension of SQL PL SQL combines the ease and flexibility of SQL with the procedural functionality of a structured programming language such as IF THEN WHILE and LOOP Even when PL SQL is not stored in the database applications can send blocks of PL SQL to the database rather than individual SQL statements thereby reducing network traffic PL SQL is interpreted and parsed at runtime it does not need to be compiled procedure A set of SQL and PL SQL statements grouped together as an executable unit to perform a very specific task Procedures and functions are nearly identical the only difference between the two is that functions always return a single value to the caller while procedures do not return a value to the caller process 1 A thread of control in an operating system that is a mechanism in an operating system that can execute a series of steps Some operating systems use the terms job or task A process normally has its own private memory area in which it runs prompt 1 A message from a computer program that instructs you to enter data or take some other action 2 Word s used by the system as a cue to assist a user s response Such messages generally ask the user to respond by typing some information in the adjacent field See also command line query A SQL SELECT statement that retrieves data in any combination expression or order Queries are read only operations they do not change any dat
323. ransactions and returns the error code of the last executed SQL command or PL SQL block SQL gt EXIT SQL SQLCODE The location of the return code depends on your system Consult your DBA for information concerning how your operating system retrieves data from a program See the TTITLE command in this chapter for more information on SQL SQLCODE 8 68 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference GET GET Purpose Loads a host operating system file into the SQL buffer Syntax GET file_name ext LIS T NOL IST Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause file_name ext Represents the file you wish to load typically a command file LIS T Lists the contents of the file NOL IST Suppresses the listing Usage Notes If you do not specify a file extension SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command in this chapter If the filename you specify contains the word list or the word file the name must be in double quotes SOL Plus searches for the file in the current working directory The operating system file should contain a single SQL statement or PL SQL block The statement should not be terminated with a semicolon If a SQL Plus command or more than one SQL statement or PL SQL block is loaded into the SQL buffer from an operating system file an er
324. rd characters to specify blocks of text in a CHANGE command refer to the CHANGE command in Chapter 8 Adding a New Line To insert a new line after the current line use the INPUT command To insert a line before line 1 enter a zero 0 and follow the zero with text SQL Plus inserts the line at the beginning of the buffer and that line becomes line 1 SQL gt 0 SELECT EMPNO Example 3 4 Adding a Line Suppose you want to add a fourth line to the SQL command you modified in Example 3 3 Since line 3 is already the current line enter INPUT which may be abbreviated to I and press Return SQL Plus prompts you for the new line Manipulating Commands 3 5 Editing Commands SQL gt INPUT 4 Enter the new line Then press Return SQL Plus prompts you again for a new line 4 ORDER BY SAL 5 Press Return again to indicate that you will not enter any more lines and then use RUN to verify and re run the query SOL Plus lists the modified command and then runs it 1 select deptno ename sal 2 from emp 3 where deptno 10 4 order by sal DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 MILLER 1300 10 CLARK 2450 10 KING 5000 Appending Text to a Line To add text to the end of a line in the buffer use the APPEND command 1 Use the LIST command or just the line number to list the line you want to change 2 Enter APPEND followed by the text you want to add If the text you want to add b
325. re information see the AUTOCOMMIT variable of the SET command in Chapter 8 Stopping a Command while it is Running Suppose you have displayed the first page of a 50 page report and decide you do not need to see the rest of it Press Cancel Refer to Table 2 1 at the beginning of this chapter to see how Cancel is labelled on your keyboard SQL Plus stops the display and returns to the command prompt Note Pressing Cancel will not stop the printing of a file that you have sent to a printer with the OUT clause of the SQL Plus SPOOL command You will learn about printing query results in Chapter 4 You can stop the printing of a file through your operating system For more information see your operating system s installation and user s manual Collecting Timing Statistics on Commands You Run Use the SQL Plus command TIMING to collect and display data on the amount of computer resources used to run one or more commands or blocks TIMING collects data for an elapsed period of time saving the data on commands run during the period in a timer See TIMING in Chapter 8 and the Oracle installation and user s manuals provided for your operating system for more information To delete all timers enter CLEAR TIMING at the command prompt Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 15 Getting Help Running Host Operating System Commands You can execute a host operating system command from the SQL Plus command prompt This is us
326. rea SGA A shared storage area that contains information required by user processes and background processes such as data and control information for one Oracle instance The SGA is allocated when an Oracle instance is started and is deallocated when the instance shuts down SYSTEM username One of two standard DBA usernames automatically created with each database the other is SYS The Oracle user SYSTEM is created with the password MANAGER The SYSTEM username is the preferred username for DBAs to use when performing database maintenance system variable A variable that indicates status or environment which is given a default value by Oracle or SQL Plus Examples are LINESIZE and PAGESIZE Use the SQL Plus commands SHOW and SET to see and alter the value of system variables table The basic unit of storage in a relational database management system A table represents entities and relationships and consists of one or more units of information rows each of which contains the same kinds of values columns Each column is given a column name a datatype such as CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 NVARCHAR2 DATE or NUMBER and a width the width may be predetermined by the datatype as in DATE Once a table is created valid rows of data can be inserted into it Table information can then be queried deleted or updated To enforce defined business rules on a table s data integrity constraints and triggers can also be defined for a ta
327. rivileges to use the SGA clause otherwise you will receive a message ORA 00942 table or view does not exist Shows the value of SQL SQLCODE the SQL return code of the most recent operation Shows the current TTITLE definition Shows the username you are currently using to access SQL Plus If you connect as AS SYSDBA then the SQL gt SHOW USER command dis plays SQL gt USER is SYS Command Reference 8 125 SHOW Examples To list the current LINESIZE enter SQL gt SHOW LINESIZE If the current linesize is 80 characters SOL Plus will give the following response linesize 80 The following example illustrates how to create a stored procedure and then show its compilation errors SQL gt connect system manager SQL gt create procedure scott procl as SQL gt begin SOL gt spl 1 SQL gt end SQL gt Warning Procedure created with compilation errors SQL gt show errors Errors for PROCEDURE SCOTT PROC1 INE COL ERROR 3 3 PLS 00049 bad bind variable P1 SQL gt show errors procedure procl o errors SQL gt show errors procedure scott procl Errors for PROCEDURE SCOTT PROC1 INE COL ERROR 3 3 PLS 00049 bad bind variable P1 To show whether AUTORECOVERY is enabled enter SQL gt SHOW AUTORECOVERY autorecovery ON To display the connect identifier for the default instance enter SQL gt
328. ror occurs when the RUN or slash command is used to execute the buffer The GET command can be used to load files created with the SAVE command See the SAVE command in this chapter for more information Example To load a file called YEARENDRPT with the extension SQL into the buffer enter SQL gt GET YEARENDRPT Command Reference 8 69 HELP HELP Purpose Accesses the SQL Plus help system Syntax HELP topic Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause topic Represents a SQL Plus help topic for example COLUMN Enter HELP without topic to get help on the help system Usage Notes You can only enter one topic after HELP You can abbreviate the topic for example COL for COLUMN However if you enter only an abbreviated topic and the abbreviation is ambiguous SQL Plus displays help for all topics that match the abbreviation For example if you enter SQL gt HELP EX SQL Plus displays the syntax for the EXECUTE command followed by the syntax for the EXIT command If you get a response indicating that help is not available consult your database administrator Example To see a list of SOL Plus commands for which help is available enter SQL gt HELP INDEX Alternatively to see a single column display of SQL Plus commands for which help is available enter SQL gt HELP TOPICS 8 70 SQL Plus User s Guide and Referen
329. s Your settings might differ from the default settings if you have a SQL Plus LOGIN file on your computer For more information on system variables and their default settings see the SET command in Chapter 8 For details on the SQL Plus LOGIN file refer to the section Setting Up Your SQL Plus Environment under Saving Commands for Later Use in Chapter 3 and to the SQLPLUS command in Chapter 7 To list the current setting of a SET command variable enter SHOW followed by the variable name at the command prompt See the SHOW command in Chapter 8 for information on other items you can list with SHOW Saving Changes to the Database Automatically Through the SQL DML commands UPDATE INSERT and DELETE which can be used independently or within a PL SQL block specify changes you wish to make to the information stored in the database These changes are not made permanent until you enter a SQL COMMIT command or a SQL DCL or DDL command such as CREATE TABLE or use the autocommit feature The SQL Plus autocommit Learning SQL Plus Basics 2 13 Entering and Executing Commands feature causes pending changes to be committed after a specified number of successful SQL DML transactions A SQL DML transaction is either an UPDATE INSERT or DELETE command or a PL SQL block You control the autocommit feature with the SQL Plus SET command s AUTOCOMMIT variable It has these four forms SET AUTOCOMMIT ON Turns autocommi
330. s lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt and the closing tags lt BODY gt and lt HTML gt to the start and end of each file created by the SQL Plus SPOOL filename command The default is OFF You can turn SPOOL ON and OFF as required during a session Note It is important to distinguish between the SET MARKUP HTML SPOOL option and the SQLPLUS SPOOL filename command The SET MARKUP HTML SPOOL ON option enables the writing of HTML tags to the spool file The spool file is not created and the tags enabled by the SET MARKUP HTML SPOOL ON option are not written to the spool file until you issue the SQLPLUS SPOOL filename command SQL Plus writes several HTML tags to the spool file when you issue the SPOOL filename command The tags written and their default content are lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt SQL Plus Report lt TITLE gt lt META name generator content SOL Plus 8 1 7 gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt When you issue any of the SQL Plus commands EXIT SPOOL OFF or SPOOL filename SQL Plus appends the following end tags and closes the file lt BODY gt lt HTML gt You can specify lt HEAD gt tag contents and lt BODY gt attributes using the HEAD and BODY options 7 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Starting SQL Plus Using the SQLPLUS Command PRE FORMAT ON OFF PREFORMAT ON or OFF specifies whether or not SQL Plus writes out put to the lt PRE
331. s 4 22 8 140 F 2 displaying 8 101 embedded CGI example 4 42 embedded using SQLPLUS MARKUP 4 42 formatting column headings 4 2 8 30 formatting columns 4 4 4 6 8 30 interactive HTML example 4 39 4 41 interactive using SET MARKUP HTML 4 38 Index 15 line wrapping GL 25 onthe web 4 38 4 42 SILENT mode 4 46 starting on anew page 8 104 subtotal GL 22 summary GL 22 summary line GL 22 title 8 140 GL 24 reserved word GL 19 RESTRICT 7 8 8 133 E 8 RETRY clause 8 134 return code specifying 3 18 8 68 8 154 REVOKE command E 2 disabling E 6 RIGHT clause 4 25 8 92 8 141 roles E 7 GL 19 disabling E 7 re enabling E 7 rollback GL 19 ROLLBACK clause 8 67 WHENEVER OSERROR 8 151 WHENEVER SQLERROR 8 153 row GL 18 GL 19 rows performing computations on 4 15 8 41 setting number retrieved at one time 8 100 setting the number after which COPY commits 8 103 RUN command 2 10 8 95 disabling E 5 executing current PL SQL block 2 10 executing current SQL command or PL SQL block 2 10 making last line current 3 4 similar to slash command 2 10 8 95 S sample tables 1 4 access to 1 7 DEMOBLD 1 7 DEMODROP 1 7 SAVE command 3 8 8 96 APPEND clause 3 18 8 96 CREATE clause 8 96 Index 16 disabling E 5 modifying command files 3 18 REPLACE clause 3 18 8 96 storing commands in command files 3 8 8 96 using with INPUT to create command files 3 10 saving environment attrib
332. s Guide Usage Notes CONNECT commits the current transaction to the database disconnects the current username from Oracle and reconnects with the specified username If you log on or connect as a user whose account has expired SQL Plus prompts you to change your password before you can connect If an account is locked a message is displayed and connection into that account as that user is not permitted until the account is unlocked by your DBA For more information about user account management refer to the CREATE and ALTER USER commands and the CREATE PROFILE command in the Oracle8i SQL Reference Examples To connect across Net8 using username SCOTT and password TIGER to the database known by the Net8 alias as FLEETDB enter SQL gt CONNECT SCOTT TIGER FLEETDB To connect using username SCOTT letting SQL Plus prompt you for the password enter SQL gt CONNECT SCOTT For more information about setting up your password file refer to the Oracle8i Administrator s Guide To use a password file to connect to an instance on the current node as a privileged user named SCOTT with the password TIGER enter SQL gt CONNECT SCOTT TIGER AS SYSDBA To connect to an instance on the current node as a privileged default user enter SQL gt CONNECT AS SYSDBA Note In the last two examples your default schema becomes SYS 8 48 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COPY CO
333. s Guide the Oracle8i SQL Reference and the Oracle8i Backup and Recovery Guide Syntax RECOVER general managed parallel where the general clause has the following syntax AUTOMATIC FROM location STANDBY DATABASE UNTIL CANCEL CHANGE integer TIME date USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE STANDBY DATAFILE datafilename DATAFILE datafilename TABLESPACE tablespace TABLESPACE tablespace UNTIL CONSISTENT WITH CONTROLFILE TABLESPACE tablespace tablespace DATAFILE datafilename datafilename LOGFILE filename CONTINUE DEFAULT CANCEL and where the managed clause has the following syntax MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE TIMEOUT integer CANCEL IMMEDIATE and where the parallel clause has the following syntax PARALLEL integer NOPARALLEL Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term and clause AUTOMATIC Automatically generates the name of the next archived redo log file needed to continue the recovery operation Oracle uses the LOG_ ARCHIVE_DEST or LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_1 and LOG_ARCHIVE_ FORMAT parameters or their defaults to generate the target redo log filename If the file is found the redo contained in that file is applied If 8 82 SQL Plus User s Guide and Ref
334. s chapter ECHO ON OFF Controls whether the START command lists each command in a com mand file as the command is executed ON lists the commands OFF suppresses the listing EDITF ILE file_name ext Sets the default filename for the EDIT command For more information about the EDIT command see EDIT in this chapter You can include a path and or file extension For information on chang ing the default extension see the SUFFIX variable of this command The default filename and maximum filename length are operating sys tem specific EMB EDDED ON OFF Controls where on a page each report begins OFF forces each report to start at the top of a new page ON allows a report to begin anywhere on a page Set EMBEDDED to ON when you want a report to begin print ing immediately following the end of the previously run report ESC APE c ON OFF Defines the character you enter as the escape character OFF undefines the escape character ON enables the escape character ON changes the value of c back to the default 8 104 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET You can use the escape character before the substitution character set through SET DEFINE to indicate that SQL Plus should treat the substi tution character as an ordinary character rather than as a request for variable substitution FEED BACK 6 n ON OFF Displays the number of records returned by a query when a query selects at least n records ON or O
335. s in a column specified in an ORDER BY clause use the BREAK command in its simplest form BREAK ON break_column Note Whenever you specify a column or expression in a BREAK command use an ORDER BY clause specifying the same column or expression If you do not do this breaks occur every time the column value changes Example 4 9 Suppressing Duplicate Values in a Break Column To suppress the display of duplicate department numbers in the query results shown above enter the following commands SQL gt BREAK ON DEPTNO SAL SQL gt SELECT DEPTNO ENAME 2 FROM EMP 3 WHERE SAL lt 2500 4 ORDER BY DEPTNO SQL Plus displays the following output DEPTNO ENAME SAL 10 CLARK 2450 TLLER 1300 20 SMITH 800 ADAMS 1100 30 ALLE 1600 JAMES 950 TURNER 1500 WARD 1250 MARTIN 1250 9 rows selected 4 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Inserting Space when a Break Column s Value Changes You can insert blank lines or begin a new page each time the value changes in the break column To insert n blank lines use the BREAK command in the following form BREAK ON break_column SKIP n To skip a page use the command in this form BREAK ON break_column SKIP PAGE Example 4 10 Inserting Space when a Break Column s Value Changes To p
336. s the current line through line n adds one or more lines adds a line consisting of text lists all lines in the SQL buffer lists line n lists the current line Editing Commands Table 3 1 SQL Plus Editing Commands Command Abbreviation Purpose LIST n Ln lists line n through the current line LIST LAST L LAST lists the last line LIST mn Lmn lists a range of lines m to n LIST n L n lists the current line through line n You will find these commands useful if you mistype a command or wish to modify a command you have entered Listing the Buffer Contents Any editing command other than LIST and DEL affects only a single line in the buffer This line is called the current line It is marked with an asterisk when you list the current command or block Example 3 1 Listing the Buffer Contents Suppose you want to list the current command Use the LIST command as shown below If you have EXITed SQL Plus or entered another SQL command or PL SQL block since following the steps in Example 2 3 perform the steps in that example again before continuing SQL gt LIST 1 SELECT EMPNO ENAME JOB SAL 2 FROM EMP WHERE SAL lt 2500 Notice that the semicolon you entered at the end of the SELECT command is not listed This semicolon is necessary to mark the end of the command when you enter it but SQL Plus does not store it in the SOL buffer This makes editing more convenient sinc
337. se commands you use the SPOOL command as shown in the previous section to create the flat file The SET COLSEP command may be useful to delineate the columns For more information see the SET command in Chapter 8 Sending Results to a File To store the results of a query in a file and still display them on the screen enter the SPOOL command in the following form SPOOL file_name SQL Plus stores all information displayed on the screen after you enter the SPOOL command in the file you specify 4 34 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Storing and Printing Query Results Sending Results to a Printer To print query results spool them to a file as described in the previous section Then instead of using SPOOL OFF enter the command in the following form SPOOL OUT SQL Plus stops spooling and copies the contents of the spooled file to your host computer s standard default printer SPOOL OUT does not delete the spool file after printing Example 4 25 Sending Query Results to a Printer To generate a final report and spool and print the results create a command file named EMPRPT containing the following commands First use EDIT to create the command file with your host operating system text editor Do not use INPUT and SAVE or SQL Plus will add a slash to the end of the file and will run the command file twice once as a result of the semicolon and once due to the slash SQL gt EDIT EMPRPT Nex
338. sececscscsccscscscssesscsesesesucucacecsusscacaesesecaratscesacacecaseees xi Preface ooo ctese Meet cee Tae Sees ceca a a Baie di Mtn eee atin le ee etal na ai xiii Part Understanding SQL Plus Introduction Overview Of SOL Plusiinae etd doves doles Seek the lund nesh tad eai cee e aa NOES oea hades staal de 1 2 Basic CONCEP wii Siete emit a se via oaan aa ORNES 1 2 Wh hoCan Use SOL Plus aane e aan r a R a a Ea a aa a saai ERa 1 2 Using this Guideneresesio terrinas o ari h D EN a Se 1 3 Conventions for Command Syntax ccccccccccesseescscssssssssecssssssseesssesssssesesesesssseeseseesesesees 1 3 Sample Tables sirrien herana E ascii E e l e REN E RE EEE 1 4 What You Need to Run SQL Plus s ssesseeeeessesesseessesessstsssrtssstsrttsststststststtseststettsstststststterstsesetesst 1 6 Hardware and Software cccccccssssscessessesssesssssseseessecseessecsscsaecsecessesaeceeceascessessseeseseseeseseeeeessaeaees 1 6 Information Specific to Your Operating System cee ceeeeeseeeseecesesssseeseseeeeeees 1 6 Username and Password s scc8 ten aaaea shhh a E raa Er e iaa E aap ada eaa 1 6 Access to Sample Tables itz iian i ai E e E E a 1 7 Learning SQL Plus Basics Gethin g Started cys lenr hides tee Fi Sees iia sand cases Pind coca aae e Eae noc E a e ea iaa t aTe inaa 2 2 Usine the Keyboards mses eos esre ae e seactrandlsdsenvabalds Sesrerdedttedesstesuscuentsendotat 2 2 Starting SQL PIUS eisni aE E A EE RE E E E E e 2 3 Leaving S
339. security fall into three broad categories a PRODUCT_USER PROFILE Table a Roles a SQLPLUS RESTRICT Security E 1 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table Overview Various Oracle products use PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE a table in the SYSTEM account to provide product level security that supplements the user level security provided by the SQL GRANT and REVOKE commands and user roles DBAs can use PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE to disable certain SOL and SQL Plus commands in the SQL Plus environment on a per user basis SOQL Plus not Oracle enforces this security DBAs can even restrict access to the GRANT REVOKE and SET ROLE commands to control users ability to change their database privileges SQL Plus reads restrictions from PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE when a user logs in to SOL Plus and maintains those restrictions for the duration of the session Changes to PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE will only take effect the next time the affected users log in to SQL Plus The PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table applies only to the local database If accessing objects on a remote database via a database link the PRODUCT_USER_ PROFILE for the remote database does not apply The remote database cannot extract the username and password from the database link in order to determine that user s profile and privileges Creating the Table You can create PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE by running the command file named PUPBLD with the extension SQL as SYSTEM The ex
340. splay the change enter a SELECT statement such as SQL gt SE ECT HIF EDATE 2 FRA HF 3 W pP NO 7839 E_FORMAT YYYY MM DD Command Reference 8 39 COLUMN The following output results Job Report 10 25 99 Job SALESMAN HIREDAT 1981 11 17 See the Oracle8i SQL Reference for information on the ALTER SESSION command Note that in a SELECT statement some SQL calculations or functions such as TO_ CHAR may cause a column to be very wide In such cases use the FORMAT option to alter the column width 8 40 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COMPUTE COMPUTE Purpose Calculates and prints summary lines using various standard computations on subsets of selected rows or lists all COMPUTE definitions For details on how to create summaries see Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines in Chapter 4 Syntax COMP UTE function LAB EL text OF expr column alias ON expr column alias REPORT ROW Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause function Represents one of the functions listed in Table 8 2 If you specify more than one function use spaces to separate the functions COMPUTE command functions are always executed in the sequence AVG COUNT MINIMUM MAXIMUM NUMBER SUM STD VARI ANCE regardless of their
341. sses the display of your password response You must include the connect_identifier clause which consists of a Net8 connection string to specify the source or destination database The exact syntax depends upon the Net8 communications protocol your Oracle installation uses For more information refer to the Net8 man ual appropriate for your protocol or contact your DBA APPEND Inserts the rows from query into destination_table if the table exists If destination_table does not exist COPY creates it CREATE Inserts the rows from query into destination_table after first creating the table If destination_table already exists COPY returns an error INSERT Inserts the rows from query into destination_table If destination_table does not exist COPY returns an error When using INSERT the USING query must select one column for each column in the destination_table REPLACE Replaces destination_table and its contents with the rows from query If destination_table does not exist COPY creates it Otherwise COPY drops the existing table and replaces it with a table containing the copied data destination_table Represents the table you wish to create or to which you wish to add data column column column Specifies the names of the columns in destination_table You must enclose a name in double quotes if it contains lowercase letters or blanks If you specify columns the number of columns must equal the number of columns se
342. ssserssssessesnsrersessessesee 3 20 Writing Interactive Commands cccc ccc cc ceseeeseececseseseecececsssnsnesecesssessnesecesessnenesesenenes 3 21 Defining User Variables esc seir a Se sists ibaa ine va dada 3 21 Using Substitution Variables ccccccccsessececssessseseccsesesescecscssssseececssssseseecesssesesesssenssessesesees 3 22 Passing Parameters through the START Command ou eee ceeeeeeeeeseseeseeneseseeeenens 3 27 Communicating with the User ssia persiera aeaaea ia rE E aE EEA 3 28 Using Bind Variables s c 5siceccs ae cg ian ie Sereda eet Adee ash ESENG 3 31 Creating Bind Variables a csce cfi aei ai a aia Aa a o Eaa E a EA 3 32 Referencing Bind Va riableSi ivesi E E a 3 32 Displaying Bind Variables ndiema e e A E ER 3 32 Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables 0 0 0 0cccc eee cseeeeee cece ceeeeseesesesesessneseseseseneseseseseness 3 33 Tracing Statements is s cc sitinieniettaeiaiinnistieaGhiannnturanels ahenuinehnramianentsstiee 3 36 Controlling the REport iscsticciscshtsecevenshaccsstevesseatevtpet senda EEEa aE EER EAEE AEA EEE Eai 3 36 Execution Pliesie ay e Nin Au A Ae Aa ise lee 3 37 SUA ESI EER ARENIE AE A A E E TE E ETE EOS AE 3 38 Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries s ss sesssssssessesssstestssessessinsisrtsnessnentestenresnesseseenee 3 40 Formatting Query Results Formatting Colamins aries ene e e aa t E ee E RE a cette R ERAR 4 2 Changing Column Headings sssssesssssessess
343. standard for relational systems covering not only query but also data definition manipulation security and some aspects of referential integrity See also Data Manipulation Language DML Data Definition Language DDL and Data Control Language DCL SQL buffer The default buffer containing your most recently entered SQL command or PL SQL block SQL Plus commands are not stored in the SQL buffer SQL command See SOL statement SQL script A file containing SQL statements that you can run in SQL Plus to perform database administration quickly and easily SQL statement A complete command or statement written in the SQL language Synonymous with statement SQL SQL Loader An Oracle tool used to load data from operating system files into Oracle database tables SQL Net Net8 s precursor An Oracle product that works with the Oracle Server and enables two or more computers that run the Oracle RDBMS or Oracle tools such as SQL Forms to exchange data through a network SQL Net supports distributed processing and distributed database capability SQL Net runs over and interconnects many communications protocols SQL Plus An interactive SQL based language for data manipulation data definition and the definition of access rights for an Oracle database Often used as an end user reporting tool statement SQL A SQL statement and analogous to a complete sentence as opposed to a phrase Portions of SOL statements or comma
344. stem maintained values you can display in titles see the TTITLE command in the Command Reference in Chapter 8 Example 4 21 Displaying the Current Page Number in a Title To display the current page number at the top of each page along with the company name enter the following command SQL gt TTITLE LEFT ACME WIDGET RIGHT PAGE SOL PNO SKIP 2 Now rerun the current query SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following results ACME WIDGET PAGE 1 DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ALLE 1600 30 BLAKE 2850 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected Note that SQL PNO has a format ten spaces wide You can change this format with the FORMAT clause of TTITLE or BTITLE Formatting Query Results 4 27 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Example 4 22 Formatting a System Maintained Value in a Title To close up the space between the word PAGE and the page number reenter the TTITLE command as shown SQL gt TTITLE LEFT ACME WIDGET RIGHT PAGE FORMAT 999 gt SQL PNO SKIP 2 Now rerun the query SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following results ACME WIDGET PAGE 1 DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ALLE 1600 30 BLAKE 2850
345. t enter the following commands into the file using your text editor SPOOL TEMP CLEAR COLUMNS CLEAR BREAKS CLEAR COMPUTES COLUMN DEPTNO HEADING DEPARTMEN COLUMN ENAME HEADING EMPLOYEE COLUMN SAL HEADING SALARY FORMAT 99 999 BREAK ON DEPTNO SKIP 1 ON REPOR COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON DEPTNO COMPUTE SUM OF SAL ON REPORT SET PAGESIZE 21 NEWPAGE 0 SE INESIZE 30 n T TTITLE CENTER ACME WIDGET SKIP 2 LEFT EMPLOYEE REPORT RIGHT PAGE FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SKIP 2 Formatting Query Results 4 35 Storing and Printing Query Results BIITLE CENTER COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL DEPTNO ENAME SAL FRO ORDER BY DEPTNO SPOOL OUT If you do not want to see the output on your screen you can also add SET TERMOUT OFF to the beginning of the file and SET TERMOUT ON to the end of the file Save the file you automatically return to SQL Plus Now run the command file EMPRPT SQL gt QE PRPT SQL Plus displays the output on your screen unless you set TERMOUT to OFF spools it to the file TEMP and sends the contents of TEMP to your default printer ACME WIDGET
346. t supplies a value for a parameter in the command file array processing Processing performed on multiple rows of data rather than one row at a time In some Oracle utilities such as SQL Plus Export Import and the precompilers users can set the size of the array increasing the array size often improves performance ASCII A convention for using digital data to represent printable characters ASCII is an acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange autocommit A feature unique to SQL Plus that enables SQL Plus to automatically commit changes to the database after every successful execution of a SQL command or PL SQL block Setting the AUTOCOMMIT variable of the SET command to ON enables this feature Setting the AUTOCOMMIT variable to n enables this feature after every n successful INSERT UPDATE or DELETE commands or PL SQL blocks background process A non interactive process that runs in an operating system environment and performs some service or action Certain Oracle database server products use background processes for different tasks such as performing and coordinating tasks on behalf of concurrent users of the database processing and delivering electronic messages and managing printing services bind reference A reference to a parameter used to replace a single literal value for example a character string number or date appearing anywhere in a PL SQL construct or a SQL SELECT statement For a bi
347. t on SET AUTOCOMMIT OFF Turns autocommit off the default SET AUTOCOMMIT n Commits changes after n SQL DML commands SET AUTOCOMMIT IMMEDIATE Turns autocommit on Example 2 5 Turning Autocommit On To turn the autocommit feature on enter SQL gt SET AUTOCOMMIT ON Alternatively you can enter the following to turn the autocommit feature on SQL gt SET AUTOCOMMIT IMMEDIATE Until you change the setting of AUTOCOMMIT SQL Plus automatically commits changes from each SQL DML command that specifies changes to the database After each autocommit SQL Plus displays the following message commit complete When the autocommit feature is turned on you cannot roll back changes to the database To commit changes to the database after a number of SQL DML commands for example ten enter SQL gt SET AUTOCOMMIT 10 SQL Plus counts SQL DML commands as they are executed and commits the changes after the tenth SQL DML command Note For this feature a PL SQL block is regarded as one transaction regardless of the actual number of SQL commands contained within it 2 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Entering and Executing Commands To turn the autocommit feature off again enter the following command SQL gt SET AUTOCOMMIT OFF To confirm that AUTOCOMMIT is now set to OFF enter the following SHOW command SQL gt SHOW AUTOCOMMIT autocommit OFF For mo
348. t to specify a different heading enter the following command SQL gt COLUMN COMM LIKE SAL HEADING Bonus Rerun the query SQL gt SQL Plus displays the following output Employee Department Name Salary Bonus 30 ALLE 1 600 300 30 WARD 1 250 500 30 MARTIN 1 250 1 400 30 TURNER 1 500 0 Listing and Resetting Column Display Attributes To list the current display attributes for a given column use the COLUMN command followed by the column name only as shown below 4 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Formatting Columns COLUMN column_name To list the current display attributes for all columns enter the COLUMN command with no column names or clauses after it COLUMN To reset the display attributes for a column to their default values use the CLEAR clause of the COLUMN command as shown below COLUMN column_name CLEAR To reset the attributes for all columns use the COLUMNS clause of the CLEAR command Example 4 7 Resetting Column Display Attributes to their Defaults To reset all columns display attributes to their default values enter the following command SQL gt CLEAR COLUMNS columns cleared Suppressing and Restoring Column Display Attributes You can suppress and restore the display attributes you have given a specific column To suppress a column s display attributes enter a COLUMN command in the following form COLUMN column_name OFF The OFF clause
349. t type ADDRESS that contains the attributes STREET and CITY enter SQL gt CREATE TYPE ADDRESS AS OBJECT 2 STREET VARCHAR2 20 3 CITY VARCHAR2 20 4 5 of SQL gt DESCRIBE address SQL Plus lists the following information Name Null Type STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHARZ2 20 To create and describe the object type EMPLOYEE that contains the attributes ENAME EMPADDR JOB and SAL enter SQL gt CREATE TYPE EMPLOYEE AS OBJECT 2 ENAME VARCHAR2 30 3 EMPADDR ADDRESS 8 58 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE 4 JOB VARCHAR2 20 5 SAL NUMBER 7 2 6 7 SQL gt DESCRIBE employee SQL Plus lists the following information Name Null Type ENAI VARCHAR2 30 EMPADDR ADDRESS JOB VARCHAR2 20 SAL NUMBER 7 2 To create and describe the object type addr_type as a table of the object type ADDRESS enter SQL gt CREATE TYPE addr_type IS TABLE OF ADDRESS 2 SQL gt DESCRIBE addr_type SQL Plus lists the following information addr_type TABLE OF ADDRESS Name Null Type STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 To create and describe the object type addr_varray as a varray of the object type ADDRESS enter SQL gt CREATE TYP
350. t your query results to produce a finished report This chapter covers the following topics a Formatting Columns a Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines a Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions a Storing and Printing Query Results a Creating Web Reports Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the examples shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the sample tables described in Chapter 1 Formatting Query Results 4 1 Formatting Columns Formatting Columns Through the SQL Plus COLUMN command you can change the column headings and reformat the column data in your query results Changing Column Headings When displaying column headings you can either use the default heading or you can change it using the COLUMN command The sections below describe how the default headings are derived and how you can alter them with the COLUMN command Default Headings SQL Plus uses column or expression names as default column headings when displaying query results Column names are often short and cryptic however and expressions can be hard to understand Changing Default Headings You can define a more useful column heading with the HEADING clause of the COLUMN command in the format shown below COLUMN column_name HEADING column_heading See the COLUMN command in Chapter 8 for more details Example 4 1 Changing a Column Heading To produce a report from EMP with new he
351. tabase management system Other types of database systems are called hierarchical or network database systems remark In SQL Plus a comment you can insert into a command file with the REMARK command remote computer A computer on a network other than the local computer remote database A database other than your default database which may reside on a remote computer in particular one that you reference in the CONNECT COPY and SOLPLUS commands report 1 The results of a query 2 Any output but especially output that has been formatted for quick reading in particular output from SQL Plus reserved word 1 A word that has a special meaning in a particular software or operating system 2 In SQL a set of words reserved for use in SQL statements you cannot use a reserved word as the name of a database object roles Named groups of related privileges that are granted to users or other roles rollback To discard pending changes made to the data in the current transaction using the SQL ROLLBACK command You can roll back a portion of a transaction by identifying a savepoint row 1 Synonym for record one row of data in a database table having values for one or more columns Also called tuple 2 One set of field values in the output of a query See also column schema A collection of logical structures of data or schema objects A schema is owned by a database user and has the same name as that user
352. te Connect string P804 Report to run Jemp sql Run it Reset Form Document Done Formatting Query Results 4 45 Creating Web Reports Click Run It to execute the shell script sq script pl which in turn starts SOL Plus and runs the employee sql script The query results are displayed directly in your web browser X SQL Plus Report Netscape Suppressing the Display of SQL Plus Commands in Web Reports It is recommended that you use SILENT mode to start your SQL Plus session This ensures that only the results of your SQL query appear in the web browser The SQLPLUS SILENT option is particularly useful when used in combination with MARKUP to generate embedded SQL Plus reports using CGI scripts or operating system command files It suppresses the display of SQL Plus commands and the SQL Plus banner Your HTML output shows only the data resulting from your SQL query 4 46 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Creating Web Reports HTML Entities Certain characters lt gt and amp have predefined meaning in HTML In the previous example you may have noticed that the gt character was replaced by amp gt as soon as you entered the SET MARKUP HTML ON command To enable these characters to be displayed in your web browser HTML provides character entities to use instead Table 4 2 Equivalent HTML Entities Character HTML Entity Meaning lt amp lt Start HTML tag label gt amp gt End
353. tem SET variables in a host operating system file a command file with the STORE command If you alter any variables this command file can be run to restore the original values This is useful if you run a report that alters system variables and you want to reset their values after the report has finished To store the current setting of all system variables enter SQL gt STORE SET file_name By default SQL Plus adds the extension SQL to the file name If you want to use a different file extension type a period at the end of the file name followed by the extension Alternatively you can use the SET SUFFIX command to change the default file extension Restoring the System Variables To restore the stored system variables enter SQL gt START file_name If the file has the default extension as specified by the SET SUFFIXcommand you do not need to add the period and extension to the file name You can also use the at sign or the double at sign commands to run the command file Example 3 10 Storing and Restoring SQL Plus System Variables To store the current values of the SQL Plus system variables in a new command file plusenv sql SQL gt STORE SET plusenv Created file plusenv Now the value of any system variable can be changed SQL gt SHOW PAGESTZE pagesize 24 SQL gt SET PAGESIZE 60 SQL gt SHOW PAGESIZE pagesize 60 3 20 SQL Plus
354. tents of the buffer SQL gt LIST 1 SELECT ENAME JOB FROM EMP WHERE ENAME JAMES Enter a slash at the command prompt to execute the command in the buffer SQL gt For the above query SQL Plus displays the following output ENAME JOB JAMES CLERK Command Reference 8 9 ACCEPT ACCEPT Purpose Reads a line of input and stores it in a given user variable Syntax ACC EPT variable NUM BER CHAR DATE FOR MAT format DEF AUL T default PROMPT text NOPR OMPT HIDE Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause variable NUM BER CHAR DATE FOR MAT Represents the name of the variable in which you wish to store a value If variable does not exist SOL Plus creates it Makes the datatype of variable the datatype NUMBER If the reply does not match the datatype ACCEPT gives an error message and prompts again Makes the datatype of variable the datatype CHAR The maximum CHAR length limit is 240 bytes If a multi byte character set is used one CHAR may be more than one byte in size Makes reply a valid DATE format If the reply is not a valid DATE for mat ACCEPT gives an error message and prompts again The datatype is CHAR Specifies the input format for the reply If the reply does not match the specified format A
355. ter the following SQL Plus command SQL Plus interprets it as a comment and does not execute the command SET LONG 777 Notes on Placing Comments SQL Plus generally does not parse or execute input it identifies as a comment SQL Plus does not have a SQL or PL SQL command parser It scans the first few keywords of each new statement to determine the command type SQL PL SQL or SQL Plus Comments in some locations can prevent SQL Plus from correctly identifying the command type giving unexpected results The following usage notes may help you to use SQL Plus comments more effectively 1 Do not put comments within the first few keywords of a statement For example SQL gt create or replace 2 hello 3 procedure hello 4 as 5 begin 6 null Warning Procedure created with compilation errors The location of the comment prevents SQL Plus from recognizing the command as a PL SQL command SQL Plus submits the block to the server when it sees the slash at the beginning of the comment which it interprets as the statement terminator You can avoid this error by moving the comment For example SQL gt create or replace procedur 2 hello Manipulating Commands 3 13 Saving Commands for Later Use 3 hello 4 as 2 Do not put comments after statement terminators fullstop semicolon or slash For example SQL gt SELECT Y FROM DUAL Testing 2 SELECT Y FROM DUAL Test
356. teristics not defined by another clause in the current ATTRIBUTE command ON OFF Controls the status of display characteristics for a column OFF disables the characteristics for an attribute without affecting the characteristics definition ON reinstates the characteristics Usage Notes You can enter any number of ATTRIBUTE commands for one or more attributes All attribute characteristics set for each attribute remain in effect for the remainder of the session until you turn the attribute OFF or until you use the CLEAR COLUMN command Thus the ATTRIBUTE commands you enter can control an attribute s display characteristics for multiple SQL SELECT commands When you enter multiple ATTRIBUTE commands for the same attribute SOL Plus applies their clauses collectively If several ATTRIBUTE commands apply the same clause to the same attribute the last one entered will control the output Examples To make the ENAME attribute of the Object Type EMP_TYPE 20 characters wide enter SQL gt ATTRIBUTE EMP_TYPE ENAME FORMAT A20 To format the SAL attribute of the Object Type EMP_TYPE so that it shows millions of dollars rounds to cents uses commas to separate thousands and displays 0 00 when a value is zero enter SQL gt ATTRIBUTE EMP_TYPE SAL FORMAT 9 999 990 99 8 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BREAK BREAK Purpose Specifies where and how formatting will
357. text on three consecutive lines instead of bold FORMAT text Specifies a format model that determines the format of following data items up to the next FORMAT clause or the end of the command The format model must be a text constant such as A10 or 999 See COL UMN FORMAT for more information on formatting and valid format models If the datatype of the format model does not match the datatype of a given data item the FORMAT clause has no effect on that item 8 92 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference REPHEADER If no appropriate FORMAT model precedes a given data item SQL Plus prints NUMBER values according to the format specified by SET NUMFORMAT or if you have not used SET NUMFORMAT the default format SQL Plus prints DATE values according to the default format Refer to the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command in this chap ter for more information on default formats Enter REPHEADER with no clauses to list the current REPHEADER definition Usage Notes If you do not enter a printspec clause before the text or variables REPHEADER left justifies the text or variables You can use any number of constants and variables in a printspec SQL Plus displays the constants and variables in the order you specify them positioning and formatting each constant or variable as specified by the printspec clauses that precede it Example To define EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT as a report header on a separate page and to center it
358. th the RECOVER CANCEL clause or until instance shutdown or failure CANCEL IMMEDIATE PARALLEL Terminates the sustained recovery operation after applying all the redo in the current archived redo file or after the next redo log file read whichever comes first integer Causes Oracle to select a degree of parallelism equal to the number of CPUs available on all participating instances times the value of the PARALLEL _THREADS_PER_CPU initialization parameter The PARALLEL keyword overrides the RECOVERY_PARALLELISM initialization parameter For more information about the PARALLEL keyword see the Oracle8i Parallel Server Concepts manual Use integer to specify the degree of parallelism which is the number of parallel threads used in the parallel operation Each parallel thread may use one or two parallel execution processes Normally Oracle calculates the optimum degree of parallelism so it is not necessary for you to specify integer Command Reference 8 85 RECOVER NOPARALLEL Specifies serial execution This is the default Usage Notes You must be connected to Oracle as SYSOPER or SYSDBA You cannot use the RECOVER command when connected via the multi threaded server To perform media recovery on an entire database all tablespaces the database must be mounted EXCLUSIVE and closed To perform media recovery on a tablespace the database must be mounted and open and the tablespace must be offline To perform m
359. the following for a description of the term or clause text Represents the text of the message you wish to display If you omit text PROMPT displays a blank line on the user s screen Usage Notes You can use this command in command files to give information to the user Example The following example shows the use of PROMPT in conjunction with ACCEPT ina command file called ASKFORDEPT ASKFORDEPT contains the following SQL Plus and SQL commands PROMP PROMPT Please enter a valid department PROMPT For example 10 20 30 40 ACCEP VEWDEPT NUMBER PROMPT DEPT gt SELECT DNAME FROM DEPT WHERE DEPTNO amp NEWDEPT Assume you run the file using START or SQL gt ASKFORDEPT SQL Plus displays the following prompts Please enter a valid department For example 10 20 30 40 DEPT gt 8 80 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PROMPT You can enter a department number at the prompt DEPT gt By default SQL Plus lists the line containing amp NEWDEPT before and after substitution and then displays the department name corresponding to the number entered at the DEPT gt prompt Command Reference 8 81 RECOVER RECOVER Purpose Performs media recovery on one or more tablespaces one or more datafiles or the entire database For more information on the RECOVER command see the Oracle8i Administrator
360. the size in bytes of the increments in which SQL Plus retrieves a LONG CLOB or NCLOB value MARK UP HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FORMAT ON OFF Outputs HTML 3 2 marked up text SET MARKUP has the same options and behavior as SQLPLUS MARKUP For detailed informa tion see MARKUP Options in Chapter 7 For examples of usage see MARKUP on page 8 117 and Creating Web Reports in Chapter 4 NEWP AGE 1 n NONE Sets the number of blank lines to be printed from the top of each page to the top title A value of zero places a formfeed at the beginning of each page including the first page and clears the screen on most termi nals If you set NEWPAGE to NONE SQL Plus does not print a blank line or formfeed between the report pages NULL text Sets the text that represents a null value in the result of a SQL SELECT command Use the NULL clause of the COLUMN command to over ride the setting of the NULL variable for a given column Command Reference 8 107 SET NUMF ORMAT format Sets the default format for displaying numbers Enter a number format for format For number format descriptions see the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command in this chapter NUM WIDTH 10 n Sets the default width for displaying numbers For number format descriptions see the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command in this chapter PAGES IZE 24 n Sets the number of lines in each page You c
361. ting system file a command file Syntax STORE SET file_name ext CRE ATE REP LACE APP END Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause SET Saves the values of the system variables Refer to the SAVE command for information on the other terms and clauses in the STORE command syntax Usage Notes This command creates a command file which can be executed with the START or commands If you want to store a file under a name identical to a STORE command clause that is CREATE REPLACE or APPEND you must put the name in single quotes or specify a file extension Example To store the current SQL Plus system variables in a file named DEFAULTENV with the default command file extension enter SQL gt STORE SET DEFAULTENV To append the current SQL Plus system variables to an existing file called DEFAULTENYV with the extension OLD enter SQL gt STORE SET DEFAULTENV OLD APPEND Command Reference 8 137 TIMING TIMING Purpose Records timing data for an elapsed period of time lists the current timer s name and timing data or lists the number of active timers Syntax TIMI NG START text SHOW STOP Terms and Clauses Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause START text Sets up a timer and makes text the name of the timer You can have more than one act
362. title and to left align it to center the date to right align the page number with a three digit format and to display Data in Thousands in the center of the next line enter SQL gt TTITLE LEFT Monthly Analysis CENTER 23 Nov 99 gt RIGHT Page FORMAT 999 SOL PNO SKIP CENTER gt Data in Thousands The following title results Monthly Analysis 23 Nov 99 Page 1 Data in Thousands To suppress the top title display without changing its definition enter SQL gt TTITLE OFF Command Reference 8 143 UNDEFINE UNDEFINE Purpose Deletes one or more user variables that you defined either explicitly with the DEFINE command or implicitly with an argument to the START command Syntax UNDEF INE variable Terms and Clauses Refer to the following for a description of the term or clause variable Represents the name of the user variable you wish to delete One or more user variables may be deleted in the same command Examples To undefine a user variable named POS enter SQL gt UNDEFINE POS To undefine two user variables named MYVAR1 and MYVAR2 enter SQL gt UNDEFINE MYVAR1 MYVAR2 8 144 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE VARIABLE Purpose Declares a bind variable that can then be referenced in PL SQL For more information on bind variables see Using Bind Variables in Chapter 3 For more
363. tively You can alter these widths using the COLUMN command LNO Shows the current line number the position in the current page of the display and or spooled output PARAMETERS parameter_name Displays the current values for one or more initialization parameters You can use a string after the command to see a subset of parameters whose names include that string For example if you enter SQL gt SHOW PARAMETERS COUNT you would see NAME TYPE VALUE db file multiblock_read_count integer 12 spin _ count integer 0 The SHOW PARAMETERS command without any string following the command displays all initialization parameters 8 124 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHOW PNO REL EASE Note your output may vary depending on the version and configura tion of the Oracle database server to which you are connected You need SELECT ON V_ PARAMETER object privileges to use the PARAMETERS clause otherwise you will receive a message ORA 00942 table or view does not exist Shows the current page number Shows the release number of Oracle that SQL Plus is accessing REPF OOTER Shows the current REPFOOTER definition REPH EADER SPOO L SGA SQLCODE TTI TLE USER Shows the current REPHEADER definition Shows whether output is being spooled Displays information about the current instance s System Global Area Note you need SELECT ON V_ SGA object p
364. to 5000 You can set the size of a batch with the ARRAYSIZE variable If you set COPYCOMMIT to zero COPY performs a commit only at the end of a copy operation COPYTYPECHECK ON OFF Sets the suppression of the comparison of datatypes while inserting or appending to tables with the COPY command This is to facilitate copy ing to DB2 which requires that a CHAR be copied to a DB2 DATE DEF INE amp c ON OFF Sets the character used to prefix substitution variables to c ON or OFF controls whether SQL Plus will scan commands for substitution vari Command Reference 8 103 SET ables and replace them with their values ON changes the value of c back to the default amp not the most recently used character The set ting of DEFINE to OFF overrides the setting of the SCAN variable For more information on the SCAN variable see the SET SCAN command in Appendix F DESCRIBE DEPTH 1 n ALL LINENUM ON OFF INDENT ON OFF Sets the depth of the level to which you can recursively describe an object The valid range of the DEPTH clause is from 1 to 50 If you SET DESCRIBE DEPTH ALL then the depth will be set to 50 which is the maximum level allowed You can also display the line number and indentation of the attribute or column name when an object contains multiple object types Use the SET LINESIZE command to control the width of the data displayed For more information about describing objects see DESCRIBE earlier in thi
365. to a new page after finding the new value for the master column Therefore if you simply referenced the NEW_VALUE of the master column you would get the value for the next set of details OLD_VALUE remembers the value of the master column that was in effect before the page break began Displaying the Current Date in Titles You can of course date your reports by simply typing a value in the title This is satisfactory for ad hoc reports but if you want to run the same report repeatedly you would probably prefer to have the date automatically appear when the report is run You can do this by creating a variable to hold the current date To create the variable in this example named _DATE you can add the following commands to your SQL Plus LOGIN file SET TERMOUT OFF BREAK ON TODAY COLUMN TODAY NEW VALUE _DATE SELECT TO_CHAR SYSDATE fmMonth DD YYYY TODAY FROM DUAL CLEAR BREAKS 4 30 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions SET TERMOUT ON When you start SOL Plus these commands place the value of SYSDATE the current date into a variable named _DATE To display the current date you can reference _DATE in a title as you would any other variable The date format model you include in the SELECT command in your LOGIN file determines the format in which SQL Plus displays the date See your Oracle8i SQL Reference
366. tput UND ERLINE c ON OFF Sets the character used to underline column headings in SQL Plus reports to c Note c cannot be an alphanumeric character or a white space ON or OFF turns underlining on or off ON changes the value of c back to the default VER IFY ON OFF Controls whether SQL Plus lists the text of a SOL statement or PL SQL command before and after SQL Plus replaces substitution variables with values ON lists the text OFF suppresses the listing WRA P ON OFF Controls whether SQL Plus truncates the display of a SELECTed row if it is too long for the current line width OFF truncates the SELECTed row ON allows the SELECTed row to wrap to the next line Use the WRAPPED and TRUNCATED clauses of the COLUMN com mand to override the setting of WRAP for specific columns Usage Notes SQL Plus maintains system variables also called SET command variables to allow you to establish a particular environment for a SQL Plus session You can change these system variables with the SET command and list them with the SHOW command SET ROLE and SET TRANSACTION are SQL commands see the Oracle8i SQL Reference for more information When not followed by the keywords TRANSACTION or ROLE SET is assumed to be a SQL Plus command Examples The following examples show sample uses of selected SET command variables APPINFO To display the setting of APPINFO enter SQL gt SHOW APPINFO 8 112 SQL Plus User s Guide and Ref
367. tring within the column bounds beginning new lines when required When WORD_WRAP is enabled SQL Plus left justifies each new line skipping all leading whitespace for example returns newline characters tabs and spaces including embedded newline characters Embedded whitespace not on a line boundary is not skipped TRUNCATED truncates the string at the end of the first line of display Usage Notes You can enter any number of COLUMN commands for one or more columns All column attributes set for each column remain in effect for the remainder of the session until you turn the column OFF or until you use the CLEAR COLUMN command Thus the COLUMN commands you enter can control a column s display attributes for multiple SQL SELECT commands When you enter multiple COLUMN commands for the same column SQL Plus applies their clauses collectively If several COLUMN commands apply the same clause to the same column the last one entered will control the output Examples To make the ENAME column 20 characters wide and display EMPLOYEE NAME on two lines as the column heading enter SQL gt COLUMN ENAME FORMAT A20 HEADING EMPLOYEE NAME To format the SAL column so that it shows millions of dollars rounds to cents uses commas to separate thousands and displays 0 00 when a value is zero you would enter SQL gt COLUMN SAL FORMAT 9 999 990 99 To assign the alias NET to a column containing a
368. ts els EEEN a oui onlonsusths ARSE OEE SOS Meaka e A SEENTE ANA 8 82 REMARK irienn teei oh ened es Re EEEE E TT A E E O E NE NE 8 88 REPFOOTER oeta oee EEE eSEE LE EE ae TE EE EE OE EEEE 8 89 REPHEADER maae rara Ae a congeuttas aaa ea aaa aE EDA Ee SAS ETEL Reco wkgass draws Gens IER EERS 8 91 RUN saina bd a a dauttiea didi dativsis berate ea n eth dient 8 95 a1 A EPEA EE E ss tohh oe aes oath haat EE A stabs oe A ATEA 8 96 na N AE AEE EE T active dacgudsves EA E EE ET outages 8 98 SHOW 5 ioe ie A cade SO a OG ieee saad sas tanta da AEE EEE T EE A AAA 8 123 SHUTDOWN sees eer es Oia othe ie Giese A rain Action ea EAR REA Mees UNE 8 128 SPOOL inene Seve tee aE donee aa T les A cals Sines eatin erica esa eRe catia 8 130 START AEREE E A SE E E E E TS AE E A 8 131 STARTUP keiid a a a eaa n aa aa ei i 8 133 STOREX A ai e T e ARE TEE E EE ti tone EEE EEA EE 8 137 TIMING eeta eea Se Sta i E e E e a e ae Te a E eats dress NAPE TERESE 8 138 A a K H E A AA EN AE AE E AANT ERE IEA TEE AE TE 8 140 VNDEBINE AAEE ETETA ATE NT T A AATE EAA 8 144 VARIABLE oonde Da EE E a TO dhs bases a DIA ADEN 8 145 WHENEVEROSERROR seipinn araa treere e EE apiece E e EAEra EL E EE EE Rei 8 151 WHENEVER SOLERROR wisi co ities eia a ie oaee iei E E atei 8 153 A COPY Command Messages and Codes B Release 8 1 7 Enhancements C SQL Plus Limits D SQL Command List E Security F Obsolete SQL Plus Commands Glossary Index Send Us Your Comments SQL Plus User s Guide and Ref
369. u can change the line separator character with SET HEADSEP You can control the formatting of page numbers in the old forms of TTITLE and BTITLE by defining a variable named _page The default value of _page is the formatting string page amp P4 To alter the format you can DEFINE _page witha new formatting string as follows SQL gt SET ESCAPE SQL gt DEFINE _page Page amp P2 This formatting string will print the word page with an initial capital letter and format the page number to a width of two You can substitute any text for page and any number for the width You must set escape so that SQL Plus does not interpret the ampersand amp as a substitution variable See the ESCAPE variable of the SET command in Chapter 8 for more information on setting the escape character SQL Plus interprets TTITLE in the old form if a valid new form clause does not immediately follow the command name If you want to use CENTER with TTITLE and put more than one word on a line you should use the new form of TTITLE For more information see the TTITLE command in Chapter 8 Example To use the old form of TTITLE to set a top title with a left aligned date and right aligned page number on one line followed by SALES DEPARTMENT on the next line and PERSONNEL REPORT on a third line enter SQL gt TTITLE SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT F 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Refer
370. upted to dis able a thread Continues recovery using the redo log file that Oracle would automati cally generate if no other logfile were specified This option is equiva lent to specifying AUTOMATIC except that Oracle does not prompt for a filename CANCEL Terminates cancel based recovery 8 84 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE Specifies sustained standby recovery mode This mode assumes that the standby database is an active component of an overall standby data base architecture A primary database actively archives its redo log files to the standby site As these archived redo logs arrive at the standby site they become available for use by a managed standby recovery operation Sustained standby recovery is restricted to media recovery For more information on the parameters of this clause see the Oracle8i Backup and Recovery Guide TIMEOUT integer Specifies in minutes the wait period of the sustained recovery opera tion The recovery process waits for integer minutes for a requested archived log redo to be available for writing to the standby database If the redo log file does not become available within that time the recov ery process terminates with an error message You can then issue the statement again to return to sustained standby recovery mode If you do not specify this clause the database remains in sustained standby recovery mode until you reissue the statement wi
371. us Using the SQLPLUS Command EXIT FAILURE command See the EXIT command in this chapter for further information Example 7 1 Starting SQL Plus To start SQL Plus with username SCOTT and password TIGER enter SQL gt SQLPLUS SCOTT TIGER To start SQL Plus as above and to make POLICY the default database where POLICY is a valid Net8 database connect identifier enter SQL gt SQLPLUS SCOTT TIGER POLICY To start SQL Plus with username SCOTT and password TIGER and run a command file named STARTUP with the extension SQL enter SQL gt SQLPLUS SCOTT TIGER STARTUP Note the space between TIGER and STARTUP To start SQL Plus with HTML ON so that output can be viewed on a web browser enter SQL gt SQLPLUS M HTML ON SCOTT TIGER To start SQL Plus with no access to the EDIT and HOST commands during the session enter SQL gt SQLPLUS R 1 SCOTT TIGER Example 7 2 Displaying the SQLPLUS syntax To display the syntax of the SQLPLUS command enter SQL gt SQLPLUS H SQL Plus displays the following Usage SQLPLUS lt option gt lt logon gt lt start gt where lt option gt M lt o gt R lt n gt S lt logon gt lt username gt lt password gt lt connect_identifier gt NOLOG lt start gt lt filename gt lt ext gt lt parameter gt displays the SOL Plus version banner and usage syntax displays the SQL Plus version banner
372. users whose names start with CLASS a all users Must contain the name in uppercase of the SQL SQL Plus or PL SQL command you wish to disable for example GET If you are disabling a role it must contain the character string ROLES You cannot enter a wildcard See the section Administration later in this chapter for a list of SQL and SQL Plus commands you can disable See the section Roles in this chapter for information on how to disable a role Security E 3 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table Scope SQL Plus ignores this column It is recommended that you enter NULL in this column Other products may store specific file restrictions or other data in this column Numeric_Value SQL Plus ignores this column It is recommended that you enter NULL in this column Other products may store numeric values in this column Char_ Value Must contain the character string DISABLED to disable a SQL SQL Plus or PL SQL command If you are disabling a role it must contain the name of the role you wish to disable You cannot use a wildcard See Roles below for information on how to disable a role Date_Value SQL Plus ignores this column It is recommended that you enter NULL in this column Other products may store DATE values in this column Long_Value SQL Plus ignores this column It is recommended that you enter NULL in this column Other products may store LONG values in this column Administration The DBA username SYSTEM ow
373. ut interpreting the output of EXPLAIN PLAN see the Oracle8i Designing and Tuning for Performance The statistics are recorded by the server when your statement executes and indicate the system resources required to execute your statement The client referred to in the statistics is SQL Plus Net8 refers to the generic process communication between SQL Plus and the server regardless of whether Net8 is installed You cannot change the default format of the statistics report For more information about the statistics and how to interpret them see the OracleSi Designing and Tuning for Performance Example 3 21 Tracing Statements for Performance Statistics and Query Execution Path If the SQL buffer contains the following statement SQL gt SELECT D DNAME E ENAME E SAL E JOB 2 FROM EMP E DEPT D 3 WHERE E DEPTNO D DEPTNO The statement can be automatically traced when it is run SQL gt SET AUTOTRACE ON SQL gt DNAME ENAME SAL JOB ACCOUNTING CLARK 2450 MANAGER ACCOUNTING KING 5000 PRESIDENT ACCOUNTING ILLER 1300 CLERK RESEARCH SMITH 800 CLERK RESEARCH ADAMS 1100 CLERK RESEARCH FORD 3000 ANALYST RESEARCH SCOTT 3000 ANALYST RESEARCH JONES 2975 MANAGER SALES ALLEN 1600 SALESMAN 3 38 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Tracing St
374. utes 8 137 SCAN variable F 2 F 6 schema GL 19 SCREEN clause 3 31 8 28 screen clearing 3 31 8 28 script GL 21 CGI 442 GL 6 search paths Installation and User s Guide 8 51 Security RESTRICT 7 8 E 8 security changing password 8 77 embedded web reports 4 43 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table E 2 security level GL 19 select GL 20 SELECT command and BREAK command 4 11 8 20 8 21 and COLUMN command 8 31 and COMPUTE command 4 11 and COPY command 6 6 8 51 and DEFINE command 8 52 and ORDER BY clause 4 11 disabling E 6 storing current date in variable for titles 4 30 SELECT list GL 20 SELECT statement GL 20 formatting results 3 33 semicolon in PL SQL blocks 2 10 inSQL commands 2 6 2 8 in SQL Plus commands 2 13 8 1 not needed when inputting a command file 3 10 not stored in buffer 3 3 Server GL 16 server GL 20 SERVEROUTPUT variable 8 109 service Name in COPY command 6 9 service name in CONNECT command 6 3 in COPY command 6 5 6 7 in SQLPLUS command 6 4 session GL 20 SET AUTOTRACE 3 36 SET clause 8 137 SET command 2 13 3 20 4 38 8 98 GL 23 APPINFO variable 8 99 ARRAYSIZE variable 6 8 8 100 AUTOCOMMIT variable 2 14 8 100 AUTOPRINT variable 8 101 8 146 AUTORECOVERY variable 8 101 AUTOTRACE variable 8 101 BLOCKTERMINATOR variable 8 102 BUFFER variable F 4 CLOSECURSOR variable F 2 F 5 CMDSEP variable 8 102 COLSEP variable 4 34 8 102 COMPATIBILITY clause 3 19
375. val split in i 2 Change encoding to machine character set key s A Fa f 0 9 2 pack c hex 1 ge Sval s A Fa f0 9 2 pack c hex 1 ge Store the value in Skey val Construct the connection string from values passed in Sconnstr in username Sin password Sconnstr connstr Sin db if Sin db Construct the SQL script to be run Sscript Sin script Force output to be flushed 1 Print mime type print Content Type text html n n 4 44 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Creating Web Reports if debug print lt html gt lt body gt n print Splusexe Sconnstr script n print lt body gt lt html gt n exit Call SQL Plus with the parameters entered from the web browser system Splusexe r 3 s m html on Sconnstr Sscript exit SQL Script for CGI Example Create the following SQL Plus script in a text editor and save it as employee sql in the cgi bin directory of your web server select empno ename from emp exit Start your web browser and enter the appropriate URL to open sqlplus html X SQL Plus Report Demonstration Netscape Loix File Edit View Go Communicator Help Back Forward Reload Home Search Netscape Print Security Stop m 7 C AWork CGI Solution plus html SQL Plus Report Demonstration Username Jecort Password re
376. vironment variables symbols or possibly by editing an Oracle specific configuration file Refer to your Oracle documentation for your operating system for more information 6 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Connecting to a Remote Database Connecting to a Remote Database Many large installations run Oracle on more than one computer Such computers are often connected in a network which permits programs on different computers to exchange data rapidly and efficiently Networked computers can be physically near each other or can be separated by large distances and connected by telecommunication links Databases on other computers or databases on your host computer other than your default database are called remote databases You can access remote databases if the desired database has Net8 and both databases have compatible network drivers You can connect to a remote database in one of two ways a from within SQL Plus using the CONNECT command a as you start SOL Plus using the SQLPLUS command Connecting to a Remote Database from within SQL Plus To connect to a remote database using CONNECT include a Net8 database specification in the CONNECT command in one of the following forms the username and password you enter must be valid for the database to which you wish to connect a CONNECT SCOTT connect_identifier a CONNECT SCOTT TIGER connect_identifier SQL Plus prompts you for a password as needed and connects you to t
377. w type procedure function package or syn onym you wish to describe connect_identifier Consists of the database link name corresponding to the database where object exists For more information on which privileges allow access to another table in a different schema refer to the Oracle8i SQL Reference Usage Notes The description for tables views types and synonyms contains the following information a each column s name a whether or not null values are allowed NULL or NOT NULL for each column a datatype of columns for example NUMBER CHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR LONG DATE RAW LONGRAW or ROWID a precision of columns and scale if any for a numeric column When you do a DESCRIBE VARCHAR columns are returned with a type of VARCHAR2 8 56 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE The DESCRIBE command allows you to describe objects recursively to the depth level set in the SET DESCRIBE command You can also display the line number and indentation of the attribute or column name when an object contains multiple object types For more information see the SET command later in this chapter To control the width of the data displayed use the SET LINESIZE command For more information see the SET command later in this chapter The description for functions and procedures contains the following information a the type of PL SQL object function or procedure a the name of the function or procedure a the t
378. wing list for a description of each term or clause column expr Identifies the data item typically the name of a column in a SQL SELECT command to which the column command refers If you use an expression in a COLUMN command you must enter expr exactly as it appears in the SELECT command If the expression in the SELECT com mand is a b for example you cannot use b a or a b in a COLUMN command to refer to the expression in the SELECT command If you select columns with the same name from different tables a COL UMN command for that column name will apply to both columns That is a COLUMN command for the column ENAME applies to all col umns named ENAME that you reference in this session COLUMN ignores table name prefixes in SELECT commands Also spaces are ignored unless the name is placed in double quotes To format the columns differently assign a unique alias to each column within the SELECT command itself do not use the ALIAS clause of the COLUMN command and enter a COLUMN command for each col umn s alias ALI AS alias CLE AR Assigns a specified alias to a column which can be used to refer to the column in BREAK COMPUTE and other COLUMN commands Resets the display attributes for the column to default values To reset the attributes for all columns use the CLEAR COLUMNS com mand CLEAR COLUMNS also clears the ATTRIBUTEs for that col umn ENTMAP ON OFF Allows entity mapping to be turned on or
379. with a word processor before printing or include them in a letter memo or other document To store the results of a query in a file and still display them on the screen enter the SPOOL command in the following form SPOOL file _name If you do not follow the filename with a period and an extension SPOOL adds a default file extension to the filename to identify it as an output file The default varies with the host operating system on most hosts it is LST or LIS See the Oracle Formatting Query Results 4 33 Storing and Printing Query Results installation and user s manual s provided for your operating system for more information SQL Plus continues to spool information to the file until you turn spooling off using the following form of SPOOL SPOOL OFF Creating a Flat File When moving data between different software products it is sometimes necessary to use a flat file an operating system file with no escape characters headings or extra characters embedded For example if you do not have Net8 you need to create a flat file for use with SQL Loader when moving data from Oracle7 to Oracle8 To create a flat file with SQL Plus you first must enter the following SET commands SET NEWPAGE 0 SET SPACE 0 SET LINESIZE 80 SET PAGESIZE 0 SET ECHO OFF SET FEEDBACK OFF SET HEADING OFF SET MARKUP HTML OFF SPOOL OFF After entering the
380. word with an optional Net8 address username The name by which a user is known to the Oracle database server and to other users Every username is associated with a private password and both must be entered to connect to an Oracle database See also account user variable A variable defined and set by you explicitly with the DEFINE command or implicitly with an argument to the START command VARCHAR An Oracle Corporation datatype Specifically this datatype functions identically to the Oracle VARCHAR datatype see definition below However Oracle Corporation recommends that you use VARCHAR2 instead of VARCHAR because Oracle Corporation may change the functionality of VARCHAR in the future VARCHAR2 An Oracle Corporation datatype Specifically it is a variable length alpha numeric string with a maximum length of 4000 characters If data entered for a column of type VARCHAR is less than 4000 no spaces will be padded the data is stored with a length as entered If data entered is more than 4000 an error occurs variable A named object that holds a single value SQL Plus uses bind substitution system and user variables width The width of a column parameter or layout object Width is measured in characters a space is a character wrapping A reporting or output feature in which a portion of text is moved to a new line when the entire text does not fit on one line Glossary 25 Glossary 26 comment deli
381. y to see the results SQL gt ACME WIDGET SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT DEPTNO ENAME SAL 30 JAMES 950 30 WARD 1250 30 MARTIN 1250 30 TURNER 1500 30 ALLE 1600 30 BLAKE 2850 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected Entering Long Titles If you need to enter a title greater than 500 characters in length you can use the SQL Plus command DEFINE to place the text of each line of the title in a separate user variable SQL gt DEFINE LINE This is the first line SQL gt DEFINE LINE2 This is the second line SQL gt DEFINE LINE3 This is the third line Then reference the variables in your TTITLE or BTITLE command as follows SQL gt TTITLE CENTER LINE1 SKIP 1 CENTER LINE2 SKIP 1 4 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions gt CENTER LINE3 Displaying the Page Number and other System Maintained Values in Titles You can display the current page number and other system maintained values in your title by entering a system value name as a title element for example TTITLE LEFT system maintained_value_name There are five system maintained values you can display in titles the most commonly used of which is SQL PNO the current page number For a list of sy
382. ype of value returned for functions a the argument names types whether input or output and default values if any Examples To describe the table EMP enter SQL gt DESCRIBE EMP SQL Plus lists the following information ame Null Type EMPNO NOT NULL NUMBER 4 ENAME CHAR 10 JOB JOB 9 GR UMBER 4 HIREDATE DATE SAL UMBER 7 2 CO UMBER 7 2 DEPTNO UMBER 2 To describe a procedure called CUSTOMER_LOOKUP enter SQL gt DESCRIBE customer_lookup SQL Plus lists the following information PROCEDURE customer_lookup Argument Name Type In Out Default CUST_ID NUMBER IN CUST_NAME VARCHAR2 OUT Command Reference 8 57 DESCRIBE To create and describe the package APACK that contains the procedures aproc and bproc enter SQL gt CREATE PACKAGE apack AS 2 PROCEDURE aproc P1 CHAR P2 NUMBER 3 PROCEDURE bproc P1 CHAR P2 NUMBER 4 END apack 5 of SQL gt DESCRIBE apack SQL Plus lists the following information PROCEDURE aproc Argument Name Type In Out Default Pl CHAR IN P2 BER IN PROCEDURE bproc Argument Name Type In Out Default P1 CHAR IN P2 BER IN To create and describe the objec

SQL*Plus or reference - Oracle Documentation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents